The yA:NTHON Library. | COLLECTED BY CHARLES ANTHON Frofessor of Grreeli and. Hiatin in Coltimbia College. Purchased by Cornell University, 1868, Cornell University Library PJ 4571.S93 1832 Hebrew chrestomathy. 1924 026 837 512 The original of tliis book is in tlie Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026837512 HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY DESIGNED AS AN INTRODUCTION TO A COURSE OF H£BR£W STUDY. BY MOSES STUART, Asaociato Profesaor of Sacred LiteraHTre in the Theological Inatitution at Andover. SECOND edition: with additions and correct ions. ANDOVER: PLAGG AND GOUI.D, PUBLISHERS AND PRINTERS. NEW YORK: J. LEAVITT, 182, BROADWAY. Codman Press. 1832. & KB 593^ N_ Entered, according to act of Congress, in the year 1832, by FLAGG & GOULD, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. CU-^X-ti^^fC' tJir'U*-' ^^-O* PREFACE. Chrestomathies in Latin and Greek, have long been employed for the instruction of youth, in most of the countries of Europe. The utility of them is so evident, that the practice of employing them, in our country, has recently extended to all the modern languages, which are studied among ns to any considerable extent. The French, the Italian, the German, and the Spanish, all have their respective Chrestomathies ; and this, to the great convenience of learner and teacher. On the continent of Europe, however, where Chrestomathies, in most languages that are studied, are almost universally employed, there has been some diversity of opinion among the learned, about the ex- pediency of employing Chrestomathies in the Hebrew language. The late J. G. Eichhom of Gcittingen, so well known to the hterary world, ill his Bibliothek, (a long continued and very able work, made up of learned reviews, essays, etc.), was accustomed to speak with much dis- regard of Hebrew Chrestomathies, and to protest against them. Oth- ers have done the same thing. But the reason of this is evident ; and it must be acknowledged, also, that it was sufficient. Of all the Hebrew Chrestomathies 'vyhich I have yet examined, (and I have seen most of them which have acquired any considerable name), none have been conducted on a plan, which affords substantial aid to the learner. Most of them have been almost a mere reprint of select parts of the Bible ; and often times, of some of the most difficult parts of all the Scriptures, merely because the rhetoriccd qualities of the pieces select- ed were very striking. Against such Chrestomathies Eichhom might well protest ; for why should not the student at once purchase his Hebrew Bible, and study in that the lessons printed in his Chrestoma- thy, rather than purchase another book which offered him nothing more than a part of the simple text of his Bible.' A few Chrestomathies have contained notes, mostly of a kind which have respect to higher or lower criticism ; but very few offer any considerable assistance in respect to grammatical analysis. Of course, books of this class have never satisfied the wants of beginners, and therefore they have soon fallen into neglect. So far as my knowledge of Hebrew Chrestomathies extends, none have yet been published, which are Uke the present in regard to the specific object to be attained. Experiment only could determine, whether a Hebrew Chrestomathy, more fidly adapted to the wants of PREFACE. beginners than has been usual, would not find as good encouragement, and be of as much utility, as a Latin or Greek one. This experiment has now been made, and the result leaves no room for doubt. More has been effected, than my most sanguine expectations anticipated. That which is done viva voce in the lecture-room, and addressed to the ear of Hebrew students, on the continent of Europe, it is my aim to exhibit here to the eye of our students, on printed pages. The author of this small volume, while he cherishes the highest re- gard for the profound and extensive erudition of many scholars and teachers in the old world, still professes himself unable to see how a beginner in Hebrew, who receives oral instruction ex cathedra, (and writes down as well as he can, which at the best must be very badly at first, what is dictated to him, phrase by phrase, or word by word, and then cons over what he has written), can be more profited, than to have the same instruction, of which he has made but an imperfect copy in his notes, fully exhibited in a well printed book, and so ar- ranged, that recurrence to it is, at all times, easy and without the dan- ger of mistake. With all his deference to the great masters of teach- ing in Europe, he cannot persuade himself, that in this point they are not mistaken, at least, with regard to the elementary part of linguistic study ; and above all, in regard to such a language as the Hebrew, the writing down of which is so difficult for the unpractised beginner. No wonder that so few in Europe ever pursue the study of the He- brew to any great length, while the process of acquiring it is made so tedious ; and while (it may be added) then- studies are conducted on a plan, which makes the learner rather a passive recipient than an active agent. The human mind, from its very nature, cannot long follow such a course of study with much satisfaction. In regard to the selection of pieces for this Chrestomathy, it has been my design to choose those which are easy, and, in some respect or other, of speciall interest ; and which may therefore serve at once to excite the student and to instruct him. If any one should suggest, that there are other pieces in the Old Testament of equal or of supe- rior interest, and which ought to have been preferred, I shall not dis- pute the point with him ; for in a book, which is all divine, and of such a compass as the Old Testament, it would be strange if some thirty chapters should comprise all that is striking, and useful, and beautiful. It were easy to make out many more volumes of Chres- tomathy, like the present, and yet to leave much behind, which one must pronounce vei-y excellent. My plan has been, to take that which might serve to aid and to instruct the beginner ; wliich is easy, and yet inviting ; and in following this plan, I have, of couree, omitted most of the awfully sublime parts of the Old Testament, nearly all of which are replete with exegetical and grammatical difficulties. How incongruous it would be, in a selection of such pieces as the present, to be guided only by rhetorical taste, and to make out a book merely containing ",the beauties of the Bible," no considerate person will fail to perceive. PREFACE. I have extended the selection so far, as may serve the purposes of an introduction to the regular, extgelical study rf the Hebrew. My views of the importance of accurate, grammatical analysis, are suffi- ciently explained in the notes appended to this volume. In estimat- ing the present work, I must beg the reader to remember, that my principal design is, to aid the student in the grammatical study of the Hebrew. All else besides this, is added for the sake of smoothing the way, and making it more attractive. No student of any understand- ing, can long content himself with the mere study of words, forms, and syntactical constructions ; he must understand, in some good de- gree, the meaning of what he reads, in order to take any pleasure in it. Recognizing this principle of our nature, I have all along, from the very outset, added such brief exegetical remarks as may assist the beginner, and make his progress more agreeable to him. As the Notes advance, they become (as is proper) more exegetical, and less grammatical. But no grammatical difficulty whatever is wittingly passed over, without an attempt at explanation. The exegetical re- marks are, for the most part, very brief; but, I would fain hope, such as are better adapted to beginners, than if they were more formal. What is sometimes given in a single sentence, has cost me hours of study. But the parade of learning would ill become a book of this kind ; and I would rather hazard the imputation of having vmtten too briefly, than of having made out a great book, which the learner could neither reUsh nor understand. A case like the present I take to be one, in regard to which it may be truly said, fiiya ^t^Uov fuya xaxov. Some of the investigations, which led to remarks made at the close of various pieces in this selection, have cost time and eflfort which critical students, and probably such ordy, vnil know well how to estimate. If these remarks should prove to be useful to the learn- er, either in the way of instruction or of excitement to further inves- tigation, it will be more than a compensation for all the labour bestow- ed on them. The reader who takes the pains to compare the present edition with the former one, will perceive that some changes have been made. The Praxis, which constituted Part I. m the first edition, I have now thrown into an Appendix at the close. Wha,t was Part II. in the for- mer edition, is now made Part I. Nor is this the only change in it. Students complained, somewhat generally, that this part was too dif- ficult for them ; and that they found the selections fi-om the historical books more easy to read, than the hundred select sentences. This, no doubt, was true ; and the reason is, not the difficulty of the sen- tences in themselves considered, but the extent and variety of the vo- cabulary or cu-cle of words which they comprise. On this account, I have thro^vn out the last eighty of the select sentences, and have re- tained only the first twenty, all of which are very simple and easy. In lieu of the sentences now excluded, I have added forty short phrases; as short as they possibly could be, and yet make some Intel- VI PREFACE. ligible sense. The design of them is simply to lead the student through the study of the verbs, regular and irregular. Of course, he ought not to extend his lessons beyond the limits, in which he can render himself master of the respective forms and conjugations of the verbs. At any rate, in reviewing these short sentences, he should prescribe to himself this rule of study. The object of the first forty sentences'is purely grammatical ; and as they are, in their nature, on- ly fragments of sentences, I have omitted the usual Soph Pdsuq (;), which, like our period, is commonly placed by the Hebrews at the end of a sentence. The insertion of this pause-mark or period be- gins with No. 41, Part I. ; with which, also, begins the fiu-st selection of biblical sentences. I would solicit the attention of the teacher and learner, to the Ap- pendix with the Notes which it contains, at an early stage of the stu- dent's progress. A neglect to pursue the course there recommended, will necessarily hinder the real progress of the learner. Facit bene, quifacit scienter. In order to complete a Hebrew page (p. 61), I have added to the present edition a parable from Ezek. 17: 1 — 10. It were easy to add more ; but it is inexpedient, at present, to make the book any larger. One mistake has occurred in printing the book, which needs some explanation, and which the student can easily remedy. As the Hebrew text now stands, it is divided into two parts merely. After the Hebrew was struck off, and the printing of the Notes was begun, it seemed to me more natural and easy, to divide the Hebrew text into four parts ; Part I. comprising the sixty short sentences ; II. the se- lections from Hebrew ^ro«e ; III. from poetry ; IV. from the ;)a7-a- bles. The convenience of this, i^ apparent ; and if the student will spend a few minutes, in altering with his pen the running titles on the head of the page, from p. 40 onward, the whole will be conform- ed to the arrangement in the Notes. In regard to the price of the present volume, it seems proper to say a word. The expense of publishing books of criticism on the Hebrew language, and of printing Hebrew, is a thing that is yet but very imperfectly understood, in our country. That the pubUc may be enabled to make some proper estimate of it, and so to judge, on good grounds, whether the price of books hke tlie present is put too high, it is proper to state, that the labom- of correcting a printed sheet of Hebrew, with the accents, is at least twenty Jive times as much as that of correcting English printed with a type of the like size; and that the labour of the printer in setting up and correcting such a sheet, is at least six times as much as that of executing a sheet in Engjish. Then the labour of the original writing or composition, where so many Hebrew words are to be wi-itten as occur in the notes to this volume, is, at least, four times as much as that of composing a like quantity in mere English. Besides all this, no sheet is contained in the present volume, which has not, in the printing, gone through at least four several corrections or revisals, besides the corrections of tlie PREFACE. printers. Let those who know how to estimate the severity of such labour, judge, in view of these facts, whether the present book and others of a similar character, can reasonably be asked for at a lower price than that at which they are actually sold. It would be improper for me to conclude this preface, without making known to the reader, that if he shall finji a good degree of accuracy in the present edition, (which I hope and trust will be the case), he must attribute no small part of this to the diligence and accuracy of Mr. Joshua Seixas in respect to the Hebrew text, and of Mr. Elias Riggs fa member of the present Senior Class here), in res- pect to both the Hebrew and the Notes. The former gentleman, the son of a Jewish Rabbi, possesses a knowledge of the Hebrew which is nearly vemacvlar ; and he has, with the greatest kindness and assi- duity, spent, ranch time and pains on the correction of the sheets sent to him : the latter is laying a foundation broad and deep, in respect to the oriental languages generally, which promises a superstructure of more than ordinary magnitude. To both I tender my sincere and hearty thanks. As no pains have been spared in the printing or preparation of this edition of the present work, I indulge the hope, that the student will find some improvement in regard to both matter and manner. The ink which has been used, is the best that can be found in our coun- try ; the press and the workmen have been as good as could be foimd among us. As to the additions, they are small, but not few. Not a page has escaped alterations ; many of which, however, are too mi- nute to be noticed by the student. I have verified anew every ref- erence in the book, either to the Bible or the Hebrew Grammar ; and adapted them all to the last edition of the Grammai-. I have felt my- self under obhgation to the pubhc, to do all in my power to make the work as complete as I can ; and having faithfully endeavored to dis- charge this obligation, and knowing that the printers and pubUshers have as faithfully endeavored to do ,their duty ; I commit the whole to the public, beseeching the great Author of the Scriptures to bless this and every attempt made to promote the knowledge of his Holy Word. M. STUART. Andover; TlicnI. Seminary, July, 1832. PART I. EASY SENTENCES FOR BEGINNERS. ■'Dill. t3)?,'d 3. : ■ -: ■ : 't nin^ nnin finty h- ''DNi. «"^i innn nni» is- 2 10 PART I. SELECT SENTENCES. '• • - :'iT in^na nin*] nstp^ ^b 20. D-iydnn iinui'' 22. ni4{_ nsri 39. Y>^n ^.N{ Dnit its^i 40. PART I. SELECT SENTENCES. II \ pi;^s as'ia D^ri^jj! 41. \ D-^n'bi^n tsbffl'' ym-in-riN 42. roViy^ Dipi ^a^n'Vi* "O'n 44. ,T ; It C' ■■■: }^s^ nn& ^-)2ia 46. } ^"i^ffl i<^ smasj niDx naaipnit 47. t n?- yi'T" i''-)ax '^I'ain 49. i ny^ T\'^m-\ nin^ nx-i'* 51. -IT • •■ T : - ;• -|T •.••:• I T j^nri nan ""S d^n nin^pna yi'T' nin^ 54. ♦ np/3 ti^pip. ny^i nin^ nstT nasn nVnn 55. I . - I ■ -J- I • ; — ^T T T • T : { -IPS nnsin xsiiai nyi nnit iDia anij 57. -|T — ;- •• : -iSt " T • {0^153 ^ujifli nsi^an nin^!? ss. |. - .. ^T ; - T - t -iiT^is irinVaJaaT D^a!:j-^3 n^i^a irinis^ia 59. } nVtDa ^33 inisV^i ij«D3 ]^3n n^xi'tss nin^ eo. T|T T - : - ft ; • ' " •• ■ -T-C T ; PART II. SELECT PORTIONS OF THE HEBREW SCRIPTURES, IN PROSE AND POETRY. I. The original creation of the heavens and the earth, and the primitive state of the latter; Gen. I. 1, 2. } a^an "^db-^? nsn-ia ts^ji'V** II. 2%e work of the first day; Gen. I. 3 — 5. • '•••■ : — I Ti- t, •: • v.' V )- ^•15^ ni4«n 1^3 n-'ri'Vi* ^"Mn*! nia-^s ni&*ji-ni» .T V (v t • : r ••' ;v ■ :r III. The work of the second day ; Gen. I. 6 — 8. ■ r^.^^'iafi ^Ji^l ^^H^ """'^"^^ ^^1^1 ^n? '=^n"'^^^. 'iP.^'*'!! 6 -^-n'.,! CJ^HIP :^_^'?-ib Q^n'Vi?. >«ip'i t p-^n^i y^nb s PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 13 IV. The work of the third day ; Gen. I. 9—13. niD3*^ Q^n'bx xnp^i t p-^n^i nmsv. nu^nm 'inx 10 -''3 n'«n'V« «"i*i n^B'' N"ip n^an niptibi 7"i»< y'^nta n"ffl? «ffl^_ y-ikri sfflnn d^^Vni. Tn.i*!;! t sip 11 -^y in-i3>iT -idis iD^aV ns niiy ns v^' 3>"it V. The work of the fourth day ; Gen. I. 14 — 19. b^^^^tib Q'^MH y^p-ia nhj ; - v; T • ; I V T T V > Q'ln'Vx i<")!i ^siD.ia^^ ^^T^vl ^^9.^^ ^'?.'! ^r^^. ^3'a.^22 nnsj ni2.?3 QTl'Viit 153.4<*1 t nip-i3 26 T •• : - . -T - I ; T - - • ■ :• : , ^•• : • T • •— I V IT T — •■ IT VcV T T ; J V ▼ T T ; ^ ^ T T . v: V )••• : ; - ; t t it "iQi^n fi'^nV^ Dni* TiiD'^i toni* 44-is nnp3i nST 28 V *" ' V; ▼ ' V->T ;— It t -r (▼'•• ; tt nmasi v-|^{^-n^{ lij^a^ im^ lis n^u^a nnV -h's-na nd^ ^nn3 nsn a^n'Vi* iiQi^^i i V")^!!"^? T V •.•»_• -T ... . ^ .... V J- ) ... IT T - -!33-ni<_'] Y"i.^^vJ"^^ ^^P~^Z "iPi^ y'il Zi) '^'^Z t rh^ab n^n^ udb y-iT y-iT V3'"'^"is i^-y^a v:?n IT ; T : V .|. ^ ■.• T -hT - •■ I .. . ; ... -: I .. T ntoy p-i'^-Vs-ni* n*n tdD3 ia— iias* vni^n-^y -.•£•• I •.•)■.' T V T - •.•-••.• V -; I -.. T T - 29 30 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 15 VIII. The original institution of the Sabbath ; Gen. II. 1 — 3. -!j3a nniu ^n ^s ini* ^b'^p'^'i ^y'^i^n a'T^-nx 1 -:r • v: r » •.• -: : - J IX. The formation of man, and the condition in tohich he was at first placed; Gen. II. 7 — 17. as 3^ tzjii^n ''JT'i CD'^^n nam's T^Bi^a nB*i . '^ ;.. T ; - ; — ITT V -: t t it •.• t ) ... ftT-:i-: : ■••:-: •';•.■)•; t tt-.it i • fits'" nriai jj^ni niu ny^n yyi ^in ijina n^^nn 10 I V-JV •'' '" •• — ' K * T .' fT •• I • T fin^a -iDtBri ninsri-ta bi t nnto'n ^dj^.i nV'rafi na 13 ^jp'i^tBn: -i!i3n"n|!3i } »ri^3 Yn>{->3 ni< nniDn 4<^n 14 • ••It tt*"; iS "■;'' 1 '• -yp inns*! an!«'^ffin (23 nan nmin najini rr^tsy nxma rus^b ■ f- . • 3TT - T • IT V - )'■'''()"' ~ (T -It ■r -i» T )■ TT — V -• • v.* T • -.■ - 1" It y.' T - J t • T •• : - T • T - .r T JT •• : 'r. - 3": T c- _ 3T t; /•• "^ J' ; I ; n:?iT rni qy-iT i^ai nmn rn^ iriD^s n^ffii« ftT .- I J" r'-: :- 13-' T • IT ' -■■• _ I : r nmn-ba Japs' isBiiiin nr-ixi "jiNn ssvo^ ki- le -It -ct V 'i" T 3v : f ~: , -■' : I : ' a;;3a ''i^n aa^a ^iini 'q^.ia^? na-jii na-in itjj -ibN aiN^T {Tia4t2:a^ 4i niJta tri"^^ tina« ras nnnn nn&'i nbs^t'^a'nsVsn naji-^vi yiM3— ittjji Vd Q^affln nriM D-^^ri nin "is— itiJN!. T T lAT • ( ■ • ; •.• ;■ »• -:r it • • PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 10 14<'2^ !:35: D^DUJ 1nDi52V t^^Ht: '•Ql2-\ ^sa FlS'^'ti'^ -{-- It : T ; c."''; 3' ; jr t; I \ :• •• i-r ; - It : •• ti" ; nto p u^riba 'inLs n^s ntiiN Vss ria It t I)." ( « ;•; » Jt • V ": : ~ ^ XV. Entrance into the arlc, and prevalence of tJie flood; Gen. VII. 7—24. ^T •• - V ( • jj T I- ; i : • ; T T - JT- -- id»» Vsi &iyn-753i nnna n33\^< im nan^n ^ ... -: j; I -r I • ^T : T(V ■• )■.•-: ^ •■ ; - ... -J ... ,T •-; •-; ,T T -: fT - c" in^l t inns3 d^mh ni3>si.i nin ninn ni3';ya 12 ^;|T f T ; - ; -" T.: ~ I J"•■^T T - V (■.•- nan ir^nrln-^^{ Q^it T'3n-''U}3 nujVuii rii r\m^ 14 Q^'sjij n jnn'^ij. ni-^jj. ii«'n'j_ : ti33-^3 niss 15 niani tt3^*n nil ia-Tdi* I'asn-^sa a^ird le yapa snn * 20 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. !3ya D-ifii nnnn-nj* ij^to^i o^an i3-i*i ynxn -^y ij«a 'lita iina n^ani { c^an ^3S-^y nnnn i9 t : ) : > ifT • : -ft - 3": ~ f " I '.' T T - -J •• IT -J r r 1^ - . .— r T IV C ■-. M"" • - - ~ : ' •' "I )T T )T It) V^-r * T ^ V - — I" (X T TIV )V -i 3 ■ T - . vnxn-^y n^an inaa-i } nnna in*} nmi nb 24 XVI. Abatement of the flood. Noah and his family quit the ark; Gen. VIII. 1—20. -Vy mS a^ri^j* inri nnna in*} -iffiNi/ntnsn nin>jl Qinn ri3^?a hsD^i j a'^an ^sb^i v-ii '•■ ->■• : ■ V - -TT- I ■.•\r T J- ■• •( ) . It ■^b^n ain3^ } naii*n ^ds imn nam Jti'^i nfinn 14 ■ •• - V - IT T -; IT >•• ; c : IT >•■ •: ; t •• - I -.' rT T [ T : IT •.• ^ - ( 5 • ; ■■■ : It ; • : nann-ia ^^2 j -iaiv6 V"ij ^ -''3 ^33 vmi 4- : ' V -:-'t • 'nb*i nVn^ i^^x -is-n -)ib.s*3 n'i3»« ti^^i { n53ii3di a^3a d53n-i3 tz3n3u>*i DiV iJn»< t nn53 ini5«s3 ' it t I" ( •• ; p'ta y»p PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 23 XIX. The second promise made to Abraham, while residing at Mamre; XV. 1—6. t .:iT : '■«■ '-»••* 'It ^.— j^. — h ** (V -: i" »"• ptai ij^n "in^s p-jja-pi n^ns? Tib'in ^5i:i«i I :• )■••- ( . .. ( ...-■•.■ ' V h- ■-. I-'" t* It; iaxb ^^j< riin^-- 1SI nsni }^ni< dni'^ ^n^s-p 4 ,.''• "• :< . ' ■••■• • -••■, "■••? • r '■■;,'■ ">". ' 'it T : t T)V; ; ftT r ' ( ■ V! IV : 'iV ;- XX. The third promise made to Abraham^ at Mamre ; Gen. XVII. 1—8. hitT] 4 "= ' = {!r]^nn3 t3;;i5 "jian-nx ^2 D^nai« !r)53B irni n^s^a^" D^i:iV in^nn3i iL^a ni«533 ^ni^ ^mani e /•- •• '>• •• 't<^ '•• •■>.-'•■■ •■ ' '■" •■ ■■■ !r]^^ n'l^n^ cViy n^nn'? onn^^^ 'i^nm^. ^^yni irjntVi '^^' ' ^nns;. }'^^n.n!>? ^Vp^ Q'n^4- ^ 24 PAKT II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. XXI. Abraham offering up his son ; Gen. XXII. 1 — !"• ^y nb>^. D'jj in),?.!!'], rinan yi.i^."^!!*. "^)^,"'^S?1 nninj* cs^'i js'^^jis -lai* -i^s< tDnnri nnssi 3 . . ; - J - |i ... 1^ 3 - IT V -: ' Z " iV"n*!i."i;] tzi'^n^?? ^hlP'.^- '"^^.^h '^^^k r^^.n ^ -^4« ^jsii*i {i^rr^ nn-'Dd *i3b^i ■'ds n^i?'^ nkn 9 ib pn2^-n.\ lp?,;Ll Q'^syrrni^. ^hr i ni^^^ ti3-i-ni<. -onp^ rt3.>{ari-nwv{. nj?.*! i^'m PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OP PHOSE. 25 Ninn Dipan-Dd amn»« Nnp*i tiaa nnn nVy^ ^ ) nst-i'' nin^ ina □'i^n -i524<'' im nj«T 1 nin^ ♦ aiatBn"!^ n'^ya cmni^t-^i* nin'^ "nitVa >«ip*i 15 ^3i'i53 S3?-)T-n>i nsii* n2"ini !ri5nn« 'n-in-^s i? • v" I vftx T -"■ t I ': :~ ; -• "n ; • ; it: 1 -)- m^P^i T^nyr^wv dnnni* nuj^i pVps JHS^a-^a nd&« 19 "IT ;■• : " (■*■'*■ i " V ;"~ -h-r -"• ; v ct :r ) :i"~ XXII. Appearance of Jehovah to Jacob; Gen. XXXV. 9 — 15. 'niD'^i dius* nB53 'ifrins iiy ap?"'-^i« D'^nVx ^n^i 9 'V(t:- ^t -: 'jt - • c : i -:r v ■" v; ■<•— sad 4«ip''"4«^ np:!''' sad a^nV^ V^-- la^'^i tini* 10 -nj« i*"ip*i sad ST'rT' ^>j-i';!:^-ni< ^3 np?'^ I'ly nn.B ^ id % ■'V^. i^^h'V^. i^ n5:>v*i 1 ^Jijind'; "ipd n s^s^na a^s^ai laa n^ST' Q^i: '^npi '^ia nam pns^^l nmDH^ ^ihd Tds( viiJtn-iii!*! jivvs^ 12 I (X :• : )x X : - ; -j-x )■.•-: 1 v x x v : r- •• ^n t Viw^n-nvV inM snn^* s:?nT^i nsDn** f:;? 13 2py^ ak*i nnx -laTTdx aipas n^nV^ i^^^^^a h Tio*i p>« nnsa "inj* -isTidix aipaa nisa 4 26 PART U. SELECT PASSAGES OF PBOSE. m-nn- 2p:>'^ a^p^i \ lad ri'^by p's^i tis: h'^^is' i^ V I -.r tI;-- I vit -rtVT^' J ^- 'VV TV ->■ { ^6«-n^3 D^n'Vftt ens init ns'i -II2^{ Dipan XXIII. Birth, education, and flight of Moses ; Ex. II. 1 — 15. nnni { ''iV-na-nN np^ ^^b t— i^aa ffl''i< 'n^M I _j — |. .. _ ... ji — ^. .. _,.. . (. J...).. -nij. na niafii ns^fni ip^nn siniqnni .saa n:nFi. innK ^2nm { li^^n n&'^-^y &id3 Dtoni n'p^n 4 Nnjni iix^n "i^-^y nbynn^nnyai -ij^^n-^y vniV {^V^n Qi<-nK i{-ipni nt^yn Ti^m "lib nj?"is ' >,. 1 -■•■ . ^ ., — T l-..^.- IT V 1" c- ; ■ I'ART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 27 it-i^-sT naan-ni* min -iffij^s iris* nnx ^D^nn^n ■'T •— ^• : • - V TIC"-' 3-' "y ■■ -■ -^ " ■ ■■ : -^ : r -PN Hns pais*! nn'^n yiis px naisi^i nM 15 } l^ia-YnN3 nm*i jiHs ^3£5: XXIV. Appearance of JeJiovah to Moses, in the burning hush ; Ex. III. 1—6. 'At : • '-■•■ t : I ) : • _' s ••• sv r t c- •.■.■IT )- ■.• 5T- T :•--.-- I -^ •.■ .^-:.- •nini: "J3i«-n3^3 i^^jt n'm^ irj^^a stn^i {Jinn'n 2 -iai«*i riDDn ii^na n^n^j» rV^^i j«-)p*i m4«-iV no nais? nriN i^k Dipan ^s in'Va-i ^::>53 in-'^s^r^a !ninj< inV^ '^iii* n53i«'*i t j«in iri'ip-naix i^V? s ,.. ; — >h---r -■■• r- * CT :• 3" ^ v; ST T : - \- ■.■; (• ;■; fT *.■ c* "I" "T J . T -r XXV. Commission of Moses concerning the oppressed Israelites ; Ex. VI. 2—11. IX ; 3" "= f '■ ■•• J~ '-■•' ■•■ £■ '•'•■ 3"~:~ ^•^ffl' Sv3 3i?J'^ "^sti pns'i-^ij nnnn>{-^4« ft^ni^i 3 h-r- ->•• : h--r ■•■: • )T ; • ■-■ Stt;-_ ■.■ T "IT -ns*. Tiflj??!. DJii ton!? '^nyni: j^i^ nin^ rqffii 4 v-i»< riK 1^33 v^*<"ri*' ^^^ ^^^ ^^** ^^'^'^^ I ■••)■.• 5" I-at : 1 ■.•-■■.• ••• tvT ;••» T • • • : 28 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. t]|Dnx iriVsni □n=^'2 ri':no nnn5j ninsj. Tifi^sini n'^asfflDT rjMc:3 yi-ita asnx ^^n^&tai tsmb^a Yiitn-^ii DSnwx ^ni^nrii jnnsa ni^sD nnn52 s IT ; 3- -: {T T I sv T )T ■ -It: '^":r : ; It ^; V T ; • -." : v if sv _ 3"-:- nffl53-^N nin'' 131^1 t nap nisi^ai nn -i2j?B 10 )-.■ V CT : )••-;- It It (t -: I" - v'j • 1 : - !■• c" T : • I" ; XXVI. Institution of the Passover, and the smiting of the first- horn in the land of Egypt ; Ex. XII. 18 — 33. nka ^i^SN'n mys EJi'n^ ai^ nd? nVsn^v^a A-yz is /, - ( : 1 V -.' T -.• - - T T T T ; - : I . !x aia'i nynd j niya din': D^-ii£?i inwvn ai^ ny i9 ■ T J : • -.■ It T V ( - 5 • : V ; | t ■.• |t J - nri"i53i nsan53 ^5,k-^s i ''S cp^nna wvsa^ i<^ n^-iS tviixn mTKDT -)53 ^Ki'^D'i n^ya j^inr. m^r\ fifiksi. -iKiNi^i ^i<-i"ifl^ ^spr^iV nffla wv-ip*! t nisa 21 t n&sn ronai DS'^nnE'da^ "imis asb ^np^ lioa !qs2 -itdi<^ a^^ti-'i'a HTiTari ''Pib-^i ;qipffian-^^{ 22 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 29 °?'.n "^i^!! ^''^n iD^^J^^^-niji an_2a-nx iD533 riyns -ib352 D-^nsa ynNa niss-^D nsn nin^i -lisn n';;?3 -i)a>v ^iffin niia i? 'ityos-^p ntd.^rt i^w-bsij»in nh^^ riy-iBtDp/*! { nana nisa ys-i 30 n^i -iw-is nnaaa nVi: npys ^nm □'^nsa-^ai pN-i^-" ^3a-tD5 nnN»-D5 ^ay 'irina ^s^s laip nai<«'i -m ^^33^{■^-na t ns-ians nirp-nj* Ti^y id^*) 32 !• - c"-' : ~i" ^•••>■ (••• : ~ • )v-:i- 9 '; jv .)- . 13 V"iJs nvl^wst r,!^ n;:n^-i<^ j Q^nn? 3 -i>i^ { Y'lub nnPis n^aiD -iffifrji nnna via^ ita^ 5 in^nV^ riin^ ''Six ^3 ninyn ab) nub ninjndn np3i i« nin^-t]B-ni« a^n liib 7 ^byn D^a; nffl|5 htp'^j?^_ natsri oi^-nij. "list's-s nin^^, nam ^y^n^n di^i ♦ !r]n5wsb5D-^3 nv^yi 10 ' IT I y ' i* '.'; yr ; v ~; t x -:-i-r : ns-in isi^ 13 i &KDn isj^ 14 I IT ; • c t nian iib 15 ♦^n^ "ip V31 ^nani s^^hm 'inasJi'" i'^ayi PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 31 XXVIII. Renewal of the same; Ex. XXXIV. 4— 8. ns^n'i liiys nin^ ^"i^i {D^srii^ nh^ ^3d i'i'^3 5 i^3B-^y I r\\t\^ nby*i tn'iri^ nrai 44< i**in^qNi.i_ n^3 . ]nn^'-^3n inp,^! 1 nin^ ^3&^ w^Sp^i mbp rr*^:? ia^ffi*i. u:^ inn niiia -liQNi^i jn'in^ ^3&^in5:*i anix^Sj^Tn nin^ 3 !T ; 5": • J c ••.•'" A-' -■" f : } t-ini< D'^^1 in3j« n2?n-^5 ^3B-^3>i dipN XXX. The blessing to be pronounced by the priests upon the people of Israel; Num. VI. 22 — 27. } dh!? -lifiii !?>«nii3'' ^sa-nx ipnnn ns inab i^3n IV X t -f ^" •^ ! • -"" •■ ■•■ ' "•''' '• ^ •■ -JT X 32 PART n. SELECT PASSAGES OP PBOSE. 25 24 26 { D5-0w>« ■'2X1 ^Jilffi'' ^3S-Vy ''aa-nX 152T21 ^7 i"-:iT-: c- -:r h" -r : • -•••: ~ t': '■ 3 ' • XXXI. Destruction of Korah, Dafhan, and Ahiram ; Num. XVI. 23—35. Ir-iT- It • -:r ' )t t -Ic ' -: • : ■ ■» • 'I }^i«"1ffl^ ^3pT I'^IHK 15^*1 DTDNI inl-^X "rib*! ^ • T -r (T •• r; It "■ " T -< •• -r •• tr V •• : tT --ir ')TT -1} F-; • (- •• T|— It - T ; V •• r: IT -VT! • T- -« :iT -r ■ -:!■" ' -r t : ^* ' ' •j^iynn njv T 3V -! T ; ;•• ; ••- \ : n -r -^Di {^npn 'nin53 inn^i^i V"i5^!^ d'T'^J' wni 34 -■IB ina^t -IS nVp^ 1D3 an-Tib^aD n^j* ^itnta-' PART U. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 83 -"• - ~ AT ; -■•• •• (T ;iT y: I viT T c"'' : • XXXII. Water brought from the rock, hy Moses, for the chil- dren of Israel ; Num. XK..7 — 11. -j53 D-ib cnV h4i.sini T^a^'a "inDi Dn^i^:?^ y^sn riffla np*i {QTra-niii niyn-n&t nyam y^on 9 >:• jl-.- ,T . • ... . CT •• It V )t I • : •; - ... - -i^yaa anV -la^^'i y'^on ^ss-^n ^ripn-n>i innsii • • ...T V -.- -At - -■■• ; V jtIt - V ' S " r : a-iM { D^a B5^ iV^'S'i] riTn y^Dn-ian Di-^.an i<3 n J V T- • IT {-.' T )• ... - -J-.- - I • -! • -^ T ^jxs^T D'^a^s ^inaas ?Vsn-niJ« "n^i ii^-ns* nma : I"- 'At-i,- I" - ; -sv — V »i-- T } an^ym niyn nuiim ta^ln o^a It ■ ! • f " It ; ; )•'" • ■" '-*" XXXin. Exhortation to love God, to obey his statutes, and to inculcate them on the rising generation ; Deut. VI. 4— -9, 13, 17, 18. T : -JT • IT V }T ; {>■ :•; )T J h" T : • t~: T : t' : :~ t : j' :it • t • ' av v: -"t ; c" qna i^ii* -iffii* inVi^n onn-Mn i^^ni {iniita e 5/; - ; (• it V -: ... ■■ T J i T ; - t; 'IV : snnisn na ma'^i q^bb cnDsdi t !riaa!?-^y Di*n 7 "«'::• : at (t ; - • ; /•.•>•; ^ t ;-• : /iv T : ^-^ t - iT • - : ' ^j ■.•••' y c T I : ) t ; ;avt - c : 1 3?nDn iaciD^i nhyn "initi hi^T) '^^I'^riba nin^'rin 13 jT I" : Av " 1 v; --T : c : • v ' :i • ■* t 34 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PK09E. nin^ ^3^?a niDni m^n ri^i3J>i {'^'12 nm ^ym is * IV -:r f : J : • • • XXXIV. Dea■■: V TV.- •.^■■• jriiri"' iB^sy n*■•.••: (t •• (T J ;~ : 9v V i" T : • _ •• ; :•- i •• > IV V ;•• t* : y: :t a -■ • : XXXV. Passage of the river Jordan, hy the children of Israel; Josh. III. 9—17. ■jiyin n.NiTS yciin'' n53Ni*i jD5^ri!?x nirr^ ^"O- 10 "nxi ^nsn-ni^i '"inr"rn4<,i "^nnri-nvx^, ''^yDsn "liiN n^nan iin>{ hsn t^Din^ni nbitm ^ira-ian u I ( -! •:-'-'-: •• • !■ : - : t • v: It : ' T : • - PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 35 •^isft:] t3^3ri3n ;;b5-i n'i&3 ni33 n^nj {unffiVinij. is ]'i-i!iri ''a •j'l-i^ri '^as Y>^f]"^ ^il^!l, Ji^,!i^ ihiwsi^ a^inism ni^n-nK -iiyb an^bni^a cyn s^ods ^n^i h J •-:!-; 'V : V C"ir ■•• •• r;-iT •■ t t -.:; • •:" I T IT ■«■• ; I : It T 3" ; • f ; - ' 3 T it }•• ; | nspa *i^at33 1'lnitn ^^«■^3 QisniDn '^Vrini I'^n^n-ny -"■':• c ! :• ' T IT -■•■ ; I . -J 1 - i«.. . - . I .. . — - nn4«-i3 i52p n^3?53^a Q'^^n^n o^an ^na^^i le D^iTm inns isa hm n'^yn dinI 'ri^a prnn nn:? ayni '^nn33 lan n^arrn'^ nansri d^ S? -ni"i3 "linNn ^^to'3' D^snisn iias^'i j 'inn'' 153 n • : ' T IT •• : I • -: 1 - -■ :-i — i •:-.•)•.• . . I .. T ; • -r Z ' h" -r > C* Z~ " ' 3 J 5t t (t '■• t ; \ w-i''n-ni< lins?^ 'i'ian-^3 ^an-n^ij iy ninns 'r : — •.• t--T - •>• - V -t ■=- T T-.TIV XXXVI. 7%e sun and moon arrested in their course ; Josh. X. 12—14. nBKn-ni* nin^ nn t3i'^"3 t^^-'b yuJin'' "is'i^ tn 12 ".'.•IT V T : ■^■" : T r "■-. ;"=•'"■; -'T data ^HnTi?'; 'v:;'?^, 1 iaK'*i i?*!"]'^^ ''jja ^^py nT^i tDarsn a''i*i { li^^st pa^a nn-'i tsi-^ ■]'i;>naa 13 isd-^y rjn*in5 sj^n-fti^sn 'iid\^ ^i5 tjpi-ij? is? '.cC TjT ,: ;-T - -. -:r^ ■•■■.■- ^-:r- ^TT- innxi 113&V Ninn Qi*3 rrin ft^pi \ a^'sn oi'^s w {^rt'^V t:n^3 nVn'' '^3 td^N ^ipa n'lJT' ybciV ' '^'7. T : • • CT ; • T r -" h- '-■ : c : - 3: • V. 16. p D1SM . 36 PAkT II. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. XXXVII. Victory of Dvorak and Borah; Judg. IV. 13— 34. N2'' nin^ »iVn ^n^a k-iD-^D-nx nhn^ ]r3 np8« Vjv T T ••■ : T : !• V T • iJt- It . r .. -: I- I - -r ' + •* IT : - : T )T-^ c-r T : v -^ } -^3 ^B*i D-'ian ni3"in 'i? nanan •'in^i Dsnn kio^Di t "inj^-iy n»«ta3 isi^ 3nn-''S^ xnD'^D nana ir Nsm pD^pn nnn n'^s t^Si ni2n-iiV53 rn"" 'i^'a i« n*nio ''Diwvt rn*iD i-»V« naijm iiiD^D n»-ip'^ V?"' t ns^aiaa insim n^nLsn n^'^^ nD*i i*-i^n-^« ''V.y n^Vi< iai<>i { ^no^ni inp.'dm aVnn "ni<'3-ni< 20 -i5i<'] '^!?i*u3'J isin^ ■d\\-ai< n;^n'] ^ns^n nns iw nnn-ndK ^^'^ npm j i\x ma^ii e^n* n&-ir''n 21 V '.• V I" -—T ji- •- 1 -IT : :)- T. (• J ," -: Visa nism iiipna in*n-ni< ypnni aip_*i { inp^nn in^ni na ^fc: Nn&/& 23 • T. 18. s-iVtt V. 19. s neh PART It. SELECT PASSAGES Or^PROSE. 37 I -It : > V IV ' )*T c* • ; " -"v -: XXXVIII. ZJeafA of Samson ; Judg. XVI. 23—31. nx ^is-i^s ^3^riV>i Ins nBNt*i nnatoVi Drr^riVx n3''b^n-ns< rts-in niiiiti *i3in4t nnna m^ -pni!:''i liEJamV ^J«np liaisi'i C3^ n'ro^s Vi^i 25 ton^^:? i.'sism nrr'^? liss n^3n nuii* o^'iayn IV "-5 ic"T •.'■ iHV >■-; ' JT J •(- - jv -: • ...-IT D\^'-in Jiffixi ;3\^ £]''Bb&5 nd^U33 ^an-^yi &^!nu:^s i^.^fl fi?|5.vl "^.^ **3^ ''3p.mi ii3 ''3n3T niri] ';3i» nniii i3''a^2 nnsi cn''!?y "naD^i ori''^? 1133 fi^nuJ^B-DJ' ^BD3 nan liaja-d nai*'*') {"iK^'atoaso .... . . .- ^ , I ^ .. . ... J- , . . t3;'n-^3-^yi a^ii-iDn-^y n^an !?b*i riba t:*i n^il'in'iaa n'^jqri— l•fl■^« Q''nan i^n^i 'i2~"iai*^, 'in'^ax n^3-\3i I'^hfi* ^iin^i ; i^^na n''an ntaxa 31 "' ., J" t; t V ;|"- 1'^ ~ ' f " ^"•' "' '" * V. 25. p aiBS ib. p D■^11esn v. 26. p •'jB'^Mn'i v. 28. sBi'nn 33 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. ^N-ito''-nN t:si!3 i^im i^3i« ni3fl -injps Vivxnipij. IT T )• : ■•■ XXXIX. TAe caaing of Samuel; 1. Sam. III. 1—14. nni^ i^y r;s^ ninrs^i?!. n;i.9^. ^^^^^ '^?^^] ^ r^inD ^Vnn i*^i i53ip^.s. ^J?.^ ^^?.l ^^!^^L °'i!^ ^LNt_*i52ipi nip; c-i."q a^riU. n?,i 5 n'li*")^. Vsi*^ ab 3 Tjb*! nid nvd "^ni^^p-isV n52.i<*i "^V rii*;}p"^s '^Dn -i«ip nin^ SD'^i {nirr^-nni ^^ba n^5^ t^roi s ,1. jT : I V - IT : -ji J {T •• y.-T- _ .s.: ^3 ''33n inpi^\ '^V?.-^4j. 'T5?j;i Qp/^i np'^Vaa Vk^^'JJ J... '•.• - _ -IT- 3"' (T ; )• _• •• Iv-'T- A- T ct't nn'D.si irt^'pfii j«np^-Di« n^ni 2312 'qb '5i<^5:mV nsip^.i Kn!.i53?p '^!?;i ^'^P'Z ynp "^p. fiVn": "i2'i aysa-QiPBS 4{np*i n^'^n^i hin'^ Jinn n^aipns 10 yqp ''S nil ^ixitid "ipN'*l ^Ni.i/2p 1 Vjs!.'i^">p nto"? '133K riDn ^jiiad-^jt nin^ n^**"*'i j sin:? n ,... 3. IT {.. .... ... ^ . ... ..;- J|... . - •inia^ -iffli«-^3 ni< "^by-b^ u'^pa kinn ai^s 12 V. 2. p nis'^si PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 39 n^V^pa-^3 jJi^-- I'jjj* "ihys tz3bi5>-iy in^3-n4« «• ;»- : r — r v -: l-.-:r ft»: - ' " ,' '•■ ''by n^nb '>nya©"3 pVi tea nns ji^i i^b nnb 14 IT - f : • : -jv : v ■• i- ' t -: .. - ;. XL. Combat of Bavid with Goliah; 1 Sam. XVII. 38—51. _i r ■ -: -J — , .— ^ , ' ; ~ I- •— tT T I" <■ -r !• IT • : • T V JT- ( • J' T-: -Jl - }^ndb£rI-b^t d5^i 'in^n i:>bpi d^^'^i ib— t^jj* 3" 3 • T : ft- T V c"'t ; '}•• • : • : - ' v •— ^.. ..- J. T V 3v :■- 3-: • : - i r^ t : ,y • - !mibp533 ''bi<-4«5 "f^ii'^s ''^^N* nVrq ii^-bi<. ^FiBbsn -ififi**! }i^ribi«3 mTHN '^ndb^fi bVp^i 44 D^a-jjn srjii^b ^"itos-riN nDn^i ^bi< nib "n"bi<. s^n3m'^T3 nin^ ^,n5D^ n-Tn tai^n jnann 45 t-nana 15B ^riri3'i !^^Vyi□. ^rjp'n-mij. ^nn&m 1 ■.•^T 1- J : "t-T 1 : ;^ ". V. 45. B 03 hmB 40 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE AND POETRY. -by ^5*1 'inaaa Wan ya^ni insa-K^ ^naj^sn piiai pbp3 ^ntiVsn-ja it^ pTtri } r»2-ii< i'^ds 50 mT'1^3 '1%^ 3-)ni inna^'i ^'nd^Bn-nJ« ^1*1 iipx-i-nist na-n-js^i ^I'^T.^Il 'rnyy\i2 risVd*.! n&3*i D-)i25 na-ia n^^l!3^Bn liti^i 1...T- It • y. . 5 .... - I :•- XLI. Hallebijah Psalm ; Vs. CL. • if? ?^'?n^ ini^^ri 'T'n"-ii3j3 Mvhbr\^ 2 ■isiiD ypna ^ni^^"n 3 } ni33i ^333 ini^W ^in53"i tins in^iVlsn 4 5>!QjB-'^^s^^^3 ini!jVn 5 jny^-in''^2'?23ini^in IT • Y* * » ' " • — PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. 41 XLII. Exhortation to hless God; Ps. 134. .•■•'" '-"•■ . \ IT : V • IT -ir^n nin^ rp-ini 3 ' A • • •» :t -■' : viT : XLIII. Exhortation to praise God; Ps. 117, ft* -r -r ;t V J ; — - JT : •■•;•; IV y IT ' rr XLIV. God our benefactor ; Ps. 113. 1 1^1 iV^n 1 nin^ ''^np ^bbn IT : 3" V : - IT — : T - •> It • J •• ▼ '., • niJT' dVis-^js-^:? 12-1 4 ^■' ; 3" T - Tt t i"iia3 D^anjn V? 6 42 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OT POETKY. t V"!**^*! Bifida ■r •• : y -r - It : r XLV. God metciful and faithful; Ps. 103. h-r : :• • .— c -■ • : IT I ;l-r )•• V - T* ; t; ■ : IT -: r T ; •■ T ■'S^^n nnffia K^isn 4 • ; IT : -.• )v - .. - . . t,T ; (j T ; -1 .. PAET n. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 43 t]mh i^s-Ti y^i'i'i 7 n^ni iiDHi mm s } i&n-n-)i ts^EN Tins* ... 1^ -. .J — ) ...(... h'-r -y.-r 1 J "lis'' oV'iy^ j^h 1 • -■■«• : c : IT ■•: - : - r-r At-: 1- • -rr "c ( -■ : • n3^3?i!:s-n4< isab p^nnn A- T - T( J.. - . IT ••: - T ; )- • 13ns'' yii Nin-^3 14 : It -; JT T !• T i^ifi^ T^sna tdi3x 15 ATT -. • tK.- ...;C {y'ls^ 13 ni^n Y''23 I33\vi ^3-n-i33> nin "^S le Av ••: -■ T :iT - J .= • naipa niJ> ^3n^3^-M"^i AT •• ■ - T ( - • ^ t ai33 •'33^ inpisi i. T J.. : • 't r • ^ni-i3 natf^ 18 A • : 3" ! I : it -.t ■»••-.• y» :i : 44 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. •riT -r 3 - : - JT 1- : - f ; 3 : IT AT T : T T :( -■ ! 'T { iais-i •'toy rrnuj^a I ' ; )"j T ;iT : IT : V •;-)•: IT XLVI. God our Creator; Ps. 100. I V It T T -r — 3* •»' J nana ris^ i&t'a ITT ; • T t; 3 3- v; V T ; !• ; i3n3>{ I iiVi latoy x^n ';At ~S j ; TT{ -J rriina 1 inyd ijta 4 { iau] la-ia i!? iiin ^ ; t inDiajt nni n'T'ry'i IT I ■* PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 45 XLVII. God the mighty King; Ps.93. an!? niNa f^iz ni?T< i It ; T -• T : jt I * D^-in3'J3a nn'i'i^ AT •• ; : • V • ~ IT : -" T - ^ t* ~ ijta 1353X3 I n^ri'iy 5 v'a T-.r ■>' ; r : { Q-'fi^ "n-ij*'^ ni'n'' XLVIII. God's Icindness in providing for his creatures ; Ps. 65. tn-'a "ii";V lint*; fl^.l'^H tl73-DVffl> ^Tj^^l J iNiS-' -liB3-^3 ^J^i) , T J T T T » V T '^n'n una nbiy nm < •AV :jt -:t •■•• tj- 5-ipni nnnn i noN s 46 PAKT II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 'IV ■' 1" 3 '! !i33?a'' ''n'Vfi* i3Dyti p'isa i niNiiD e {D^hi a^i vi»<"^isp-^3 nana •inbs t3^nn I'^ia ? } w^mb liani. on^Va -jij^p t rnn m^i -ip3 \>«si53 npp'iD'ni V"i4*s^ riips lo nn^jia nri3 nin r5''aSri n snniD nsia mtay 12 -isia niK3 ^sy-i'' 13 '.V =" =^-'-- . ;= I — * V ^ ; IT \' t I - -I I : • PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 47 XLIX. God our refuge ; Ps. 46. } lj*53 N2523 n'lnsn mT? t tarsal nVa QTin tsiani i^ai53_ inan;. lan;:. 4 Qiri'Vit""!''? 5n53to^ i^ij^B "in3 5 J -ip3 ni3S^ n^n'^pi* nnty^ nis^aa wa D^i:i lan 7 lynK 5ian iVipa ins ' } in!?& 3p3>'' ''n'Vi* ii3!3' na'^aa ^T : -■-!:• -:c -^ : } V-ii<3 nia?!3 a'TB— iu34« Vnxn nsp-iy nian^a rT^ama 10 n^3n vspi nsB'' nisp \m'2 nnto'' n'iV:i5> r T ' 3 : • »-•• A • v.- -■ • IT • jc -• : - } viuV3 Diix o'liaa ni-i4« ) VlT -r 3 ■•■ • - 1 -r t n!?D ap?'' TiVi* ^la'*? 35\fla 48 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRT. L. God who wields the thunder and lightning ; Ps. 29. J TJ'i 1133 nin^^ inn It J -r T - 3 » ia?D 1133 nin^ii i3n 2 J aj'7>-min3 nin-'!: iinnan n^3>in 1133^-^^ n33 nin'i-^ip 4 IT Tlv -r : *3 ^^y-ias tinipTi 6 n3'i53 ^''n'' nisi'' ^ip s J fflip 13153 nin'' !?''n'' rii^^N ^b'in'' I nin'' Vip 9 tii33iafi«iV3 toni 3^33 ^1353^ niri^^ 10 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OV POETRY. 49 LI. The Lord our Shepherd; Ps. 23. IT ;•.•-■; l-f : \" -:r: -■ : c" 3 ■ 51 6 t^3tin3^ nan !nri3yB!a*i riuaia n-i's 153 inVj) I ''3B^ "nnyn 5 hT : I ■••)•.• I T 2 -..J - T : ' -• r t n^m '^Dis ^is^fi i^uin n3ffli LII. TAe .Kitnig- of glory : Ps. 24. IT ■•; J : "• " }033i3Tliin3-V3?1 Tiv : I : T : -; 1 :'t '3 : • ' -f 3" na!?-- ini D'^bs ''pa 4 3T" -I •-- ly: 7 50 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETBT. It ; • : J-; • r: nin'' n» 3 -IT V -: t;- . t; J-! h- T ; I -1". •■• c I I" }iD^'ip:?ai33 ■'Vsi IT * iT ; ■ • ; PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETEY. 51 DH^Va Van nspni t ana V?i.i«"Q'^ ^'^M'^ •msna «2*"' -inns «*irn e } mj« v^'^b I'la^iS to'^to'' on'isp-V? insifsni ■.•^T —J.; 'r*:(.'T: ^- •IV -)• : - X Ty;IV )x ; J" ay^natoa Q'^iffi'' in'in'' ''lips 9 {ti'^D^y nT^Na rria si'irr' nisa •it " 3- • : T -r )T : 3- ; • } I'nn'' ^pis nfiit nin^-'DSda At Jt • TT •£ • TVjlV- AV T jt;- ' ; :-c r^ t a-i apy niaifla •jini-itt rtNi^tti 13 tan ytBsa 'in''p3'i ,. IT -3v . .1.-: si3bV 13^5 "jii^ini 52 PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. LIV. WIio shall dwell with God ? Ps. 15. 'Avt;it : -"T !• T :c pns Vybi D^aF) TiVin 2 : - - -r I jin'-ip-^y «';B3-iJ IT T •■ ; J V - , V"" - ••■■■■' PART 11. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. 55 I I -:r 3" 'iv 'v - { tDD^i V^ia'' a-i:?^ r-r; }•• • VVT : IT : • 3' : It -: r !nmnysi3Birtt^-^3'i3 9 '^V T- ; V : -> T "Tt T -!• niffl D-'yna ana 1 *i2''ni3tt3-''a'' 10 SDN T"? yii''-''i3 11 » IV T ; V ' : IT : ■ : It : T r : •■': Tia-iy nirr^ nnitti 13 s-^Dn -ipbn isyato 14 i"T t; f::*: )t;~! n3n''35> n'i!a''3 lanaia 15 t rt?-i 131N-1 niba IT T J* T : !ni^3>B iniia:j-^» ns«T' le 56 PAET II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY ^3^^y naa'is !i3^i'' nto^ai nn33is ^s'li^ nto^m LVIII. 2T4e evil of intemperance ; Prov. 23: 29 — 35. I S'lS'lIB ^a^ ''134* "iKl^ ''ift« ^tih 29 D3n D-'j^^s ''52^,^ n'^ib-'a^. J T[Daa -lipn^ Qiiiais uihn"^ ^3 !■'■' N-in-^N 31 i3^y &i33 1Pl^-"'3 { ni-ita''a3 TiVrini' •^TtQi Bn33 in''-inN 32 If,-,- JT-r : . -; -c ♦ aJ-)Si 133>BS31 I- :- y : ■ : DinT iN")^ :^''3''? 33 I ••. : - 3"-: I : ■: Di-3!33 33iri3 n^^m 34 }^3n ffl'iins 35ii33T ^n^^n-^3 ""s^sn 35 ■ : )T -r - . I, -J PART II. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETBY. 57 LIX. Divine admonition in the visions of the night ; Job 4: 12—21. 335'' in'1 'bm 12 jin3ti va^ ''iTN npm n"iy"ii ^24inp ins h 5 nu33 m?'^ naon ''3^:? 133^ n3ian P'^21 »^iV^«a diD^n 17 t -135 nna^ in'tD'ya-DN IT r! It ) -t t t ; - : .. IT •■ ; 1 I":- At : )T-rlV -■ V-I ins'' myb -Ipsa 20 } iiDi*"'' nssb D^fflb ''!?3a na nnn'' yD3-N^n 21 8 58 PART II. SELECT PARABJillS. SELECTION FKOM THE PARABLES OP THE OLD TESTAMENT. LX. Parable addressed by Nathan to David ; 2 Sam. 12: 1—7. {iriK-i nnxi 'T'W 'inix'nnN* "T'PS iVi w^min ^r^ i V3"ri« '^~h'\ !">'52 n^in npni>s*2 n^n -i^a^Vs-a hn;dn ioba^ Vixn ihsa i;in! i^.^'CJ'.! 'i^? rr))h rmih inp^sa^ isi^stj nrip3, ^5iin*i n^a'yri d\s;b ?3P.:?.p_ dwxnn -d^xri hton-j-nx r^f_^^ i^ j«srj -n'^n-nj^. W^y nta.^i. npy n"i_nya-i4< tht\ n'laDsn LXI. Parable of Jotham ; Judg. 9: 6— 20. - ) . . . ..JT . IT ^ ) ^ T I- v: ,-.• •• -: ;- : • : -iai<*T nrVy ns^Va n^-b ina.Nt^i i^ti a-^b? 9 ^135^ ^^""itjj*?. ^3d""^^^. ''^.^.lO-V'- ^"^i*! ^n.^ nsVtt p PART II. SELECT PARABLES. 59 ^-ittN'*i { n^:syri-^y if^:h ^nsbni t^^m^^ n^ri!:N lo Dnb n»i*Tvi. t *)3"^Vy ''Sbti Pi.f."^pV !i3i*.n^_ Q^syn n ''n^inn ib3- onb -laj^'ni {^3^^?? ^si^a nj^-^ib 13 y^:h ^^iVni D''ffi;i«i Q^ri^j< n52";Ban ^ai-i^n-nj« ex — /j*» ^T T IT V c ' •• [T X 3 : I ~ I' •• \T ~ ->V •.';!■.• • • '• It _ V x x |t v -J - , '" "^ i "^ I 3.. . - ... J- . T » IT I • •• "•":•• ' • - • : LXII. Parable of the vineyard ; Is. 6: 1 — ^7. A ; - : f 3- • • • !• T T ■C • T I •.• It I V IV))V ; f • !• :t T VSV P"i";s ins^a'i inVpD'^1 wp^ip^i 8 ia nan ap''-D:»i ininn "^^aa p*i : ~r~ f'-: 3 -:r 9'-:- 5 inns rni iS^B 4«3-1t3£)C3 ai^'4«3 tey*i D^say nVto?.^ Ti^.^p ^Tin 60 PAHT III. SELECT PARABLES. : oanab n-^ni inu v'-iB n^ffii n^aaj n^yi •^TT ^(.-r )tt: ITT (T-r 3- : - \" :■--. •TW^ •.:-.. bH-o^ n^a nisias nin^ sis ^s 7 {HpysriDm npis^ LXIII. Parable of the vine; Ps. 80: 9—20. n^3sV n''3& 10 a^-^? rT'-i^sp nbtsn 12 tn^nip3i'' iri3-^i ■ - ' :iTc M : 'it ■>■:)-• -r T I :■ \ Knp_3 ^i2m} irj'nn iDD^ffin nii^ns Q'^ibJ* n.if^'] ^o LXIV. Parable of the eagle and the cedar ; Ezek. 17: 1 — 18. njai<-nb H^**^ •^**.1'^? ri^a-Vi*. ^jaa y^aai 3 1r^^^''n''^ nap i^nip'^r cjjin nit ;n4:• TFT !t :rT - ' vv - . " '," 5' « 62 PART II. SELECT PARABLES, -jib'i dn'^n ^nas ''S-iD-^s di^'i DDip^ i nns 5 n-'B-i'aa nnij» n^vtsa^ ran tym HVina yintn PART I. NOTES AND EXPLANATIONS. In the Preface to my Hebrew Grammar, I have given gene- ral directions for the study of the same, recommending that the parts included in brackets should be omitted, during the Jirst read- ing. I would now suggest, that when the student has advanced as far as the declension of nouns, he may begin to read and parse in the Chrestomathy. The minute and detailed accounts of the irreg- ular verbs, which were lightly passed over in the J?rs( reading of the Grammar, will now become the subject of special attention. Only a few words should be taken for a lesson ; for a single sentence will involve the necessity of learning a whole paradigm of the verbs; and this the student should by all means do regularly, as he pro- ceeds in the Chrestomathy. I would caution him here, against making the Chrestomathy a principal study at the outset, and the Grammar only a subordinate one ; for the main object of the Chres- tomathy is, to introduce him to a thorough knowledge of the Gram- mar. During this second reading of the Grammar, the student should commit to memory, and recite regularly, the paradigms of verbs and nouns, as they respectively occur. This will greatly facilitate his progress in the Chrestomathy ; while on the other hand, the ex- ercises there will facilitate and render more interesting his exercises in the Grammar. Students are usually very desirous to push on in merely trans- lating Hebrew words, and seem to be satisfied that they are making rapid progress in the language, when they can translate a consider- able portion at a lesson. This is a great mistake ; and often it is one which leads on, in the sequel, so as to defeat the obtaining of any accurate knowledge of the Hebrew. Students will usually go on as they have begun to proceed ; and it is harder to turn about, and break up old habits of loose and inaccurate study, than it is to form a correct habit at the outset. For this reason I have chosen, so far as I am able to do it by means of the notes which follow, to conduct the student in the way of thorough analysis, from the very beginning. I have tried both ways of studying a language, on myself and on my pupils ; and I am most fully persuaded, that it is best for adults to enter radically into analysis at the very outset. It may be different with children ; 64 PART I. DIRECTIONS. but in the business of this Chrestomathy, children are not taken in- to the account. • i. iv I have endeavoured to leave nothing unexplained in the Notes, which the student may know, and ought to know, in the initial part of his study. My readers have before them, in these Notes, what I should give them if I were personally present as their in- structor. By proceeding in this way, they will indeed go slowly, at first, but surely. In a little time the essential principles of the language will begin to appear plain and familiar. Apparent irreg- ularities in the forms of words will diminish apace, by a constant reference to those parts of the Grammar which explain them; and these once mastered, the progress will be much more rapid in He- brew than either in Latin or Greek, for the former language is far more simple than either of the latter. In going the second time over the Grammar, the student will of course proceed on through the Syntax. Let the whole be re- viewed, after this, with even more particularity than before ; and so the Grammar should be gone over, a fourth, a fifth, and a sixth time. A regular recitation, at every Lecture, of some portion of the Gram- mar, should not usually be intermitted during the first six months of study. In regard to the accents, I have introduced but few of them into this first part. I did not wish to embarrass the student with them, at first. I have occasionlly used such, and only such, as serve for the larger pause-accents ; or such as mark a penult tone- syllable. The latter I have employed principally for the sake of di- recting the student where to lay the stress of voice, in reading the Hebrew words. Those which are not marked with any accents, from No. 41 onwards, have the tone on the ultimate syllable, accor- ding to the general rule in § 99 of the Grammar ; a considerable number, also, which are marked with pause-accents, have the tone on the ultimate. Most persons who study the Hebrew, either partially or wholly neglect the accents. They do so, because it seems to require too much time and attention to become well acquainted with them. — But such a knowledge of them as is a requisite for grammatical and exegetical purposes, may be attained with a very moderate share of attention. Let this be obtained gradually, irom the commence- ment of study, and the loss of time occasioned by it will never be felt. The student may rest assured, that he never will regret hav- ing followed this advice. The accents are not, indeed, of any bind- ing authority ; but they are often a grateful exegetical and gram- matical aid. At any rate, no Hebrew student can fail to perceive, that an acquaintance with them is desirable. He need not go into the fictitious schemes and subtilties of a Wasmuth, a Boston, and many others, concerning them ; but their general and usual powers and object he ought to understand. PAHT I. DIRECTONS. NOTES ON NO. I. II. 66 The principal object of the first forty sentences in Part I., is to exercise the learner in the respective paradigms and conjugations of the verbs. He will see that there is a regular succession ; most- ly according to the order in which the verbs appear in the para- digms. For the purpose of fixing Ids attention ■principally upon the forms of the verbs, a considerable number of remarks, which might be made on minute things, are omitted. As this kind of exercise, continued through forty short sentences, will have proceeded far enough to qualify the student for the analysis of more complete sen- tences, I then proceed to a selection of short and easy ones ; it be- ing, so far as it goes, the same which was printed in the first edition of this work. The analysis of these is very full; but I have not deemed it expedient to diminish it in the present edition, except in a few unimportant particulars ; for the mere beginner needs minute direction for a while, and after this he can proceed more indepen- dently. Repetitions of the same references and of the same re- marks are not unfrequently made, in the first part of the following Notes, designedly to aid the learner in impressing various principles upon his memory, which he might be apt to overlook. The reader, therefore, may attribute them to design, and not to oversight. Should the learner feel himself unable to construe any of the select sentences in Nos. 41 — 60, he will find, in the Notes, a refer- ence to the place in the Hebrew Bible from which each sentence is extracted, and he can, if he desires, consult the corresponding En- glish translation. In the book of Psalms, however, the English and the Hebrew verses do not always correspond. The reason is, that in Hebrew the title of a Psalm is sometimes reckoned as its first verse ; but in English, this is never done. Consequently, when the Psalm has a title of any considerable length, the English verses are one behind the Hebrew, and must be looked for accordingly. I. For the declension of 'b'^f^ , see paradigm I. of the reg- ular verb. It should here be translated rules, 503.* d. 2. — !lin% a noun indeclinable, and therefore not ranking under any of the declensions. For the punctuation, etc., see Lex. ; and comp. Biblical Repository, Vol. I. p. 738 seq. II. =)1J3i;Jn, 2 plur. Fut. Kal.-of 'iHia, Par. I.; in conju- gating it, (which means the mentioning of the Zdpers. Praeter in * Note. Throughout, the first reference In common numerals, ia to the Section ($) in the Hebrew Grammar. If there bo a second or third reference connected, they relate to Midivi- sions under tbe first. But when several sections are referred to in succession, the signs JJ stand before them, or the word and or also is inserted between them. 9 C6 NOTES ON NO. II. VII. PART I. each of the usual conjugations, and which the student should never omit to do when parsing a verb), advert to 187. h. 1 ; for Dagh. la- ne in n , see 79. 1. — ''n"'-ia , the noun ni-ia with the suffix ■>- , 336. h, also Par. XXIV. ; it is fem. 319. 6. Note 2, and belongs to Dec. I. (§ 345) because its vowels are immutable. For the omission of Daghesh lene in i , see 80 ; and for the same omission in n , see 80; It is well to remark here, that such fem. nouns as end in the manner of masc. ones, or have vowels like them in all re- spects, are of course declined in the same way. Hence Dec. I. in- cludes such nouns as the above. III. t:j7.a , shd-qet 62. 3 ; Part, of t3j5ia , and stands for Uj;t:; 63; in conjugating, advert to 187. 6. 1. For ■':8|C , see 164. Translate : T am quiet or at peace, 527. a. IV. For Ubtt!-' , Fut. Kal of utiD , see iii in Par. I., al- so 212. 2. — 633 , pronoun DS 336. a, united with the prep. 3 408. For the use of 2 (prep.) between the verb and pronoun that follows, see §§ 506. 507 ; Dagh. lene in it 79. 3, for a Sheva is implied under the preceding U , 53. For 3 without Dagh. lene, 80. Literal translation : He shall rule among you ; in our English idiom, over you. V. t'nr , from b-ia , Par. II. ; Dagh. omitted in a , 80 ; inserted in '7 , 79. 2.— Snir!^ , see No. 1. Translate : Great is Je- hovah, or Jehovah is great, 504. 6. VI. "TlDbp^ , Par. II., like "ir ; Tav with Dagh. lene, 79. 2.— "i;N , No. 3. Translate : 1 am very small, 503. d. 1. VII. rj^S , Imp. Piel. of VibB . Only a few forms of this verb actually occur in Piel and Hiphil ; but the student should write out the 3d pers. sing, in all the different conjugations and tenses, also the Inf., Imp., and Part., and explain the insertion or omission of Dagh. forte or lene in them ; e. g. Kal, Dbs , Fut. 1:^3'; (probably). Imp. C^E ; Niph. D^d: , -cIb- , etc. ; PieluVs? , tJ?.?:", etc. ; Pual tl^S , t3|S^ , etc. ; Hiphil ti^hsri , etc. ; Hoph. U'jsn ," etc. ; Hithp. l^Vsnri , etc. This exercise will be very important to him, in re- spect to his acquiring a familiarity with the use of Daghesh, either forte or lene, if he refers every thing to the principles laid down in §§70— 81.— l.i^::8j, Dec. I. PAKT I. NOTES ON NO. VIII. XVI. 67 VIII. "IDT, Imp. of "15T. Let this verb, whose second radical is an aspirate, be the subject of an exercise like the pre- ceding.— ni-ia , No. 2, also 332 and 431.— al:i:> , Dec. II. b. Lit. Remember the covenant of eternity, i. e. the everlasting covenant. IX. ■'SiN, 164.— I73ta , Part. Piel of ia^ , used as a verb, 527. a. — I35n{« is the particle ns* (from nx) with a suff. pronoun, see HN the sign of the Ace. in 408. We may render: I teach, you, or I will teach you. In laba the final radical is an aspirate, and the student should proceed with it as directed under No. 7. X. "laT , Imp. Piel of 'l!?'^ , with aspirates for the first and second radicals ; in which the student should exercise himself as before. — bN.nto'; , prop. name. XL fill , Dec. I. — "liBNa , pron. TrN with 2 prep. ; for the vowel under Beth, see 152. 6. 1. — nsb: , Niph. — "O^'Nfi has the ar- ticle rt prefixed, 152. a. 2. — ^li'^N , Dec. I., irreg. in the plural. — In 131:3 , the two last radicals are aspirates. XII. I'pDN , 1st. pers. Fut. of Kal, with aspirates for the first and last radical. — riN, 427. Note 1. 6. The Tseri in the ground form (nJjt) is shortened before the Maqqeph which follows the word, 89. — ma , const, form of rr;? , Dec. VI. o. XIII. Snan , 3 pers. Fut. fem. sing, of Niph., from an3 , with all three radicals belonging to the aspirates. — nxi, 167, — "li'^b , b prep. 152. b, 111 Dec. I. — 1 , and, conj. 152. c. 3. Literally : This shall he written for generation and generation, i. e. for ever and ever. XIV. lats , 3d pers. plur. Praet. Kal of STS , like nas in Par. III. ; Methegh after Qamets, 66 under e. g. and 87. c ; Dagh. lene omitted in a , 80.— nnin , const, form of nnin, Dec. X. a ; Dagh. omitted in the first n , 80 ; in the second, 80. XV. ?liriv> F"t- Kal of Pl^n, comp. pih^. in Par. III.— ■lasb , with sufF. pron. ''_ 336. b, from asb Dec. IV. 6 ; for the drop- ping of the Tseri, see 133. a. XVI. ^lah , Par. IV. bnh .— "inN Dec. I.— ^iUnw , 1 with D^h. after it in the Tav, is Vav conversive 208 and 504. h; ?j'ihn is 3d fem. Fut. Kal, because the Nom. y^Nfi is fem. — y-jsri, n article 152. a. 2; V-jN (for -^y^ 130. c) Dec. VI. a. with plur. fem. niiS"jN etc. 68 NOTES ON NO. XVII. XXVII. PART I. XVII. ^':Jhn , tahh-sokh , 2d masc. Fut, Kal, comp. Sati^ Par. IV. ; the iu is read so, 62; Sheva in the final Kaph, 52. 1. — •Tjbip , Dec. I., with sufF. "^ Par. XXIV. Translate : Withhold not thy voice, or thou shalt not withhold thy voice. XVIII. iiRN , 164, comp. 165. e. — "ifiin, 2d pers. masc. Fut. of nha, comp. pst Par. V. — Nbi , compounded of "i 152. c, and Nb. We may translate : Thou shalt or must choose^ and not I, 504. i. XIX. '\'2-\p^, Imper. Piel, comp. rjna Par. V. ; for Methegh, 66. a. in e. g. — tJip'^'Ta plur. of p-^^a , Dec. I. in Voc. case. XX. hSt'; , comp. Par. VI.— irT^ia , i sufT. pronoun 336. b ; ni-i2 , see IVo. 2 ; for Dagh. lene in Beth, see 79. 3 ; for here the disjunctive accent Tiphhha (§ 93 No. 4.) is on the preceding syllable. According to the reading of the Jews, however, who pro- nounce nin^ as though it were written ijTN , ^do-nay, the preced- ing syllable ends in a consonant ; in which case 79. 2. would apply. XXI. I^tn: , Fut. Hiph. of IIN , Par. III. because N is here treated as a guttural. — bip , No. 17 ; b prep. 152. 6. XXII. nSNi , Fut. Kal of laN , Par. VII.— fj'aj'i;! , plur. of sa-j , Dec. IV. ; ?1 152. a. 2; for the Methegh, 66. a in'e. g. XXIII. nn': , 3d sing. Fut. Kal, comp. under a;p; Par. VIII. — niNSB, Dec. IV. g. The noun fiin'; , if in the const, state be- fore niNaa , is not changed because it is indeclinable. Most prob- ably, however, there is an ellipsis here ; the full form being rtirT' niNaSE [■'nbN], Jehovah [God of] hosts. XXIV. ■ •i;^-': , 244. h , Par. VIII. t^ — 'T'Sti , Dec. III. a. — •iS'; the same as '£51^ , 244. 6. Note 1, also 63.— 'lif*^ (also writ- ten 'nN^ 63), Dec. I. XXV. np^'^rr, Hiph. 3 fem. Praet. of p:;, 248 seq. and Par. IX.— tl'^ia sons, irreg. plur. from |a , which plur. is like that of Dec. II. «.— nnto , Sarah, prop. name. Translate : Sarah hath nursed children or sons. XXVI. Irt'sn , Hiph. Praet. of nr, 251 and Par. X.— rrpn:: , Dec. XI. c— f-iNb for ^iNrj'r , 152. a. Note ; for ^nNh see No! 16. Translate : They have cast justice down to the earth. XXVII. Si'.l i Fut. of T13 , Par, XI. bs; , Vav conversive, P-IRT I. NOTES ON NO. XXVIII. XL. 69 see in No. 16.— T^?. (or "Ti:), Dec. VI. e (or d). Render : And he vowed a vow. XXVIII. nbtV, Fut. of hn, Par. XI. -iaj.— Q-^lihsn, plur. of ^h3. Dec. VI. 6, with article 152. a. 1. The brooks will flow. XXIX. Nini , pron. of the 3d pers., with I prefixed, 152. c. ■— bVana, Part. Hiph. of biba , Par. XII.; Fut. ir 261 ; transla- ted as a verb : rolled himself, 187. 3. c. 1, and 527. b. — inns , a prep., i suffix 336. b ; ST Deo. II. Translate : And he rolled him- self in his own blood. XXX. Dh:;! , Vav conversive, No. 16 ; Bh.-; Fut. of t)ah , 264. 3. Fut. Pattdlih, Par. XII. in ^jJ.-; .— ib , 408. Lit. It was warm to him, i. e. he was angry. XXXI. is-' , Fut. Kal of TTS , Par. XII. iS .— 5>\»3-in , see No. 22. Render: The wicked shall not prevail. XXXII. 'nves , Imper. of SVili, Par. XIII., with n^ para- gogio, 207 and 125. b. — bN.-jtol , O Israel! XXXIII. Dih;, Fut. 'kal of DW, Par. XIII., 270. 3.— B"'lr'7 , plur. of b'l , Dec. VIII. 6. He will have compasssion on the oppressed. XXXIV. li-'-} , Imp. Kal of S-i , Par. XIV.— ns'a^i* , Dec. XI. Plead the cause of, or contend for, the widow. XXXV. nV3'.2, Fut. Niphal of Nb3, Par. XV.— Q-ijati , Dec. VI., with the article. XXXVI. n?.i? , Imp. of riDp^ , Par. XVI.— nasn , Dec. X. — ^7313 , Dec. X., Dagh. lene omitted in Beth, 80. XXXVII. ■'n-nS , Praet. Kal. 1st pers. sing., 293.— int? , see riN with, 408 in the Table. Lit. I have cut a covenant with him, i. e. I have established or made a covenant. See the ground of this idiom in the lexicon. XXXVIII. rriiN , 1 pers. sing. Fut. of Hiphil, from fTi;;, Par. XVII. XXXIX. MSn, Praet. Hoph. of rti: , Par. XIX.— D':'iCN , Ephraim. XL. 1X^12 , Hiph. Fut. apoc. of Nia, Par. XX.— t3n« them, see under 408 riN sign of the Accusative. Lit. He will cause them to come (185. 6. 1), i. e. he will bring them, to the land. 70 NOTES ON NO. XLI. XLII. PABT 1. XLI. Ps. 7: 13. tf^riJ^IX,, ground-form sing. nibi| (N'/o-'A), Dec. I., the final He having Mappiq 84, and consequently being moveable. The vowel under the He is Patt'ahh furtive 69, which, not being a proper vowel, falls away when the word is changed by receiving the accession D""-. , which forms the plural, 325. The 1 in the sing, is omitted in the plural, because the syllable joined on to make the plural has a Quiescent in it, 65. tJ'^nbN agrees with BSViJ , a Part, in the singular, 437. 2. asiuj , act. Part., root UB'iJ, 202. It is here employed as a verb in the present tense, announcing a general proposition. Syntax 527. a. Meaning : ' God vindicates, decides in favour of, the righteous.' p'^ija , adj. used as a noun, and employed here in a generic sense, i. e. as a noun of multitude ; with vowels immutable, and therefore like Dec. 1. of nouns; Ace. after UBiia , Synt.531. The accent under the word p"''7a , although of the same form as the Methegh, is not one here, and never is one at the end of a verse, but is a Silluq, 85 Note, also 93. No. 1, The two large square points after p'l^S, are the Hebrew period called piDS fjiD , i. e. end of a verse. With these Silluq invariably stands connected, be- ing either on the ultimate or penult syllable of the final word. This explanation will serve for all future cases of the same nature. XLII. Ecc. 3: 17. nij sign of the Ace, 408. 4. and 427. The ground-form ni* shortens its vowel here because of Maqqeph, 89. SiU-irt , see No. 22. As the Daghesh of the article cannot be admitted into the 1 111, the vowel Pattahh belonging to the article is prolonged instead thereof 112 ; S'^n is an adj. employed here as a. generic noun, like p'^'ra in No 1, and is in the Ace. governed by tis'IJ'^ . It is proper to note, that the position of the Ace. (as here) before the verb or Part, which governs it, seldom occurs in Hebrew, except among the inversions which poetry occasions. tfsip: , Fut. of a^t , §§ 197. 198. Meaning : ' God will condemn, pronounce sentence against, the wicked." tisilJ'; may also be ren- dered in the present tense, ' condemns," as in universal propositions, Synt. 504. 6. ■^^^'-^.T , ^i Art. 162 seq. and 152. a. 2. The use of the ar- PART I. NOTES ON NO. XLIII. XLV. 71 tide before tj'TibN (a kind of proper name) is not common, 413. For DTi'irN , see under No. 41. XLIli. Prov. 30; 5. b3 (kol), Kaph with Dagh. lene, 79. 1 ; ground-form b3 (kol) with long O pure, which is shortened before a Maqqeph, 89. In Hebrew Vs (all) is a noun ; and i 3 is in regi- men here with n"i?2N , 332. nnBN"'b3, lit. universifas verhi. rr^MN, Dec. XII. h. 387 — 389; the ground-form rrias be- ing derived from the masc. form 'nas* , and having only the final vowel mutable in the singular, agreeably to the laws in 381 ; in the Gen. as it regards iS ; but in regimen or the construct state in re- spect to hibN , 434. h. — rtii-N is in the Gen. after n"ia6« ; see No. 41. We may translate the three words PinbN nTai«-b3 , in Lat- in, by universitas verbi Dei. ^iQlia , fem. Part. pass, from the root fl'i^; Part. masc. is p)1-ia , Dec. III. 202. Par. XXI. ; hence fem. ns=na , see 323 xm- der Dec. III. iDi::^ with its feminine. XLIV. Is. 40: 8. ^12.^ , const, of la'^ , Dec. IV., see 354 and paradigm. — 12^^1;N , plural of nibN (see No. 41), in the suff. state, see Par. in 336 ; the plur. ending TTL. is dropped in order to receive the suffix, 339 ; the accent (_ i. e. Tiphhha) under the n , is a disjunctive 93. No. 4, which is used here in order to mark the tone on the penult syllable, 100. j. nnp:;,Fut.ofDiip, 268. 5.Par. XIII. Meaning: ' Shall endure, continue.' — sbisb , b prep. 152. 6, governing the Ace. here. — fibiy , Dec. II. 347. ' ' ' XLV. Ps. 119: 1 1. -^aba , 3 prep. 152. b, with Dagh. lene 79. 1.— •^ab; , noun from 3b;, Dec. VIII, 374 and 375. h. For the shortening of the Tseri in al:. , when it receives the accession "'_ (suff. pronoun), see 129. c. a; comp. under 128. 6. — For the suff. pronoun ''-. , see 336. TijSiZ , 1st pers. Praet. Kal of ]D^ . The conjunctive accent Munahh (_ 93. No. 21), marks the penult tone-syllable, 100. d. Meaning : ' Treasured up, laid up.' ■^niaN , from rfrqit , see under No. 43 above, "l- is a suffix- pronoun, 336. The accent after the penult vowel is Silluq, 93. No. 1. The form of the word with the accent on the ultimate, wotild 72 NOTKS ON NO. XLVI. XLVII. I'ART I. be, ^n'^a^^ ; in which case, the first accent under the Resh is a Methegh, see in 66 under e. g. But in consequence of the tone be- ing thrown back 100. I, the Silluq falls on the Sheva under n and converts it into Seghol, 148. a. The form nnaN (in No. 43. above) becomes mBN here, because the n is thrown into another syllable, and the Resh and its vowel make a simple syllable, which causes the vowel to become long, 130. a. XLVI. Ps. 119: 161. "^il^'M , 12 a prefix preposition, in its original form '\n, but here (as usual) the 1 assimilates with the fol- lowing 1, and is written in it by a Daghesh forte 74, comp. 406 ; so that 'q;-)a'ir!='ri"ia- la. — "i^t , from IS'i Dec. IV. in the suffix State, 336. For the difference between the const, form (iS't) and the suffix-form, see Par. of Dec. IV. The reason of Qamets un- der the second radical (i), in such forms as Ti5'7, T^^*? , etc., lies in the mode of syllabication. In the cases just named, the Resh is thrown into the last syllable ; which leaves the syllable simple in which a stands, and of course prolongs the vowel, 130. a. — In re- gard to the accent over the ^ , i. e. a dot over it like a Hholem, it is a distinctive accent named Rebhi'^, 93. No. 10. It is added here, because it has influence on the Pe at the beginning of the word which follows, causing Dagh. lene to be inserted although Pe is preceded by a vowel, 79 3. Were it not for such an accent, the Pe would of course omit Dagh. lene, 80. 'ihB, Kal. Praeter, with Fut. A. 212. 2. The student should here search the lexicon for the conjugations of this verb which are actually employed, and make out a synopsis of them. — For "'ab, see No. 45. It is the Nom. to "ihB here ; and in Hebrew, the Nom. is more usually put next after the verb. XLVII. Ps. 119: 158. fToaipnN , root t:>ip, conj. Hithpolel 175. h. The n_ at the end is paragogic 2-55, also 125. h. In re- gard to the penult syllable U , it is originally Pattahh 270./, which is here prolonged by the pause-accent (Athnahh 93. No. 2), and becomes Qamets, 144. 1. The form of the word, without M_ para- gogic, and without a pause-accent prolonging its vowel, would be UU'pns*; the more usual form of words in this conj. would be as '^'3'^ PI'S > I'^'S' b- Meaning : ' I was struck with horror,' or ' I was filled with loathing.' PART I. NOTES ON NO. XLVIII. L. 73 "IH?^: > commonly a pronoun 168, but here a conjunction, 409. a. — "^n-jiaN , see in No. 45, where the pause-accent makes a differ- ence in the penult syllable. — TiKO , root IB-JJ . The form, without the accent Silluq, would be -T^B^ ; see Par. I. of reg. verbs, Kal Praet. 3 pers. plural. But the accent restores the original Pattahh under the Mem, and lengthens it 146. XLVIII. Deut. 4: 2. =iSDin, root FID'; , verb ■'D first class, see Par. VIII. Hiph. Fut. 2 pers. plural masc. The Yodh between the two last radicals and characteristic of Hiphil, is here omitted, it being quiescent in the preceding vowel Hhireq 63. The full form would be IBiqin. The Dagh. lene is not inserted in the n which begins the word, because the preceding word ends in a vowel-sound and has no pause-accent upon it 80. "l^'in, M followed by Dagh. forte is the article, 163. — T^JN is a proper relative pronoun here, 168. — "''Ditx , 164. Innit?^ , from TiVl , Part, in Piel ; the "1 is moveable here, 268. a. Note, comp. 271. 6; see Par. XVI. Piel. The Part. m.:£a , preceded by the pronoun ''3:iJ , is used in the room of a verb of the present tense, Synt. 527. a. — t33nN j governed by the Part.; see No. 9, and Synt. 531. XLIX. Prov. 17: 27. ?jil!ih. Part. act. Kal 202, from ^irirj, Fut. Pattahh with rough enunciation, ^iSh^, 225. Par. IV. — r-iBN, ground-form 'i?:N, Dec. VI. E class, 364; in the plural with the suff. V- attached, 336. c. In order to receive this suifix, the appropriate ending of the plural (n''— ) is dropped, 339; see Par. XXIV. in.i'i , root 5>T of ■''s first class. Part. act. Kal 202; for Pat- tahh furtive under Ayin, see 69. For peculiarities in Hith., see Lex. — ns^, with Silluq (93. No. 1) which prolongs the Pattahh under the Daleth, 144. ns^ (the orig. form) is properly a fem. Inf. form, Dec. XIII. 390 ; comp. 195. Note. The masc. form of the Inf. is J'T {de'^s) with Pattahh furtive, 69 ; the fem. Segholate form, therefore, is T\'$1 , 141. It is used here as a mere noun. Meaning : ' Knowledge, knowing.' Governed by 57.''"' i Synt. 531. L. Obad. verse 21. nn'i'n'i , vilior yttha^ and [the kingdom] shall he, Praet. with T used for the Future, Synt. 503. e, root T^yi 10 74 NOTES ON NO. L. LV. PART. I. verb n>, 280 Par. XVL For Methegh under the first He, see 66. e. g. and 87. c. iiirT'b , an anomalous form. The true original points of the word tlih^ are unknown ; see the references under No. 1. Ac- cordingly ■^an^b (an abridged form of ''jnNb 119. c. 1) has its points transferred to ln3n"'b , which is the Dat. of possession after nn'^M'i , hke the Latin est mihi, est tibi, etc. Mn=ib73M, n art. 163.— nsnba, Dec. X. 380, Nom. to iin^rt. The Dat. of possession more commonly follows (as here) immediately after the verb of existence;, and the Nom. of the verb then succeeds. LI. Prov. 1: 7. riN~]'i. , Dec. X. const, state, from fiN"i^ — rT'ipNT , Dec. I. because all the vowels are immutable, fem. end- ing n"'- 319. b. Note 2, in const, state with nyT ; see on rri-ia under No. 2, respecting nouns of this sort. LII. Prov. 1: 22. ti^^''D3 , Dec. L plur.— ^NriD'; , from N:i3, Par. XV. Fut. 3d pers. plur.— nsT , see in No. 49; Dagh. lene omitted in Daleth, 80. LIII. Prov. 18: 15. 2b. , see under No. 45.— 'jia: , Part. Niph. from 'j'^s , 273 and comp. 268. b, Dec. III. see Paj. XXI. tiip5 .— n?.!^'] , Fut. Kal of n:,-5 282. 6.— ns^, see in No. 49 ; but the Daghesh is here euphonic (not lene) 75. a, and is called Dagh. conjunctive ; and that Dagh. must be here considered in this light, is plain from § 80, which shews that a Dagh. lene could not be in- serted here. The two words n? -J-r;;;?^ , are read yiq-ned-dd-atTi,. The Maqqeph between them takes away the accent from the first word, 89. LIV. Ps. 94: 11. ?•!>, No. 49.— nia-iiha , Dec. XL or XIII. const, plur.— ti-jjj , Dec. IV. but it has'no const, or plur. state.— njsn, they, i. e. they are, Synt. 469. In ^735, the rt_ is paragogic, as the penult accent which is under the first syllable,'de- notes; see 165. d, and 125. b. The accent here employed is a conjunctive, viz. Merka, 93. No. 23. In regard to t\i& penult tone, see 100. i. '^\l ' orig. form ban^ which has its first vowel changed by a pause-accent 144, Dec. VI. of both A krA E form. ^^^^ '• NOTES ON NO. LV. LIX. 75 LV. Prov. 9: 10. nVhn, Dec. X. const.— n»3h (h/iokh- md) Dec. X., Gen. after n^hn, 332.— nN^i^ No.Vl' Before this word the verb of existence (niTi) is understood, 554. In such propositions it is very rarely expressed. nj"31 , see in No. 49, where the larger pause-accent prolongs the first vowel. Here, the accent (which marks the penult tone 100. a) being only of the second class of disjunctives 93. No. 5, It produces no effect on the vowel ; as is often the case.— fiiuiip , ht. of the holy ones, i. e. of God, the plural being used as plur. excellentiae, 437. 2. d. The sing, is ailj? , Dec. III. For the omission of the Vav in the plural, see on tiTi'bit under No. 41.— rtj^a, Dec. X., the verb of existence being understood before it, 554. LVI. Ecc. 1: 18. iia, a a preposition, Dagh. lene 79. 1 ; 3"!, Dec. VIII. e, no plural; with Maqqeph -3'^ {rohh) short O, 89.— 053 , from C?3 , with pause-accent 93. No. 2 and 144.— ^•'Z>^■^^, I conj. ; fiiC3i\ Fut. Hiph. of Sjo;, 243. 6.— iiw?:, Dec. I. the vowels being immutable. LVII. Prov. 12: 1. ar.N for 3hii« 63, also 202 and Synt. 527. a. — -lOTO, Dec. II.— NDitoi , ■) conj., N3it5 202.— nhsin, Dec. XII., n at the beginning Raphe (83), i. e. without Dagh. lene 80, because of the preceding vowel ; with conjunctive accent on the penult tone, 100. a. LVIII. Ps. 22: 29. rti^i^ , No. 50.— M^jba^! , ibid.— bavji 202 and 527. a.— d';iii3, plur. of ■'=ia Dec. I., a with Dagh. lene 79. 2. The full form would be fi^iana, but the article n suffers syncope in such cases, 152. a. Note. LIX. Ps. 145: 13. ^n>ia^a, nia'ra noun. fem. Dec. I. in the sing., see remarks on rT^na under No. 2 ; a Heteroclite in the plural, i. e. not ranking under any of the declensions, with vowels immutable, e. g. plur. ni'Sba , 326. c. For the omission of Dagh. lene in the a, see 82. h. — Sj suff. pron. 336. niaba, const, state, the verb of existence being understood before it, 554.- ba {Ml) fi-om fa .— B^abJ , from hVtS , Dec. II. For the omission of the "I in the plural, see 63. Lit. thy kingdom [is] a kingdom of all ages, regnum universitatis seculorum, i. e. eternal. — ^'nbiaaai , 1 instead of i , 152, c. 4 ; Dec. XII., i^ suff., 76 NOTES ON NO. LX. PART I. point over it is the accent Rebhia 93. No. 10. — b^3 (btkhol), 89. Beth with Dagh. lene, because a pause-accent precedes, 79. 3. — -Til, Dec. I.— -iSl, l instead of] , 153 c. 3. LX. Ps. 103:19. Q^H'^is , for n^niarna , 152. a. Note ; d'^a-^ , dual form, but used as plural 329. Note 2. For the accent at the be- ginning of the word, see 93. No. 5, and 95. a; the real tone-sylr lahle isthejjenM?^ here, 100 h. — pan, Hiph. of 'jli, see in 268. h, an account of the form. iNDS, root NB3=ND-13, the '-\ being assimilated, 107. 1. c. In all the sufT. and plur. forms, the Dagh. forte is dropped ; e.g. ■'NOS, niNpa, etc., and so in TlSp3, 73. Note 3. This practice is so uniform, as to point to the necessity of supposing another root, viz. iSD3 Dec. VI. e, where all the forms may be made ; especially if we consider all the instances of the plur. to be in reg., or in the sum state, as they may be considered. But if these forms may be all regarded as coming from Nps , they belong to Dec. VII. 371. — i sufT, pronoun 336. ini3l:ai,T (fori) 152. c. 4— nisba, see No. 59.— i as above. — b'sa (instead of b'3lns), 152. a Note. M^^iiJM , with Sil- luq (93. No. 1) on the penult, which restores the original vowel (Pattahh) under the tj (for the original ground form is bjpa), and prolongs such restored vowel 146 ; verb Praet. 3d pers. fern. of iizja . PART II. NOTES AND EXPLANATIONS. W^HEN the student shall have completed the study of Part I., agreeably to the dh'ectioiis given in the introduction to the Notes on the same ; and shall also have reviewed the same in a proper man- ner ; he may be supposed to have acquired such a knowledge of the forms of Hebrew words, of the method of grammatically analyzing them which ought to be practised, of the manner of employing the grammai- for this purpose, and of finding in it what he needs m order to obtain a complete view of the principles of any analysis, that the Notes may, in future, be less copious and particular than they have hitherto been. All this, I repeat it, may be now taken for granted, provided the student has reviewed Part I. in a proper manner. By this I do not mean the going through with one solitary review, and this a hasty one (as is too commonly the case) ; but I refer to a review conducted on the principles which Jahn has laid down, in his Disser- tation on the Study of the Oriental languages ; a brief but very valu- able work, which, I would hope, will be attentively read by every one in our countiy, who intends making a serious effort to acquire a knowledge of the Hebrew tongue. Such a review requu-es the la- bour of being repeated continually along the way, as the student goes over with Part I. ; and then to be agam repeated in respect to the whole, after the first reading is completed. With the knowledge thus acquired, the student will come to the study of Part II. in some good measm-e duly prepared. Let him not think the time and pains spent on Part I., to be in any degree lost or expended in vain. Although he may seem to go slowly, yet he is, by such a method of sudy, laying the foundation for rapid progress at some fliture period of his efforts. Grammatical forms and analysis being once well mastered, the progress in the Hebrew language will probably be such as to exceed the sanguine expectations of most stu- dents. But unless they are mastered at the outset, there is great probability that they never will be at any future period. In most cas- es, such is undoubtedly the fact. And if the student, in his subsequent exegetical study of the Old Testament, finds himself, at evei-y turn, in a state of doubt or uncertainty as to the real grammatical construction and arrangement of any passage ; how is it possible, that he should ev- er be able to acquire a comfortable degree of assurance, that he is right in his conclusions with regard to the meaning of any difficult 78 METHOD OF STITDY. PABT II. passage ? Suppose he resolves to consult commentators, who have a more profound knowledge of grammatical and lexicographal matters than himself; often such commentators disagree ; and then where shall he resort for satisfaction ? Or if they agree, they assign reasons for their opinion, of which his acquisitions do not enable him to judge ; then how is he to obtain satisfaction ? All this shows the importance of laying well the foundation of Hebrew study, and in such a way, that any superstructure can be built upon it which the future may re- quire. Indeed, if there be any object in expending time and money and labour upon the study of Hebrew, that object must be, or ought to be, a truly valuable one. But of what value is a superficial knowledge of the language in question, which neither enables one to interpret skilfully himself, nor duly to appreciate the labours of others who have performed such an office ? I would hope that these brief remarks on this important subject, are not out of place, at a time when the student is shaping his com-se for all his future life, in respect to the study of the Jewish Scrip- tures. " Drink deep, or taste not," is ad\'ice which may be urged as properly on the young philologist, as on the poet. Indeed, if there be any who have no taste for such studies, and no proper sense of the value of them, and who want nothing more than the name of having studied Hebrew, while they are too indolent or too in-esolute to make the acquisitions necessary to understand this language well, then let them keep away from our public Seminaries, where such study is re- quned, and prepare in another way for the ministry, where their sloth and in-esolution can be more creditably indulged. There can be but one persuasion in regard to this whole matter, among all men of sense. Either the acquisition of the Hebrew language is valuable, or it is not : if it is not, then choose a course of study which supersedes it ; if it is, then study it so as to get something valuable from it, something more than the name of being a Hebrew scholar — a name which is not unfrequently bestowed on some, who would find it, in most cases, beyond their power to distinguish a Qsimets Hhateph from a Qa- mets. Let not the student, then, who is in earnest, deem one hour mis- spent, which is spent in giving him elementary knowledge that will make him radically acquainted with the nature of the language which he is studying. Let him patiently pm-sue the method of thorough anal- ysis, to which I have attempted to introduce hun in the preceding pag- es ; and then I can promise him a rich harvest in due time, for all his toil in thus sowing the seed. Those who will not cultivate the soil, nor duly sow the seed, must expect a harvest that will be hght ; or at best, a crop the kernel of which will be either shrivelled or blasted. The Notes, although in future more sparse than heretofore, ai-e still intended to leave nothing of an analytical nature unexplained, which one may not now well suppose the student able to find out by his own efforts. The biblical acceiltuation, for a few of the first sections, is but PART II. NOTES ON NO I. 79 partially inserted. It is intended to be employed only in case the larg- er pause-accents occur, or a word has the tone on the penvM, or there is some special reason (which will be the subject of notice) for insert- ing it. After these sections, which reach as far as the end of Gen. ii., the whole train of accents is introduced. The reasons for this will be stated, in the Notes which commence with Gen. iii. I would fain hope, that the instructer and student will persevere in the same particularity of analysis, which the Notes above have ex- hibited. In this way, a multitucle of difficulties will be removed in limine and gradually, and so that the student will never be sensible of any loss of time occasioned by efforts to overcome them. The knowl- edge necessary to remove them, will thus incorporate itself with all his linguistic acquisitions of the Hebrew, and become a component and necessary part of it. I ask the Mberty to repeat it, and I desire it to be distinctly remembered by every student of Hebrew who uses this book, that it is much better to master all the difficulties at an early period, (and a great saving of time also if the whole course of study be taken into view), than it is to pass them over and defer them to a future opportunity, which it is expected will he more convenient. Procrastina- tion will, in all probability, entirely defeat the object in view. No. I. Gen. 1: 1—2. (1)* iT'aJN'na , 3 a prep. ; for niaJNn , see Part I. No. 51. — N^a, Par. XV.— B''Hbt< , see Part I. No. 41— Cl':»'>sn , n article 152' a. 1 ; n';aa' , 329. Note 2, comp. 328 and 325. (2) Mn-in 1 3 fem. Praet. from InTi , Methegh 66 in e. g.— win , tone on the penult, the first accent marking it 95. 6 ; a Se- gholate 100. a ; employed instead of linii , 120. b ; Tav Raphe, 80. — iris , the same throughout, the kind of accent only excepted. —'^tV\, hhd-shekh,'62. 2; Dec. VI.— ''iS, from Ci^B Dec. II., having no singular. — rBh"ja , Piel Part, fem., of the Segholate form, Par. XXI. under Piel.— tJ^.B^l , 152. a. 1 ; Q^a , 144. 1 as it re- spects the influence of the accent ; for the form of the word B^a , see 329. Note 2. Some have supposed that Nna in v. 1, means only to dispose of, to arrange, to form, viz. out of materials already existing, to re- » The Nob. in parDnthoses denote the verses in the Hebrew text. 80 NOTES ON NO. I. PABT 11. duce to order. But v. 2 shews that no mere arrangement or dispo- sition of matter can be intended by J<"i2; for after the action im- plied by N-ia had been performed, the earth still remained in a chaotic state. That the original matter of the heavens was in a similar condition, is evident from vs. 6 — 8, and 14 — 19. All or- der and arrangement plainly seem to be considered, by the wri- ter of Gen. I., as having been effected after the original act of creation. With the apostle, therefore, we may safely believe, that " the worlds were formed by God, so that the things which are seen, were not made from those which do appear," Heb. 11: 3, i. e. they were not originally made out of matter already existing. The original act of creation, as understood by the sacred viTiters, appears plainly to have been, the calling of matter into being, the causing of it to exist; and out of this, the heavens and the earth were afterwards formed, i. e. reduced to their present order and arrangement. Philosophy may speculate on this, and maintain (with Aristotle) the eternity of matter ; but philosophy can prove nothing on this subject, nor even render such speculations proba- ble, if revelation were out of the question. =1 libl ^irfn , lit. emptiness and desolation, or empty and void, two synonymous words of nearly the same import, and designed there- fore to express intensity, 438. d. and Note ; so that the meaning here seems to be : ' The earth, in its original state, was altogether empty or void,' viz. devoid of the various productions which it af- terwards was caused to exhibit. *]a)lni etc., i. e. no light yet existed, to shine on this empty, desolate fiinPi. This last word seems to denote the abyss of cha-. otic elements, out of which the world was formed ; probable root, filfl to be confused, bewildered. — D'^H^N 'fVi^ , divine energy or ef ficacy ; comp. nvev^a in Wahl's Lex. no. 6. b. a. etc. — rehnn , hovered over, brooded over ; lit. applied to fowls hovering over their young. It seems here to designate the power or energy of the Creator, which (as it were) brooding over the newly created world, imparted to its elements the power of communicating life and energy to plants, animals, etc. ; comp. Gen. 1:11, N-ij^B VJ^ST j kt the earth cause to spring forth, and v. 12, Vl^rj NSlnl , ART II. NOTES ON NO. I. II. Gen. 1:2 — 5. 81 and the earth did bring forth, viz. plants, trees, etc. Comp. also Gen. 1: 24, seq., where it is stated, that the earth produced animals of various kinds. To this vivifying influence, the nshna of our text seems plainly to refer. D';an indicates the same thing here as Cl'tlFi ; and so, on the other hand, Binn is frequently used for ff^n , see Lex. That the original chaotic mass, from which the earth in its present form was made, exhibited n';a (water) as the predominant element, ap- pears from Gen. 1: 9. The assertion, that the Spirit of God brooded over or ontheface of (''?.S~bs) this element, borrows its cos- tume from the action literally indicated by nsh'^a . Meaning : * Divine influence communicated a productive, vivifying power, to the original elements of the earth.' No. II. Gen. 1: 3—5. (3) ■'h^ , a Segholate apoc. Fut. of n^n , 283. y. k, instead of ^n^ , 120. 6 ; or instead of the nude apoc. form Ti'^ ; comp. the Se- gholate forms of nouns, in 367 and Par. of Dec. VI. s — w. This apoc. Fut. 3 pers. is used instead of the Imp., 201. Note, — Im'JI , with Vav conversive, but Dagh. omitted in the Yodh, 73. Note 3 and comp. 208 in e. g. ; as to Methegh here, see 87. g. This sentence presents one of the highest instances of moral sublimity, which can be any where found. Longinus has cited it as such in his work Ilegl " Tipovg. (4) N"i;i , apoc. Fut. with Vav. conv., from nijn , 283. y. n. The form is what is called nude, i. e. apocopated without the ad- dition of any furtive vowel to make out a Segholate form ; like PlS'l , T'n'l , aiZJ"! , in the Par. under 283. y, viz. under m. o.p. The full form would be rtJ<")'.i , apoc. 4«'^•^^ (N in otio, 57. a), so written instead of i«"i^1 , the reason of which may be seen in 57. a. and 119. 6. The analogical form (lay.}) is changed to Kl.^l , be- cause of the nin the final syllable, 113; the meaning is the same as the Praeter tense, 208 and 504. d. b'ja'"]; , 216. 4. — ^i^hii, M with Pattahh, 152. o. 3; ti with- out Methegh, comp. 87. g. (5) IINb for m"»n!5, 152. a. Note.— fii"" "liN^, lit. to the " 11 82 NOTES ON NO. II. III. Gen. 1: 5, 6. part ii. light day. After a verb of naming (N^jj), the Hebrews put the object addressed in the Dat. with b , and the name given in the Accusative.— rjfh^ for ?7f Urnb , 152. a. Note. — Hbj'h , Idy-ld in pause, nb^b out of pause ; n is metely paragogic, and the original ground form is b^b , Dec. VI.— ''ri';i , see in v. 3. — Ihi* , for HhN (the, const, is inN), N. instead of N , see 142. a; for the use of IhN as an ordinal, see 396. ' But could there be day and night at this period, when no sun was created ? The heavenly luminaries were not formed until the fourth day ; see vs. 14 — 18.' The seeming difficulties involved in this, have led many recent critics to deny that the account of the creation in Gen. ii., is any thing more than a kind of philosophical speculation, adorned with a species of poetic costume. ' And here, i. e. in v. 5,' say they, ' the wri- ter has forgotten himself ; for he has represented the tirst, second, and third days as having had a regular existence, before the heavenly lu- minaries were formed.' That the representation itself of the writer, is such as they assert it to be, need not be denied. But that ' the wri- ter /org-of himsdf^ is not equally certain. In Gen. 1: 3, 4, Ught and dai'kness are distinctly related to have had an existence, hefore the sun, moon, and stars were created. All that remains, then, to render the fact probable that day and night existed at the aame period, is, to suppose that the same almighty Creatoi-, who formed the light and the dai'kness, did cause successive alternations of these, so as to make day and night before the heavenly luminaries were called into being. Was not the same omnipotence which created the light, competent to effect such an alternation of it ? That this omnipotence did not effect it, who is able to prove ? And until it is proved, we may acquiesce in the views of the sacred historian. No. III. Gen. I. 6—8. (6) ^ina , ground-form tjjn , Dec. VI. n. — "'n'^"! , consists of the Put. Ti'; (as in v. 3) joined with 1 conjunction, (not 1 conver- sive, which takes the vowel Pattahh 208). The original points would be thus, Ti^'i , which is an impossible syllable 42, comp. 137 and 152. c. 5. The reason why ^'Tp^ with 1 conjunction (not ''rpi) is here used, is merely to connect this word with "'111 in the preceding clause, and to shew that both stand in the same pre- dicament as to meaning. If Ti^i should be put here, it would give the meaning, and it was ; which the writer does not intend to say. D';»b &•;» ■j'^a, of the same meaning, as Ci';a 1"'51 D';a 'j'^S; see PART 11. NOTES ON NO III. IV, Gen. 7—12. 83 in V. 4, ?j,?jhn T-ai] -nxrt -jia . go in Deut. 17: 8 ; comp. also in Gen. 1: 7. This use of b after T'3 is peculiar, and not explained sufficiently by the lexicons. Literally translated : By a separating (r?) of the waters, in respect to (b) the waters; i. e. of the waters above the visible expanse of the heaven (?''i?'i), from those on or in the earth beneath ; comp. v. 7. (7) ius;! , 283. y.— b^3;i , see on v. 4.— b?M , compound of yn and by , 407./. — ?"'p.-)b bsa , lit. from the above [the upper part] o/f/je expanse, or from, the above in respect to the expanse. (8) d'ja'i) ^''p'jb , the usual construction after a verb of call- ing or naming; see on v. 5, under di'' "iiNb . No. IV. Gen. 1: 9—12. (9) !|'lj^'] , yiq-qd-vu, with the first 1 moveable 56. 1, Fut. Niph. of fi3|3. — MN"inl , 1 simply a conjunction here (see on v. 6) ; rt>{-in, Fut. Niph. 3 fem. sing., from Mijn ; for Tseri in n, comp. §§. 111. 112. — rfia^n , hay-yab-ba-shd, Dec. XI. fem., like the Greek rj h]Qa in signification. Meaning : ' Let the waters which cover the whole earth [making it a. dinn], be collected into an ocean or oceans, so that the solid earth may appear.' (10) iiipiab^ , u-kmiq-ve, from ni.pH Dec. IX., in const, state. — N'lill ) s^e on V. 4. (11) NiT'in , Fut. apoc. Hiphil ; for Methegh, see 87. A ; comp. v. 2 with this as to sentiment. — iipS, in apposition with N'i'?. . — S^'w'q , Part. Hiphil from SnT . — "'ns y^, the tree of fruit, i. e. the fruit-tree. — "'"13 JlipV , So-sep-peri, 75. a. The accent is here on the first syllable in flto'^ , because the word is immediately follow- ed by a tone-syllable, "'■13 being a monosyllable, 100. d. — i2''^b^ from T^B , Dec. I. — isi.T niZJN whose seed, 478. — ii , [is] in it, 554. (12) NaiW , with Vav conversive, apoc. Fut. Hiph. from NltV nnpjsb , in- suff". pronoun, see in Par. under 336. — I'lS-iiiaS , So-sep-piri, 75. a. But here the accent is removed by the Maq- qeph which follows, see 89, making a difference between this and the instance in v. 11. 84 NOTES ON NO. V. Gen. 1: 14 — 19. part ii. No. V. Gen. 1. 14^19. (14) Ti-; sing. apoc. Fut. (see on v. 3 above), while nhi*^ is plural;' see Synt. 489 and Note.— nSJ»a , from ITNa Dec. III. ; for the omission of Vav in both the final syllables, see 63 and 65. — S"|f5-13 , 3 137 ; Sij?-i const, of Dec. III.— r-^iartb , Inf. Hiph., for the form see 216. 3, and comp. 153. a. Note.— I''n1 , i conj. giving the Praet form a Fut. sense, 209.— nh^b , from niN, and for ninij* , 63 and 65.^n'>i5iSi,from *B>iH Dec. II., the accent Munahh on the Mem instead of a Methegh, 87. Note 3, comp. 87. a. — D':ia, Dec. XI. Meaning : ' Let them be for signs, which shall distinguish sea- sons, days, and years ;' lit. let them be for signs, even for stated sea- sons, and for days, and years. (15) I'^n';, see on v. 14. — nhiNSb, ibid. The student will observe the diversity of orthography, in regard to the insertion or omission of the Quiescents; see §§ 63. 65. — D'^b'iSn , with a pause-accent of the second class, but Pattahh not prolonged, 149. — liNnb , Inf. Hiph. of 'lis, for the the b see 521. c ; lit. /or tJie causing of light. (16) iari, supra v. 7. — "'J.'a , dual const, of B'.^iB, in const. state with nnNjari , 4.57. a. — b""!;!-]!!, with the article 414, 1. — 'niNan-nS* , Ace. after ia»j;i implied, and mentally brought for- ward from the preceding clause ; for -DN see 427. — nb.fflnab , Dec. XIII. For the rule of the day is a figurative expression, de- noting the powerful or predominating influence of the sun by day. So Pliny calls the sun, coeli rector ; and Cicero, omnium moderator ac dux. — -liNHij-niti , as above. — "iitsjjii , the small, i. e. the small- est, or the smaller, 445. a. — nb^bn , with parag. ii— and tone on the penult, 100. i, see also 149. a. — ta'^asian , Methegh 87. e. ( 17) 'jn'T , Fut. with 1 conversive, from 'jnj , for the final Tseri see 254. 2 ; lit, set or put. — Sni* , ntft sign of Ace. combin- ed with suff. pronoun D_ ; see under 408, in the paradigm. (18-19) biliabi, •} conj.; b prep.; and b^ZJa Inf construct. Before it, DnN ■jri'^T is implied ; lit. [and he set them]/or ruling. — ni'a for n'Tna , 152. a. Note ; lit. by day.— nb:ba , for ^!b^br^n , ib. also 149. a. — b'^'TSriir , Inf Hiph., where the n is retained 216. — *l\unr: , 3. n article, 152. a. 3. (19) N-i^i , v. 4 above. PART II. NOTKs ON NO. VI. Gen. 1:20 — 11. 85 No. VI. Gen. 1. 20—22. (20) laniU':, 201. Note.— yn\J} IS-itti-;, a mode of con- struction exceedingly common in Hebrew, viz. that of joining a verb with its correlate noun, in order to designate intensity, cer- tainty, repetition, etc. The meaning of V"^'?? here is plainly, the smaller leater animals. — IT'n. "ijs.3 , of living or animated breath. As to the meaning of breath (for IZJED.), see Job 41: 13, an un- doubted Instance ; and nearly as clear is it in Gen. 1: 30, below. — il^ri , properly an adj. from "'h , Dec. VIII. Meaning :. ' Smaller animals which live and breathe,' or ' which have the breath of life.' I take yi"4J to be in the const, state before Tf^h "ii^a . qiS , noun of multitude, no plural, Dec. I. — FlSiy"; , Poel of riDS , 175 and 262. — ijB~b? , Rosenmueller renders versus, to- wards ; and he appeals to Ex. 9: 22. 10: 21. Gen. 19: 28, for con- firmation. The meaning thus given is : ' Let the fowl fly over the earth, toward the expanse of heaven,' or ' toward the firma- ment above.' On account of the word S'^fjn here, it would seem necessary to acquiesce in this explanation. (21) Da'^SFiri , Yodh omitted in the last syllable, 63; lit. s«a- monsters, the larger seoranimals. — w^lin UJS5~-3 , every living be- ing, or living creature, or living thing; the two latter Hebrew words designating any thing which has animal or animated life. — ntoa'nn, n article for pronoun here, 412. d. Note 1; DipaH, Part. fe'm. Seghol., see in Par. XXI.— dnr»^ , ■j-'X: with the suff. of the plur. pron. tiln_ , see paradigm in 336.— P133 , lit. of wing, i. e. every winged fowJ, 440. a. (22) ^l^")! , Vav convers. without the Dagh. after it, 73. Note 3 ; ^"JS-; , with penult tone 101. b, and Tseri shortened in the final syllable 129. a.— tink, see on v. 17.— ^bNb, for la?,^., 119. c. 1.— n-is? , ^:3-i , Imp. Kal. of 'nys , rtl'n , for I'^'iB , =i^il. , 118 and Note 3.— fi-'Ja!!?, for n-'H^na 152. a. Note, fi:om D; Deo. VIII. irreg. ; ti'^m^. seems here to mean the cavity or gulf, in which the waters of the ocean repose. In the same sense it is plainly used, in Is. 11: 9. Hab. 2: 14; although some of the lexicons neg- lect this sense.— an": , apoc Fut. Kal from til'i ; 283. y. 86 NOTES ON NO. VII. GcH. 1: 24 — 26. part ii. No. VII. Gen. I. 24—31. (24) N^Jin , apoe. Fut. Hiph. 3 pers. fem, from NS; ; for Im- per. use, see 201. Note. — Tf'Jn MiSj, generic, every living creature, animal or animated beings. — n:''ab , the suff. m_ is sing, because its antecedent is so ; but the meaning is plural (their), because the antecedent is nomen multitudinis, 476. a. Note. — nafia, Dec. XI., in apposition with liiDa and governed in the same way ; as are also the two nouns which follow. Sia^iS here means tam£ beasts, cat- tle; tiir^, , reptiles ; and y"i8<-in^n, w7d beasts. — ilTih, 125. c, instead of n^H const, of fi^h . This form is not unusual in this noun; e.g. "i?2 ''n?l!. '''!!'? '"^^"^yi, ^^^ i"?*!!. etc. But in gene- ral, it is not common. Its tone is on the ultimate as we see in Ps. 104: 11 ; but in the passage before us, Maqqeph takes away the ac- cent 89.— ns'^ab , as before. (25) ria'iNr; , Methegh, 87. e. (26) r!ifli;3 , Fut. Kal. 1st. plur., from Mte. Most of the old- er critics find an intimation in this plural, (as they believe), of a plurality of persons in the Godhead. But the evidence seems too doubtful, in this case, to be relied upon. The pluralis mcgestati- cus or pluralis excellentiae, as it is called, in respect to B"'rfbN, ''J'iN , B"''i3lp , etc., seems now to be generally conceded, 437. 2. Thai pronouns may be used, and are used, in a similar way, among the oriental nations, seems to be somewhat certain from the fol- lowing examples ; viz. Ezra 4: 18, ' The letter which ye have sent unto us (ND'^bs Chald.) ;' it is king Artaxerxes who says this. Dan. 2: 36, ' We will tell the interpretation of it;' it is Daniel who is speaking. So in 1 Mace. 10: 19, 20, king Alexander says : '^>ct]x6a/^iv — xa&earaxtt/xsv, In 1 Mace. 11: 31, 33, 34, king Demetrius says : ' EyQaxpufiiv — jJ^mwj' — iKQivufnav — iaxctKafiiv, X. T. I. In 1 Mace. 15: 9 king Antiochus says : KQUTtjauixiv — do'iaaofisv. So in John 3: 11 Jesus says : OtSa/iev — kaJloviAfv — imQuKaniv. In Mark 4: 30 Jesus says : 'O(ioimao(iev — naga^a- ).M[iiv. In 1 John 1: 4, this apostle says of himself, ygacpofiiv' and Paul often employs the first person plural. Comp. with flirs3 above, Gen. 3: 22, ' Like one of a5 ;' Gen. 11: 7, ' Let us go down. PART II. NOTES ON NO. VII. Gen. 1:26. 87 ft and let us confound ;' also Is. 6: 8, ' Who will go for us V The passages sometimes adduced, in Gen. 29: 27. Num. 22: 6. Cant. 1: 4. 1 K. 12: 9. 2 Sam. 16: 20. 24: 14, and Job 18:2, 3, may be all considered as communicative, i. e. as common to the speaker and his friends, and so do not fairly belong to the above illustrations ; although Rosenmueller has adduced the three last passages, in the latest edition of his Commentary on the Pentateuch, as evidence that the plural was used by an individual speaker and appropriated to himself. It is clear that this idiom is not common or frequent, in the Old Testament ; it is more common in the Apocrypha, and in the New Testament. In modern times, it is the well known and gen- eral usage of royalty. It is singular, indeed, that kings should employ it for the sake of adding emphasis to their claims of hon- our, while a private individual, in particular one who addresses a public assembly, employs it to avoid the appearance of egotism or of assuming too much ; a manifest abuse of its original design. Modern usage, however, cannot help us to determine the usus hquendi of the Hebrews. So far as this is now discoverable, by the evidence before us respecting the use of the plur. number in the Old Testament, I feel constrained to agree with those critics, who resolve it (on the whole) into Ihe plur alis exceUentiae. Wabaa, with suff. 1i_ from t]!?^ , Dec. VI. a. The plural IS-; is to be accounted for on the same ground with tli25>2 above. — !|3r!=ia'l3 , suff. state of nl a^ , Dec. I., =l =_ as before. Not a few recent critics have maintained, that the writer of Gen. I. believed God to be in reality of the same form with man, i. e. that the writer was an Anthropomorphite. But was Paul one of this sect, because he says in 1 Cor. 11: 7, that 'man is the im- age and glory of God V and this too, not in reference to his moral qualities, as in Eph. 4: 24. Col. 3: 10. Was Moses— who, if not the author of the account of creation, yet at least was in all pro- bability the person who inserted it in the Pentateuch— was he a believer in the really pAysica?, human form of the Divinity 1 This same Moses, who in the second Commandment, has so absolutely and utterly prohibited all resemblances whatever of the Godhead, 88 NOTES ON NO. VII. Gen. 1: 26. paet ii. either to be made or to be worshipped? What other motive, but a belief in the spirituality of God, could induce him to do thus ? In a word ; one may well ask, whether there is any more Anthropomor- phism in Genesis, than in other parts of the Bible 1 And a consider- ate, fair answer to this question, will enable us to juage of those opinions, which ascribe such childish views of the Supreme Being to the early ages of the world, and in a special manner to the early part of the Hebrew Scriptures. If God ever revealed himself, in any way, to the early progenitors of our race, it is at least essentia] to suppose, that his spiritual nature was one of the first things which was revealed and understood. How could the idea of.a Cre- ator and Governor of the Universe, consist with the idea of a Divin- ity limited by a physical form, and of course circumscribed in his operations 1 The early ages of the world were not so stupid as to be incapable of seeing this ; nor are the monuments left behind of their skill and capacity, such as to warrant us in taxing the peo- ple of God with the grossness of Anthropomorphism. In regard to the words BVa and nin'7 , they stand related in Hebrew, as imago and similitudo do in Latin. They are so nearly synonymous, that they are plainly employed here together for the sake of intensity or emphasis, 438. d. Meaning : ' God made man peculiarly in his image, i. e. in a manner altogether distinct from that of other created terrestrial beings, and superior to them.' That this has special respect to the intellectual, rational, and mor- al powers with which man was endowed, and to the consequent pre-eminence or dominion over the lower creation which these gave him, seems to be obvious, when all the passages respecting God and man, in various parts of the Sacred Writings, are compared togeth- er. His pre-eminence is particularly referred to in what immedi- ately follows. '■''T^l ' 1 not conversive, but only connecting the Imp. sense here with the Imp. sense of lii!!S3 in the preceding clause ; see on ■"IT!-) V. 6 above.— 1 '7')'. , Fut. of" nnn , 201. Note, -rs'ia I'^n^i , the verb taking 3 prep, after it, 506 ; Beth Raphe, 80; nan , f^om nw Dec. XI. — qisa , with prep, a , for the same reason that naT takes it ; and so in nJa^isn (for nnnana 152 a. Note), and in bsa PART II. NOTES ON NO. VII. Geii. 1: 26 — 30. 89 (bis) in the latter part of the verse ; for all have 1'7~i'; implied before them. — iaann , art. for pronoun, 412. d. Note 1. The pre-eminence of man over all other terrestrial creatures, is clearly and strikingly expressed by this. (27) t]'l{ a peculiar form from "is;; , Fut. i::'''; when the tone is not retracted, i. e. without Vav conversive. In almost every case, the Fut. with^waZ Tseri is of such a form as "IS""^ or "l!?' , 244. a. This verb has also another form of the Fut., like that of Class III. verbs ''D 251, viz. "Vt"] . As an intrans. verb signifying to be distress- ed, it has other forms of the Future, viz. "iS; , and -\m\ (which is analogical, 244. a. Note). — "nSS, Ace. of material, as grammarians call it, i. e. the Ace. designating the materials out of which a thing is made, used in a kind of adverbial way, 428. e. MM'iNm , Dec. XI. That this name gave occasion to the appel- lation dIN , seems quite probable, both from the nature of the case as here represented, and also as represented in Gen. 3: 19. The etymology, which derives ti'lN from DIN red, because oriental men are of a reddish hue, is too fanciful to be entitled to much credit. Lit. [with, by means of] dust from the earth, i. e. with terrestrial dust.— UB'^l , from tis: , Fut. Pattahh, 235.— rss* , dual sufF. of B'^SN ; lit. breathed into his nostrils the breath of life. Meaning : ' Endowed him with living or animated breath.' The language is clearly av&gonona&ag " I mean, that this mode of description is oc- casioned by the action of breathing among men. — n^h 4553^ , lit. for a living or animated being ; a pariphrasis often employed by the Hebrews, in connection with the verb of existence, when it sig- nifies he became, it became, 507. Note. (8) SB'.i , Fut. of St:: 235.— d^fibN nin";, an appellation of God, never employed in Gen. I., but uniformly adopted in Gen. II., and nearly so in Gen. III. A like distinction obtains, in many other parts of the book of Genesis. From this it has been argued, by late critics, that this book is made up of records earlier than the time in which the author of the Pentateuch lived, and compo- sed by different persons ; a supposition which has some external evidence in the book of Genesis to favour it. On the supposition that these ancient records were introduced by Moses himself, the authenticity of the book remains unaffected by this critical opinion. ■ja , Dee. VIII. The etymology would naturally lead to the idea of «« enclosed place, {^Zi protegere) ; but this is not necessari- PART II. NOTES ON NO. IX. Gen. 2: 8 — 9. 95 ly attached to the idea of 15 . — pS, here prop, name ; comp. 2 K. 19: 12. Is. 37: 12. Ezek. 27: 23, (in all which cases, however, it is pointed "^y) , but this only determines the views of the Rabbinical punctators). In all these passages, Eden is mentioned along with Haran ('i'lh), a town of Mesopotamia, Gen. 11: 31, 32. 12: 5. 27: 43 ; and therefore Eden was probably at no great distance from Haran. See also Amos 1: 5, which probably refers to an Eden in Syria. That Eden means a country or tract of land here, is ev- ident from Gen. 4: 16. The word is used figuratively, in allu- sion to the garden here described, in Is. 51: 3. Ezek. 28: 13. 31: 9. Joel 2: 3 ; in the three former cases it is accompanied by the parallel or epexegetical phrase, ' garden of the Lord.' I3'ij?.73 , of the eastern country, (72 prep, often makes a periphra- sis of the Gen.), or toward the east, eastward, at the east. In Gen. 12: 8, the preposition 'jH is twice used with such a sense. So I'lSi^'q northward, Judg. 7: 1. — dto^n , apoc. Fut. Hiph. of D^la, with tone retracted and vowel shortened, 270. c. 3, comp. 208. Note 2. (9) has;;], apoc. Fut. Hiph. with Gutt., 236.— nahj. Part. Niphal ; for the pointing see 225. — nN"!ab 1^h3 , pleasant as to the sight. — b5N?5 , Dec. II. — S'^'hri yy'i , in the same construction with the preceding ys , and governed by h»l£«i implied. Meaning : ' The tree which preserves life,' or ' the tree of which he that eat- eth shall live and not die ;' comp. Gen. 3: 22. sni Hit: nSfn y» , the tree of knowing good and evil. TiSj^ , fem. Inf noun, used as a verbal from ST^ . The meaning has been greatly contested. Rosenmueller contends, that the word means the same here, as when applied to infants in order to designate their entire ignorance; and he refers to Deut. 1: 39. Is. 7: 16. Jonah 4: 11. The two last cases, however, are quite different as to the manner of expression ; and there remains only one, viz. Deut. 1: 39, to be compared with our phrase. But that the meaning is the same in Deut. 1: 39, as in Gen. 2: 9, appears to be rendered doubt- ful by the context preceding and succeeding, as well as by the na- ture of the case. Was man, when made in the image of God, as ig- norant at first as an infant 1 How then did he preserve himself? Or how could he understand his moral relations to his Creator ; and how be guilty for not obeying a command, the nature of which he 96 NOTES ON NO. VII. Gen. 2: 9 — 10. part ii. was incapable of understanding 1 Must we suppose the writer of our history to be so weak, as to entertain such views of the original nature of man ? Moreover, what crime could there be, in attaining such a knowl- edge as would enable one nicely to distinguish between moral good and evil ? Has it not always been, and must it not always be, a virtue in intelligent and moral beings to do this 1 There remains then but one rational supposition, in regard to the meaning of our phrase. This is, that by the knowledge of good and evil is meant, ' a knowledge of the difference or distinction be- tween happiness and misery,' (for good and evil very commonly have such a signification in the Scriptures, e. g. Is. 3: 10, 11, et. al. saepe) ; i. e. man, by eating the forbidden fruit, came to know the difference between happiness and misery ; or the eating of the fruit which was prohibited, occasioned him to know, by unhappy ex- perience, the difference between a state of happiness and a state of misery. This explanation plainly accords with the nature of the whole transaction, and with what ensued upon eating the fruit of the tree in question. The name, then, considered in this point of view, is quite intelligible and significant ; is it so in any other ? The words of the tempter in Gen. 3: .5, whose object it was to deceive, cannot be justly alleged against this interpretation ; nor do the words of Jehovah, in Gen. 3: 22, make against it, for they are evidently of the nature of solemn irony, with allusion to the decep- tion of the tempter as recorded in Gen. 3: 5. (10) t«2£'' , issued, Sil. b. — yvsiz , i. e. from some part of the re- gion called Eden.— nip-iUlnl: , Inf Hiph. with n praefix retained, 216. 3. It is plain that the river flowed through the garden, where our first parents were placed; and this before its stream was dispart- ed ; i. e. one stream only watered Paradise. — tiiaai , and thence, which may refer either to ^S , or to the region in which it was, viz. yvs . Rosenmueller refers it to 15 , (Alterthumsk. I. 192) ; but it is equally agreeable to usage, in this case to refer it to pS ; and some may prefer this here.— nns'^ , Fut. Niph. used as the Praeter by virtue of the Vav before the preceding word, connec- ted with it and with the preceding N^^ ; comp. 503. Note 1. — PART II. NOTES ON NO. IX. Get). 2: 11 — 13. 97 MS^'lNb , 457. 6. ai'iBn , sources, heads, here river-heads or sources ; comp. V. 13, where "1^13 is substituted for ON-i . (11) insivj. 465. — 'jillJ-'S, the Phasis, as Rosenmueller and others suppose, a river of Colchis, running into the east end of the Black sea. Taking off the endings {is and y\—), we have the same radicals (tUS) in both words. Xenophon, however, in Anab. IV. 6, mentions a Phasis with which he ■ met, farther south, and which must be, as it would seem, either the present Kur (Cyrus), or the Aras or Araxes. I regard the former as the more probable ; be- cause .the Araxes seems to be the Gihon, mentioned in v. 13. The Kur takes its rise, if we may credit the best maps, in the northern part of Armenia, and running first northward, and then eastward, either passes through or grazes upon the ancient Colchis or Havilah. It finally unites with the Araxes, and both empty into the south- western part of the Caspian Lake. aasrj , ri art. for pronoun, 412. d. Note 1. This word is usu- ally construed as meaning to encompass, to flow round on the mar- gin of; but it plainly signifies, also, to pass through, to wind on^s way through, as Is. 23: 16. 1 Sam. 7: 16 clearly shew. This sense of the word may be applied either to the Kur, or to the northern Phasis, both of which pass through Havilah, i. e. the country of Col- chis ; or it may be applied to the Kur, which also grazes upon, encomr jpawes, a part of Havilah or Colchis. — lnV''lh.n , prob. Colchis; which was rich in gold ; e. g. Jason went thither afl;er the golden fleece, i. e. gold caught in fleeces, gold separated from the waters of the Phasis by means of them. Colchis, no doubt, like aJl the early countries of Nomades and predatory hordes, was not a definitely bounded country. It lies at the east end of the Black Sea. — aa 'lUJN , wJure 478. b. (12) Nirin (for N'^ni'l' see 165. 6. /), the same w, 469. — hbhan , Bdtlltov, bdellium, a gum used as incense for burning, and of an aromatic smell. — Dnii , prob. the onyx. So Rosenm. I. 209. Alterth. (13) tirT*;! , not improbably the Araxes or Aras; which the Persians still call, (jjw J| (Jji^^V^ , Cfihon el Ras. — i^iOln, en- compasses or winds its way through; see on v. 11. Which of these 13 98 REMARKS ON cusH, Gen. 2: 13. part ii. senses it bears here, must depend on the situation of ii;')ls in re- spect to the river in question. — ^ttJ13 , Cush or Kush. But where is Cush ? ' In the narrower sense,' says Gesenius, ' it means Ethiopia, i. e. the southern part of Arabia ; or Ethiopia in Africa, which was a colony of the former ; as the language shews.' But Cush in the widest sense, both Gesenius and, Rosenmueller represent as equivalent to Southern Country, Torrid Zone, i. e. the re- gion inhabited by people of colour ; and both avow that there is an entire want of geogiaphical accuracy in the scriptural account of the local situation of Paradise. ' How could Gihon,' (the Oxus, as Rosenmueller and others sup- pose, which running from a remote eastern country, empties itself into the south-eastern part of the Caspian Lake), ' how could this stream encompass the South-Land, i. e. either Ethiopia or Southern Arabia ?' Fully to discuss these difficult problems of ancient geography, would here be out of place. But as affirmations of this nature, on the part of such acute, learned, and distinguished critics as Geseni- us and Rosenmueller, have a sti-ong tendency to undermine the belief of the young inquirei*, in the accuracy of the sacred historians, I shall suggest a few reasons, very briefly, why one may still beheve, with the older critics, that there was a Cush Oriental, as well as a Cush Southern. (1) The vei-y general custom in all ages, early and late, of naming places after distinguished persons, will be allowed.* Now Cush was the eldest son of Ham, Gen. 10: 6. 1 Chron. ] : 8. He was also the father of Nimrod, the founder of the Babylonian empire and of its gi-eat cities ; the founder also of Nineveh, Rehoboth, Calah, and Re- sen, in Assyria ; see Gen. 10: 8 — 12. In v. 11, tlie rendering should be, (as it is in the margin of our English bibles) : He [Nimrod] went out of that land [viz. Babylon] into Assyria, "iTiiN , Ace. adverbial of place, 428. a. So Rosenm. in Alteitlumiskunde, Th. II. p. 94. The father of such a distinguished founder of empires and cities, which were the wonder of all succeeding ages, must himself of course have been entitled to distinction on this account ; not to mention, that he was a gi-andson of Noali. AVas there no region or place in the East, named after him by such a son as Ninu-od ? (2) Among the people whom the king of Assyria transport- ed to the land of Israel, after he had conquered the ten tiibes and cai-ried them away to Halah, Habor, the river Gozan, and the cities of the Medes, (i. e. to the northern part of Assyria and to Me- .dia), is one named nlS ''125: N , men of Cuth, 2 K. 17:30; also * Rosonmueller says, tlmt most of the names in Gen. X., are names of countries as well as of persons. Altertli. II. p. 94. PART II. REMARKS ON cusH, Gen. 2: 13. 39 written Mn^lS, in 2 K. 17: 24. These men are, in both places, men- tioned in connection with Babylonians {bl33 '\D3N),who accompanied them. The idol which they worshiped,' 'is named 53 "ID , 2 K. 17: 30 ; plainly a name of northern or middle Asia (not a Shemitish one), as appears in the proper names of the princes of Babylon, Nergal- Sharezer, Jer. 39: 3, 13, (also in Neriglissor, who slew Evilmerodach and mounted the throne of Babylon). mD~''ai:N , the Cuthites, then, were an oriental people. Now ni 3 and lai 3 may evidently be nothing more than the Aramean and Hebrew forms of the same word ; inasmuch as the Hebrew irj not unfrequently is lisped, i. e. is pro- nounced n in' the Aramaean. For example ; the Hebrew "iTiSN (Ass3'ria), by the Syrians and Chaldeans was called "ilnN; by the Arabians, A»'i| Atw ; and hence, by the Greeks and Romans, .31u- ria. That the Cuthites or Cushites, transplanted from the east, were the most considerable of all the colonies which the king of Assyria placed in Samai-ia, is evident from the fact, that they gave name af- terwards to the whole people of Samaria ; for the Jews ever since have called the Samaritans Cuthites, DTi'S or n^TiS . There were, then, oriental Cuthites or Cushites. (3) Moses Choronensis, a native of Armenia, and who in the fifth century wrote the history of that country, which is still extant, in his Geography appended to this work by the Whistons, includes all, the country east of the Tigils, from the Caspian lake dovra to the Persian Gulph, under the name of Cush. Media he calls, Cushi-Capcoch ; Elymais, Cushi-Choraaan ; Persia, Chushi-Nem- roz ; and under Elymais he reckons a province named Chusastan, p. 363. As there is no ground to dispute either the knowledge or the veracity of this historian, in respect to such a subject ; and as this tes- timony reaches very fai- back, and shews the wide prevalence of the oriental generic name Cush, among the ancients who were natives of the east ; so is it plain, that an oriental Cush is not merely ideal. (4) Cushistan, i. e. Cush country, is still the name of a province, on the east of the Tigris and of ancient Babylonia ; although the Ara- bians appear to have changed the original orthography of the word. (5) The author of our history has referred to countries and places certainly khown, as serving to confirm his accoimt, and to put his readers in possession of definite views respecting the situation of Eden. Would he venture to mix fable with truth, in a thing of this nature so easily contradicted by every oriental traveller .' Did he not know to what he referred ? Did not the original ancestoi-s of the Jews spring from the East ? Did not Jacob live there many years ? Could it be a mere conjecture with him, (and with his descendants), whether there was a Cush in that region ? (6) After a lapse of more than 3000 years, can the present names of places or rivers be adduced, in order to confute the account of Moses ? 100 NOTES ON NO. IX. Gen. 2: 14. paet it. (7) The acknowledged geographical accuracy (in the popular sense) of the Scriptures in general, makes very much against the sup- position of Gesenius, Rosenmueller, and memy othei-s, that our autlior has here committed great mistakes in his account of Paradise, and that the whole is a mere fiv&og. Is it the manner of those who write Itvd-oi, to describe locality in the way here practised ? I will only add, that understanding Cush of Cushi-Capcoch, i. e. the northern part of the region between the Caspian Lake and the Persian Gulph ; and supposing the Gihon to be the Araxes ; then does this river encompass Cush. There need be no (tv&og supposed here. (14) i'p.^h, the Tigris. The H is prob. prefixed to make the quadriliteral form, as in n^sah , b^ Jh i t)''?^ipd > etc. In Aramaean, Digla and Diglath ; in Arabic, Diglath ; in the Pehlvi, ^edscAera. — na'ip , eastward, in the eastern part of or 6efor«, which however is equivalent to the other meanings. ' But how could the writer say thus ? Assyria lies beyond the Tigris, which makes its western border not its eastern one.' To which Rosenmueller (so he often does in other parts of this descrip- tion of the local situation of Paradise) answers, that ' this descrip- tion results manifestly from the ignorance of our author respecting the geography of the places named.' The same has been affirmed by many other late critics. But is not Assyria, as a province, to be distinguished from As- syria as a kingdom 1 Passing over the extravagant and contradic- tory accounts of Herodotus and Ctesias, in regard to the early history of this monarchy, so much may be inferred fi-om them and from the Scriptures, that Assyria did, very early, attain great political eminence, and push far and wide its conquests. Was not Nimrod of a character to do this ? In Moses' time, we find Bala- am adverting to the conquests of this powerful monarchy, Num. 24: 22. In David's time the Assyrians are reckoned among his enemies, and ranked with neighboring nations, Ps. 83; 8. Of course they must then have been in possession of Syria ; or at least, of a part of it. Was not the Tigris, then, on the east, or in the eastern part of Assyria viewed as a kingdom .' And will not this view com- pare with that which Balaam takes, in Num. 24: 22 ? Indeed, Rosenmueller concedes the above facts, in Alterth. II. 103 seq. ; what need then o{ fivd-og here ? Moreover, the limits which he so confidently puts to Assyria as a province, are far from being certain, when applied to the time of Moses. Diodorus Siculus places Nineveh on the Euphrates, as Ctesias (from whom he drew) had done before him ; and even the PART II, NOTES ON NO. IX. Gen. 2: 15. 101 acute and learned Mannert, places it on the west of the Tigris. Is it so certain, then, that Moses knew not what he was saying, when he said that ' the Tigris runneth -i1«J4t M^lp , on the east of Assyria V How difficult also, I may add, to convict one of geo- graphical error, who wrote more than 3000 years ago ! n"js , the Euphrates, which being nearer and befter known than any of the rivers before named, is not described by a particu- lar reference to country, as in the other cases. (15) h;?'.! , Fut. of nj5> .— iMnS!], Fut. Hiph. from ns; , 251. Yodh between the last two radicals is dropped, 65 ; in- verbal suff. with penult tone, 309. — 'jaa , Beth Raphe, 80.— m^yb , Inf with suiT. n_ ; see in Par. XXII., and comp. 312. 4. — mau;-;^ , ibid. It may be noted, here, that it was obviously the design of the Creator, that man should be active and should labour even in the paradisiacal state. Labour itself, then, is not a part of the curse which followed the apostasy ; but labouring with toil and sorrow, and labouring to cultivate ground which is comparatively barren, is a part of the curse; Gen. 3: 17 — 19. From the view given above of the rivers which issued from Eden, (which in its general features resembles that given by Re- land and Calmet), it appears that there is no necessity of suppos- ing the description of the lo(4ality of Eden to be a mere iiv&og, as most of ths recent German critics have done. Rosenmueller says : "From the description given in Gen. II., to endeavour to make out the locaUty of Paradise, idem esse videtur, atque FirgUii de Elysio phan- tasmata (Eneid. VI. 637, seq.) ad veritatem revocare ;" Comm. in Gen. 2: 10. Yet it is a fact, that four great rivers do take their rise in the region of Armenia, viz. the Kur, the Araxes, the Euphrates and the Tigris. It is a fact, that the sources of all four at present, are in the neighbourhood of each other, in the middle region of Aiinenia, and at no great distance from Ararat. There seems, then, to be no im- portant difficulty in the way of admitting, that the countries on which they are said by our author to graze, or through which they wind their way, ai-e countries correctly designated, according to the geogra- phy of the day. Indeed, ths very nature of the appeal, on the part of the writer, to the productions of the country, e. g. to the gold and bdellium and onyx of Havilah, of itself shews, that he felt himself se- cure against the imputation of fiction. Only one important circum- stance remains. This is, that the four rivers just named do not, 102 REMARKS ON THE LOCATION OF EDEN. PART II. at present, flow from one source, but are some 30 or 40 miles apart. This, no doubt, must be admitted, as things now are. But if the history of the deluge be not also a iiv&og, (and I am aware that the critics in question believe it to be so, yet geolo^ is proceeding now to overthrow their position), then is it certain th&t no very impor- tant objection to the accuracy of our author can be drawn fi-om this. That important changes must have been made by the deluge, in the face of the eaath, in the courses of rivers, and in the plainness or un- evenness of the surface of every country, needs not to be demonstrated. 'Moses does not say, that at the time when he is writing, the four rivers which he names were flowing from one source ; he merely avers, that originally they did so. The possibility of this, considering the present proximity of these rivers, and the changes that a deluge must have made, cannot well be denied. The prdbahiliiy rests main- ly on the credit of the writer. Those who beUeve that he was di- vinely guided, may safely believe, that he has given us something dif- ferent from a fable like that respecting the garden of the Hesperides, in his account of Paradise. They may believe that there was a grand river-source in the Armenian country, (the ancient Eden), fi'om which issued a stream, on whose banks the garden of Eden was situated ; and that after this stream had wound its way through the garden, it be- came disparted, and running in different directions, gave rise to four large rivers. Where so much is known to be true, both in respect to the existence of such rivers, and (I believe I may add) in regard to the countries named, we may, all things considered, believe the rest on the credibihty of the writer, without being justly Uable to the imputa- tion of any inordinate credulity. (16) la^l , vd-yatsdv, 1 without Daghesh after it, 208 in e. g. ; la'J , apoc. Fut. Piel. Dagh. omitted in Vav, because it comes to be a final letter 72, comp. also 286. 2— ibN^. , 119. c. 1. — ■jan , art. rt 411.— biJ^Pi bbN , Inf. abs. with a finite tense, 514. b. c. (17) V»??.-T, »] 152. c. 4; a 112.— S-ji , 1 152. c. 3. For the whole phrase, see on v. 9 above. — V?>Jn , Fut. with Pattahh here, in the verse preceding it has a Tseri ; see Par. VII. — IS 73a, i.e. Irt IM la , the first Nun is assimilated with Mem, the second caus- es the - of the pronoun to be assimilated with it ; see in 309. N. , ^?e-S"se/-Zo, with Dagh. euphonic or conjunctive 75. a, 1 pcrs. Fut. Kal from, iiipy . — i'l^.p , 'las with sufT. pronoun, Sept. xar' avvov^ and in v. 20 they render the same word, Of-wtog avim' rightly as to the sense, which is, according to that which is the counterpart to him, or ac. cording to that which corresponds to him. The fanciful (not to say shameful) comment, put on this word by Schultens, and after him by Rosenmueller and others, but rejected by Gesenius, may be seen in Rosenm. Comm. in loc. and in several of the lexicons. (19) "^it*.!, apoc. Fut. Kal, almost the only verb which has a penult Hhireq and an ultimate Tseri, which becomes Seghol here because the accent is retracted, 129. a, comp. 244. b ; used as plu- perfect here, had formed.— ;-'n^TEii n;;h-t3 na'iNn-';!: , comp. the sentiment with Gen. 1:24: 25. — C!"a\Bn nis.— bs HNI , i. e. God formed, nirT] 'iS';] . If the clause wanNrj—ja is also implied here, there would seem to be some discrepancy between this and Gen. 1: 20, 21.— to'^1 , apoc. Fut. Hiph. Par. XX.— niN-ib, /or the seeing, in order to see, from !lN'^ . — *''^p'~i^^ > 75. a. — ib , Dat. of the thing called ; see on '-\inb in No. II. v. 5. — n^h uis: , in apposition with ib , which is here anticipative 474. The prep. b is implied before rfn XB?. . — nauj , suff. state of tia , Dec. VII. (20) bsb , Dat. after NTp^l , as above. — NSa , one didnotjind, there was not found, 500. — iT53 nts , see on v. 18. What is here stated unplies, of course, the full persuasion of the writer, that language or speech belonged to man at the first, as an at- tribute of his being. It did not arise merely from the mutual inter- course of human beings ; for Adam is here represented as having giv- en names to animals, before the creation of Eve. Indeed, I am not able to see why it is not as probable, that the gift of language was one with which the Creator originally endowed the progenitors of the hu- man race, as that he endowed them with understanding and reason. Articulate speech is as much a pecuhar characteristic of human na- ture, in its maturity, as either of these attributes. And that the first pair were kot created in/ante, needs no proof but a consideration of the nature of the case. We might as well suppose, that the first oaks 104 NOTES ON NO. X. Gen. 2:21 — 23. i'artii. were only acorns when created ; that all the first vegetables were only seeds ; and that all these grew up to maturity afterwards. If so, how in the mean time did man and animals get their sustenance ? Or how did our infant parents, and the young of animals, provide for them- selves this sustenance, if any were to be had .' The idea so often repeated by some late philosophers and critics, that our first parents were formed with merely the powers of speaking articulate language, which they improved and extended by first imitat- ing noises made by the brute creation, is nothing less than maintaining, that the Creator, who made man in his own image, left him in a state less finished than he did the brutes ; and that he consulted, or provid- ed for, neither his wants nor his dignity. Believe this who may ; for myself I must believe, that man recent from the hands of his Creator, and with the image of the Eternal enstamped upon him, was more perfect than any of his degenerate posterity have ever been, in all those powers which make our nature superior to that of the lower creation around us. (21) bs;2 , apoc. Fut. Hiph. of bB3 , used here in the genuine causative sense of this conjugation, 185. b. 1, comp. also 206. Note 1.— na'T.I^F!, Dec. 'XI.— l-i;-";;! , for vowels see 244 6; for the effect of the pause accent, 144. I. ; for tone on the final syllable, see 101. b. Note 2. c. — njj'.l , with the tone on the ultimate, see 101. 6, under e. g., the penult here not being a simple syllable, i. e. not ending in a vowel. nhN for rTiriN , fem. of 1h{J , 107. 2.— Vn J>^2 , Dec. IV. i ; but here the fem./orm of the plur. is used, while the gender is mas- culine, 327. 2. — SiJD'^3 , tone on the ultimate, 101. b. under e. g. — nsrjhn, compounded ofnhn, a prep, like a noun of Dec. VI. (407. Note and 407. a), and a suff. pronoun. (22) fi'-.n ,283. y.— iratjb , comp. 507. 6.— fiijS':] , i 208 under e. g. ; ■; instead of ; 133 ; a for ''i 63 ; n_ verbal suffix, 309 col- umn e. (23) nyBln , this time, now, the art. Iri makes it definitely to re- late to the time or occasion then being ; Ace. of time, 428. 2 and c— ""aasa , plural with suff. from BS:? . -rT>aN', fem. of «J"'N , by contracting the long vowel of the masculine form ; others take it for niaas , fem. of '.aSN . So the old Latins : vir, a man ; vira, a wo- man.— 'r\'nj>b, Pual3 fem. Praet., instead of ritijpb 51. Note; for 1' ART II. NOTES ON NO. X. Gen. 2: 23 — 25. 105 Methegh, 87. g ; but here the p does not necessarily exclude the the Dagh. forte ; it is only an arbitrary exclusion, to which the prin- ciples of a necessary one are extended, so far as Methegh is con- cerned. — riNT with Dagh. conjunctive, 75. (24) -ajs:; , yorS^zobh, short O, 89.— riw"* , Par. XXIV. No. II. — v-rnt, suff. state of tij« , Dec. VIII. 129. c. a. — pan"! , with a Fut. sense, because n connects it to the preceding ajy^ which has such a sense, 209.— iwaxs , 506, Dec. XIII. c. — I'^ni , with a Fut. sense, 209. — 'liaa'b , Dat. after tr^Ti in the sense of become ; which is the usual construction. (25) ti!7''ai)iJ, dual sufF. of CJJ-IJ.- c-'73'ni>, plur. of ci-i5>, Dec. VIII, vowels as in Dec. III. The Shureq here remains in a mixed syllable, 31. Note 3. The usual method of orthography wouldbe, S"'an5. For the shortening of the i of the ground form here, into =1 , see 127. Exc. 1 ; also 346. 3; 270. b. 1 ; 352. 3. The asterisk is designed to refer to the note at the bottom of the page ; which is a Masoretic remark, alid lit. translated means : Daghesh after Shureq. The design is, to note this as a singularity ; or at least as an usage which is not frequent. — I'iiiaisn'; , Hithpoel of Uiia, of the class final Hholem, 270. under a. 1, verbs final Hho- lem. It has Fut. Pattahh in Hithpoel, viz. UJiDian'; ; for the effect of the pause-accent here, see 146. This whole account of naming the animals, and of the formation of woman, is regarded by Rosenmueller, Gesenius, and many other mterpreters, as a mere fiv&og • pleasantly devised, indeed, and ingen- ious as to the execution, as some of them concede. But if there be a God, who created the world, made man in his own image, and endow- ed him with the gift of speech, it was not unworthy of him to call that gift into exercise. If that God made a ' help meet' for solitary man, there is nothing unbecoming with respect to his dignity and wisdom, in the supposition that he did form woman from man as here related, in order to constitute an indissoluble tie of endeaiing connection be- tween the sexes in this way, or by these peculiar means. The ques- tion, whether he covld not have inspired the sexes with the same feel- ings, in some other way, may be sufficiently answered, by asking : How will the critics mentioned prove to us that divine wisdom could not, and did not, choose this way of doing it ? And until this be 14 106 REMARKS ON Gen. II. partii. shown, we may venture to give credit to our author ; especially as our Saviour and his apostles so expressly recognize the real verity of the narration in question ; see Matt. 19: 5, 6. Mark 10: 5 — 9. 1 Cor. 6: 16. Eph. 5: 31. 1 Cor. 11: 8, 9. 1 Tim. 2: 13. The question : 'Wheth- er one of the ribs of men is now found lacking ?' (which has been scoff- ingly asked, in order to refute the nan-ation above), is hardly entitled to a serious answer. Does a man now, who breaks or loses a rib, beget children who are lacking as to one of theirs ? If not, why should Adam's male decendants pailake of a merely physical peculiar- ity of their progenitor ? The primaeval state of man, without clothing and without shame, sei-ves to shew, that his Creator had adapted the temperature of the re- gion in which he placed him, to a condition in which the fewest wants possible would be experienced. The labour necessary to pro- cure clothing, was to be dispensed vnth. Integrity and innocence, too, are designated by these traits. No guilty passions arose in the breast of the first happy pair. Sin only gives a sense of shame ; and as they had not yet sinned, they found nothing to excite a blush. Even Pla- to, without the light of revelation, formed in his own mind a picture of the primitive state of man, more rational and becoming than some of our modem philosophical critics have pourtrayed. He thus describes it: 0£og 'ivijiiv avjovg, avjog iiiiinaTiav, xa&ansQ vvv av&Qanoi,, ^aov ov ^cioTsgov, ai,Xa yivri qiavkoiiga avjav vofiwovai. rvjxvol de xal aurgtoToi ■&vgavlovvxeg t« noXla ivefiovro, (in Politico) ; i. e. ' God fed them, himself taking care of them ; just as men, who are be- ings of a diviner nature, feed animals of an inferior nature. Naked, and vrithout any covering, they lived mostly in the open air.' No. XI. Gen. III. 1—7. The student will observe, that the full train of accents is introduc- ed in the sequel. This is not done with a design to lead him, as yet, to the study of the accents, in respect to their consecution or train, i. e. the manner in which they follow one another or stand mutually relat- ed or connected. This can be done better at a futiu-e period, and when the means of doing it shall be afforded to the student.* The particular reason why all the accents are here admitted, is, that the student may now become accustomed to read with them ; and that he may become acquainted with the manner in which they are all employed, in order to mark tone-syllables ; with the various ways in in which they affect the quantity of the vowels, and tlieir restoration * The eccoTiti edition of my Hebrew Grnminar exhibits the consscntion of the accents hero referred to, both in poetry and prose, in the Appendix. In the third and fourth editions it was omitted, in order to save the room which it would occupy ; but particularly, because Prof. Gibbs expects to insert it in his Lexicon Formarum, PART II. NOTES ON NO. XI. Gen. 3: 1. 107 where they would by the principles of common analogy be dropped ; with the influence they exert over the insertion or omission of Dtigh. lene in the asph-ates ; and also with the power which they exert in changing the place of the tone syllable, in a multitude of words. These are sufficient reasons, and reasons founded in the grammatical phenomena of the language as now presented to us, why the stu- dent ought not to be, and must not be, ignorant of the influence exercised by the accents over the forms and tone of words. Besides these reasons, there is another which is not destitute of weight. The accents, as conjunctive and disjuneiive, serve, (at least they often do, and in the estimation of most older critics they always do), to show what words are to be considered as intimately con- nected in regard to relation and meaning, and what are to be more or less disjoined ; a help, which in some doubtful cases is veiy grateful to the critic, and to which the most enlightened intei*preters of the present day do not fail occasionally to resort. With this use of the accents, however, the student need not trouble himself, for the pres- ent ; and when he comes to obtain a knowledge of it, it may be done with very little trouble, and without going deeply into the study of the whole consecution of the accents, i. e. of their various relations, positions, and dependencies. In the sequel, I shall remark on the accents, only when they in some way afl^ct the vowels, the aspirates, or the tone-syllable, or ' when, from their position as praepositive or postpositive, they might natui-ally mislead the beginner, as to the proper place of the tone of any word. For the rest, I take it for gi-anted, that the student will here acquaint himself with the names and forms of the first and sec- ond class of disjunctives, (if he has not already done it) ; as this will cost him but a few minutes labour each day, for a small number of days ; and that he will afterwards go on gradually to make himself acquainted with the whole number, in the like manner. In this way, the time spent on this object will scai;cely be recognized ; and the student will find sufficient profit and satisfaction, to repay him am- ply for his labour. (1) "iJhsn, the serpent. The effort of Dr. Clarke to prove that UJh: here means an ape or monkey, is not only opposed to the usus loquendi of the Hebrews, but the thing is in itself utterly improba- ble ; for when or where has the ape been regarded as ' cunning above all the beasts of the field?' The serpent, however, is the known emblem of sagacity, in Egypt and through the eastern world. But was this a literal serpent, or only a symbolical one ? Did 108 REMARKS ON Gen. III. 1. PART II. the writer attribute to a mere animal serpent all which the sequel dis- closes ; or did he suppose the tempter to be an evil demon, whom he represents as in the shape of a serpent ? The latter, as I must be- lieve ; for, (1) This accords with the commonly received traditions and language of the East ; e.g. the Zend-Avesta of Zoroaster attributes the first seduction of men to evil, to Ahriman, the prince of evil Ge- nii, under the shape of a sei7)ent ; Zend-Avesta, Vol. I. p. 25. III. 84, seq. edit. Kleuker. The Jewish tradition is, that Samael, the princi- pal evil depion, first seduced Eve, and led her to sin ; see Eisenmeng- er, Entdeoktes Judenthum, I. p. 823. ( 2 ) There is satisfactory evi- dence that the New Testament writers believed in the same thing ; e. g. Rev. 12: 9, the devil or Satan is called, o dgaxav 6 fidyag, o o(pig o agxatog — q nXav&v triv olxovfiiyrjv olrjv " and again, in Rev. 20: 2, the same appellations are repeated. See also 2 Cor. 1 1: 3. John 8: 44, where the Saviour expressly recognizes the temptation of our first pa- rents to sin, as the work of the devil ; so in 1 John 3: 8. See also Wisd. 2: 24, where there is the same sentiment. (3) The nature of the case is sufiicient to shew that the writer did not intend a mere lit- eral serpent. Did the author really believe, that hteral serpents could speak, and form plans for seducing to the commission of moral evil ? If not, (and who will venture to charge him with such ignorance ?) then must we suppose, that like the writer of the Apocalypse, he has represented the devil under the image or foi-m of a serpent ; see Rev. 12: 9. 20: 2 ; comp. 2 Cor. 11: 3. That a part of the representation ' which follows, seems to be appUcable only to a literal serpent, is the natural consequence of the writer's cai-ryuig on, through the whole narration, a uniform consistency in the mode of representation, wliich he had adopted at the beginning. See on v. 15 below. On the question : Whether the actual form of a serpent presented itself to the ocular vision of Eve ? most persons would perhaps decide readily in favour of the afiirmative ; nor would I venture to gainsay the correctness of such a behef, for who can disprove it .' Yet it is no more necessary to the essential verity of the narration and transac- tion in question, to suppose that there was an actual physical form pre- sented to view, than it is in the case of our Saviour's temptation, as re- lated by the Evangelists, to suppose that there was a physical ap- pearance of Satan, and audible words (audible with the outwai'd eai'), aijdressed to him. If Jesus was ' tempted in all points as we are,' a physical appearance of the devil can hardly be supposed to have been one of the means of temptation. On the supposition that our first parents were tempted by an evil spirit, (and if Christ and his apostles ai-e to be credited, this must have been the case), then we may either suppose that the tempter assum- ed the actual form of a serpent, and accosted the mind or eye of Eve, by mounting the tree which bore the forbidden fi:uit, and thus afford- ing probable evidence that it might be eaten wdth impunity, and there- fore tempting our first mother to follow his example ; or we may sup- PART II. NOTES ON NO. XI. Geti. 3: 1 — 3. 109 pose the whole to be a figurative method of describing a real fact, viz. the fact that Eve was tempted by an evjl spirit, and did yield to the temptation. Either of these may be adopted, aahd fide et salvd ec- clesid; for the Scriptures are full of examples, in which the lilce prin- ciples of exegesis are generally admitted. Of the two methods here proposed, the former is more easy and obvious, at first view ; the second is the most consonant with the na- ture of the tempter. The objection to the first is, that to suppose the devil in reahty to have assumed the visible form of a serpent, would be attributing a miraculous power to him, (which none possess but God, or those whom God commissions for purposes of good) — a mirac- ulous power, employed here for the most fatal of all purposes. The second method is relieved of this difficulty. Nor would the boldly figu- rative costume of the whole, thus construed, be anymore objection to the reality of the essential facts in this case, than the aclcnowledged figurative costume of the 18th Psalm, is an objection to the reality of the facts on which the representation is grounded ; or than the plain- ly figurative manner of describing the Saviour's temptation, which the Evangelists have adopted, is an objection to the reality of his tempta- tion. Is not God eveiy where figuratively spoken of; and yet, is there not reality in the descriptions ? As to the conversation here, between the serpent and the woman, it may be viewed Uke that between the Saviour and the tempter, i. e. as mental, not with audible words addressed to the external ear. Does it need any proof, that the Scriptures are full of the like examples ? So in Greek, qpjjp signifies both to think and to speak. Of the whole neir- ration it may be said, that if we adopt the second mode of interpreta- tion proposed above, we have only to suppose, (what is so obvious and so consonant with the best laws of rhetoric), that the writer has gone through his whole piece, in a manner accordant with the begiiming of it. All that concerns the sei-pent is consistently stated, as though it had respect to a visible serpent. The meaning, however, as m a mul- titude of the like cases, is tropical. TiTi , became, as Storr and others render it. But I prefer the common version. — tll'lS, cunning, sly, insidious. Part. adj. of Dec. III. — bsa , 454. a. — ■'S ?1N , lit. even that or verily that, i. e. ' is it so that? is it truly so that?' etc. The sign of the interrogative (rr) is omitted here, as often elsewhere, 557. — "laN , the genuine sense of the Praeterite, has md, 503. a. — b'Sa , of every. — V?, if taken as a noun of multitude, may be rendered of the trees; other- wise we may translate this and the preceding word, of every tree. (3) ysri, sing, here, of the free.— ^ina, Methegh, 87. l.e; const, form of ^IW, Dec. VI.— ibSKSn , Methegh, 87. c— 13H,a , no N0TE3 ON NO. XI. Gen, 3:5 — 7. parth. see ■'S73.a in No. IX. v. 17.— I^an, Tav Raphe, 80.-12, Dagh. lene, 79. 3.— IS , Dagh. lene, 79. 3, as Athnahh precedes. — 'J^nan, instead of ^inian , 65 and 41 ; ) paragogic, 211. a. 1. The tone also is shifted from the penult (100. §■) to the ultimate, by the pause-accent and the ending I'i , 100. 1. (5) 51'"' , 527. a. tiSbSN , Inf with suff. used as a Gerund, see in Par. XXII. 2 masc. plural, for the short vowel (Qamets Hha- teph), see 129. a. — inpBjl, Niph. Praet., made Fut. as to the sense by i prefixed, 209 and 503. e. Note 2. Here the words which indicate a, future sense, are Qsb^N Di''3 , which refer to a time yet to come. — tiD"'ry, suiF. dual of D'^:''? — O'l'i^ni , Praet. as Fut. 209 ; Methegh, 87. d. — ''S'l'^ , plural Part, in const, state, 531 ; Methegh, 87. c. Observe, that the tempter does not here say, simply, ' Ye shall know good and evil ;' but, ' Ye shall, like the Elohim, know good and evil ;' a different meaning I apprehend, from that of the first form of expression. Our first parents, fi-om communing with God, must have known something of the superior knowledge and hap- piness of the Elohim ; and this might naturally become an object of desire. But to ' know good and evil,' in the sense explained in No. IX. V. 17, was of course no allurement to eat the forbidden fruit. Truly insidious was the suggestion here. — O^ribNS , stands for B'^ribp (119. c. 1) ; and for Seghol under 3, see 152. 6. 1. (6) Nnni_, Var conversive ; N-jn , apoc. Fut. Kal of ^iijn , 283. y. letter 6. — SniNW , a pleasant thing, an olgect of desire, Dec. X.— lahs.. Part. Niph. 225; Fut. in -dus, 529.— i'Sorj}; , Inf. Hiph., retaining the n , 216. 3— hpm , 3 fem. Fut. of nj^b ,'with 1 conversive. — i'3J"3 fem. plur. Fut. Niph., with Vav.— IS"!;",] , Kal Fut. of Si;;, 244. a; for Methegh, 87. c— Cl?iin;y, Dec. VIII., plur. of n'T^i;, Hholem goes into Ctibbuts when the syllable is shortened, 129. c. b ; the Yodh in the ultimate is omitted in the writing, 65.— an, they teere,469.—t:\s, const, state of nl;», Dec. I'ART 11. NOTES ON NO. XI. XII. Get). 3: 8 — 10. 1 1 1 IX. — rinah , plur. of Dec. X. ; for omission of the two Vavs (niniah), see 65. The sentiment plainly is, that after they had eaten the forbid- den fruit, they were filled with a sense of shame. It is not im- probable, so far as can be gathered from the narration here, that they had been stimulated by the fruit to excessive sensual grati- fication ; the consequence of which was, the sense of shame here attributed to them. No. XII. Gen. III. 8—19. (8) bip , either voice or noise, i. e. noise of approach, which they heard either with the outward ear, (and this is certainly a possi- ble case); or with the inward one, which seems as probable, and perhaps more so. The reality of the divine summons and sen- tence, does not depend on the particular manner in which God manifested himself, or communicated them. — '^V.^il'? > sing, num- ber, agreeing with liiM"' , or (if it be preferred) with d'^nb'N , 437. 2. — 132, for"l;ii3, 153. a. Note. — i3l"i^) during the breeze or wind, i. e. towards evening, when the wind rises in the warm ori- ental countries. — Bi'fi , prob. of the same day in which they had transgressed. — Nshn^l , 187. c. 1 ; also 493. 6. Meaning ;' ' They withdrew from the expected approach of Jehovah ; or, ' they endeavoured, through fear, to secrete themselves, because they were conscious of guilt.' (9) fl3?.N , compound of ""N , which shortened becomes ^N , (like Tseri final in nouns of Dec. V.) ; fi3_ is a verbal suffix with epenthetic ) (see under 309. d) ; "'N belongs to Dec. VIII. as to doubling its final radical when it receives accession. For adverbs with verbal suffixes, see 405 ; the Ii3 is ^ with In paragogic, 309. a. 2d pers. sing. masc. in the paradigm. (10) ^Vpj Methegh 87. c— Nn'^NT , 1st pers. sing. Fut. Kal, fromNn"', 244.6; for final Q,amets, see 277. c. The ultimate retains the tone here, notwithstanding the Vav prefixed, 101. b. Note 2. a. The Vav in this case has a damets, because N re- jects the Dagh. forte, 112; Methegh after 1^, 87. «.— QS'^s; , Dec. VIII.— ''33t} , 469. — N^hNI, 1 as in N';''4«X above; WhN, Fut. 1 12 NOTES ON NO. XII. Gen. 3: 11 — 15. part ii. Niph. with Dagh. forte excluded from n , 111 ; the sense is rtfiexr ive, like Nainn;| Hithp. in v. 8. above, 182. 6. 3, comp. 187. c. 1. (11) T^n, Praet. Hiph. of -]», 252 seq. — rtfiN , in pause, 144. — I'Q'n. , ri is the interrogative, like the Latin ne ? — '!jTi"'^a , Piel. ofrtia, with suffix, 286. 1. — "'l^blab , adv. here, compound- ed of n^a , nothing, nothingness, Is prep., and "^ paragogic. — bSN , IX^khol, short O 89, Inf of IrSJ*. Lit. respecting the nothing of the eating of it, i. e. respecting the not eating of it, the omitting to eat of it. bSN is the Gen. after "'nbsb , which is constructed as a noun here, 520. — nbiN , in pause, 144. (12) nftn: , for wni , 254. c. Note. The n is paragogic, 211. a. 2. — '''172S , prep. ^mS i. q. t3S , but it is employed only with the suffix ■•_ .— Nin , hi, 165. /; emphatic here, 467. — ''>-ri;n3 , 75. a.— bSi*! , 1 , see on v. 10 ; bS5« for biS^N , 241. a. 1. (13) rrfN"^, for fTfN^|i^, 152. a. Note.— nj^t-iia , 75. a.— n"'iSJ> , sec. pers. fem. of nto .— ■^aNiA^ri , Hiph. of N'ijj , with sufT. (14) I D'^rtiN, followed by Pesiq, 93. No. 20.— 'n=ni{, Part. passive. — bsa, a comparative.— Tjih-I , suff. state of p"na, Dec. IIL— ^ijn, 244. a.— "'a^, const, of D'^iq; .— ^•';;.h , suff. state of (15) na-'N.,for fiar.N, 118; followed by Pesiq, 93. No. 20.— rT'aJN , Fut. Kal. of rT'ttJ , 274. 2.— ^eTi; , Fut. Kal of f\W , the Clamets under '^ being dropped, 133 ; lit. hruisc, crush thee. — Xiin, as to the head, Ace. of manner, 428./. — ISD^aJn , strike, smite, Tav Daghesh'd, 79.3; with epenth. suffix, 309. d; Qamets dropped under Tav, 133.— ajJS , as to the heel, 428./, Dec. V. ' But how can the tempter here be imagined to be an evil spirit ? What is going upon his belly ? Who ai-e his seed ? And how is the Seed of the woman to bruise his head, or he to strike the hed of her Seed ?' Questions which have been repeatedly asked, with a seeming assurance that no satisfactory answer can be given by those who be- lieve that the wi-iter means, in this nai-ration, to describe the machina- tions of an evil spirit. yo these questions, however, we may answer ; (1) That the fig- urative language- respecting the serpent, is merely carried through in PART n. NOTES ON NO. xu. Gen. 3: 16. 113 consistency with itself; (and this is in accordance with the demands made by the common rules of rhetoric, in respect to metaphorical language). (2) The seed of Hie serpent or the children of the devil, waa a common expression among the Jews, to designate those who were like him in the temper of their minds ; John 8: 44. 1 John 3: 8, 10. Matt. 13: 38. Acts 13: 10. In Gen. 3: 15, the enmity between those who resemble the tempter in character, and those of an opposite disposition, appears to be designated. But, (3) If by the seed of the woman be here meant, ' He who was born of a woman, and made under the law' (Gal. 4: 4), then does the whole passage acquire an emphatic meaning, which it is easy to understand. It is this, viz ; that there should be enmity between the prince of darkness with all who resemble him, and the Messiah ; and perhaps also, that the lat- ter should oppose and crush the former, while all which the former could achieve, would amount to but little. The whole may be com- pared with the crushing of a serpent's head on one part, and the re- ceiving of a wound from it in the heel on the other.^But, as the New Testament writers have no where expressly given this interpi-etation to the passage in question, and we are not directly authorized to make such an interpretation of if, I must, on the whole, acquiesce in the general idea, here designated by the particular imagerythat is employ- ed. From the whole I wouJd deduce the sentiment, that the serpent or evil spirit, instead of gaining a complete victoi-y over our first pa- rents (as he designed to do), should experience disappointment, and be himself crushed as it were with mortal wounds, (see Rom. 16: SO); while he should inflict only less deadly or fatal ones, on those whom he maligns. The manner in which this was to be accomplished, does not seem to be definitely pointed out by the words in question. As to the expressions, going upon his belly and eating dust, what are these but a tropical manner of designating the humiliation of the tempter? A humiliation yet to be more generally and completely manifested, than it ever has hitherto been. (16) nann , Inf. abs. sui generis, 287. 3. and 514. a.— ^Diasy, with fem. suff., Dec. III. e, and 352. 1.— Iphn, Dec. I., as the Tseri is impure; for the idiom, see 569.— ■'ibn , 244. a. — '7U5"'N, with fem. suff., ••1J"'N , vir, man, husband. — "(riJIcn, rendered by the lexicons, desire, sexual passion or affection ; but how does this agree with the sequel ? The Sept. (Alexandrine) renders it umat^oif^, conversio, viz. attitude of obedience, (comp. Ps. 123: 2) ; and Aben Ezra explains it by "jn?a'.2;a , thi/ obedience ; which accords well with the context, and may be easily derived from pViT, to run about after any thing, which is characteristic of a state of subjec- 15 114 NOTES ON NO. XII. Gen. 3: 16 — 19. parth, tion. As to the meaning sexual desire, how is this possible in Gen. 4: 7, where is it said of Abel (or of sin), that ' his (its) desire (in;?vrpi) should be unto Cain V—hvia-] , 89. (17) nsaa, tone on the penult, but accent (Zarqa) on the ul- timate, because it is postpositive, 93. No. 13, also 95. a. — ^T[Wi< , with tone on the penult, which changes the Sheva that would re- gularly be under the Fi (see in Dec. XIII. e) into a Seghol, 148. a, (without a penult tone the word would be read, '^PhUn); but the accent (Segholta) is placed on the ultimate, merely because it is postpositive, 93. No. 8. The student may see for himself, in the frequent instances of this nature, how uncertain a guide the accents would te, in finding the real tone of many words ; 95. — Ti'N n'in''^lZ, [in regard to] which (428. 3) I gave thee commandment. Of the two accents (it is the same accent repeated) here, on the verb, the former marks the penult tone, 95. b. — "ibNb, 119. c. I. — WTaa , see in No. XI. v. 3. — ri-|=i-|N , fem. of "li-iN , 323 in Par. No. III. — "rin^a?:.? , compound of 2 prep., 113?. properly a noun, but used as a prep., 407. a; '^— suff. with pause accent (Zaqeph Gadhol, 93. No. 7) on the penult, which turns the regular Sheva into Seghol, 148. a. — r;3b;b65"i , masc. noun S"! , fem. fisi instead of fisn , 32 and 58.— yiNS, for Vl.ijf^a , 152. a. Note.— "!::'■:. with double accent, 95. 6. — niaatia , const, plur. of t^ai^tia , Dec. XI. — 'izb , from ab . — S'^ p"! , only evil; S^ may be taken as a noun here, or as an adj. agreeing with l'^^,, the sense being the same in either case. — Di'ri~b3 , lit. every day ; but the Hebrews express- ed the idea of semper, per omne vitae tempus, okijv Ttjv i^/xtgav, by the use of this phrase. In English we may say, continually, tcith- out intermission, always. (6) dn:'.!, Niph. Fut., with accent retracted and final Tseri shortened, 101. 6, and 129. a.—Ti'as, Pluperf. 503. 6.— y-jisa, as in v. 5. — astSn"! , Hith. Fut., the tone is not retracted here, be- cause the penult syllable is not simple, 101. 6. in e. g. God is here spoken of in a manner altogether av&QoinoTca&wg. But this is 116 NOTES ON NO. xui. XIV. Geo. 6:7, 13- — 14. part ii. nothing strange ; for the same thing may be said of very many ex- pressions, in all parts of the Old Testament and of the New. (7) nhaj* , Fut. Kal. 1 pers. sing, of fiha ; »8f. not m , be- cause of the Guttural N , comp. in 138. — "'nx'na , 95. b. — ^JJB , 407./. — tJ'TNa, i.e. D'lN ]J3 , 406, from man, viz. 'beginning from man or with man, I will destroy nana-l? , unto beast, unto reptile,' etc. i. e. destruction shall extend from man unto beast, etc. — B^aiSn, in pause. — "iriah: , Piel, with Dagh. Hhireq under the 3, 232. 6.— Dn-'ipy, with Yodh omitted after the n,211. 6, and 63. No. XIV. Gen. VI. 13—22. (13) 7)7. , Dec. VII., const, state. — '»:Bb, suff. state of )3"<;B used as a prep. here. Meaning : ' I have determined that all flesh shall come to an end, be destroyed.' — V"^Ntt and Dan both in the Ace. governed by ntjb a , 511 and 509. e. g.— D--':sa , by them, the original sense of ^'.B being lost, and the compound word be- coming a mere preposition. — '':;n, with Dagh. forte omitted in the first 3, 73. Note 3, from iipn; it takes a verbal suffix, 410. Note, comp. 313.— Sn-'littJa , Part. IJiph. with suff. D_ , used as a Fut. in -ras, 529. — riN , on or in ; so this prep, clearly means in 1 K. 9: 25. Ps. 67: 2 (comp. Ps. 31: 17), 1 Sam. 7: 16. ' On or in a place, where something is done or happens,' is a sense which Gesenius assigns to it in his lexicon. If however yiN be taken here for what it contains, viz. animals, vegetation, etc., then there will be no need of this peculiar sense of riN , but rrihaa may be understood before it, and we may translate, / toill destroy them, [and I will destroy] the earth. So the Seventy, Onkelos, Aben Ezra, and others ; but the Syriac Version has k^^l ^5,:^ , on the earth. (14)ntoy, Imp. Kal.— nnri, const, of Dec. X., with penult vowel immutable, as it involves an implied Quiescent ; which ap- pears in the Chaldee form Nn-iap) , and also in the Arabic— ''ay , const, plur. of ■y^.—nsp.j, a «jr«t liy^iAii'^v, probably (from its similarity to "isb , pitth, tar, and from the nature ©f the case here) turp,',ntine-tree, pitch-tree; perhaps a species of tlw fir, or of the ce- PART II. NOTES ON NO. XIV. Gen. 6: 15 — 16. 117 dar. — B''3p , nidos, small cells, Aahitacula divisa, like the nestling places for doves, in which each of the animals was to be included. It is the Ace. of manner here, 428. — mcsi , Fut. sense. 209. — nnk , 408. nN of the Ace. — y=ihB , a with Daghesh'd Hhireq, 58, — nSiD3 , for "i^bns , 152 a. Note. (15) 'rtT\\f. — nTT , and this [is] what thou shall make it, i. e. and thus shalt thou make it. — ■wbuj , const, state, 457. a. — niNSl, 461. — fil2ii , sing. 461 . — "i "1.H , before it il^n"; (shall be) is implied, 554. — n728< n-iaan , 459.— nann , suff. of :jh'i .— nsN n'^ujiuj , 459. — nnaip , sufF. state of iiHip , Dec. X. (16) "ifiS, light, opening for the light, window; probably a generic noun here. Some translate it covering ; but without the support of the usus loquendi. — nanb , for Jiannb . — ii73N~VN , to, even to, unto, a cubit; i. e. a cubit in dimension shalt thou make it. But the expression is very obscure, and this may not be the mean- ing. If it is not, however, I am ignorant of it. — r!S]i;5n , Piel Fut. 2d pers. from rtlrS , with epenth. suffix, 309. d; the suff. is fem., which of course indicates, that ~inS , to which it relates, is of the fem. or comra. gender, 321. — n^sfn^tt , Dagh. omitted in b, 73. Note 3 ; lit. in respect to height, or on, in, the upper part, viz. of the ark ; for the word is susceptible of either sense. Which was the one designed by the writer, it would be difficult indeed now to determine. Schultens and Rosenmueller suppose, that n~':i means the deck or covering of the ark (like the Arabic a23 dorsum), and that direction is here given to elevate this deck one cubit in the middle part in order that it might easily throw off the water which would fall upon it. But how this can be drawn from the expressions in our text, I am not aware. — tin3T , and a door; which renders more probable the exegesis given to ins above. — ^12 , from 12 , Par. of Dec. VIII. c. All the forms of it with increase at the end, take short Hhireq under the Tsadhe, in- stead of the Pattahh in the ground-form ; see 376. 2.— t)"'tJF! , Fut. Kal from Dito, 274. 2.— D'nhn, for n-"nnn, 63; Dec. VIII., comp. 325. e. g. 2 ; lit. lower, i. e. the lower tier of apartments. — fi'J'iU form the same as in ti'Fitin, lit. second, i.e. the second or middle tier of apartments.— n'-iiViJ . Dec. I. from "•©"'Va, but not 118 NOTES ON NO. XIV. XV. Gen. 6: 17, ETC. part ii. (like the others) doubling its last letter in the plural ; comp. 325. e. g. 2. — Mton, fi_ suff. 309. c; see also 313. (17) IjNI , 1 152. c. 1 ; for the expression of the pronoun here, see 527. a. — '•'i^T] , see on v. 13 above. — N'^aa , Hiph. Part, in Par. XX.— ntiiab , inf Piel, 522.— la-T^iN , in which, 478. «■— Sis: , in pause, with regular medial 1 ; see in 271. 6. (18) TifcipttT, for "nia'^pn, see 65; Fut. sense 209, being connected to preceding verbs or participles with a Fut. sense — ^nN , in pause, 408 under ns Ace. — riNSI , Par. XX., Fut. sense 209. (19) "'hii, rj article having Q.amets here before h, contrary to the usual custom, see 152. a. 3. — Sf^aFi , cause to go in, intro- duce.— ri-nrib , for ni'^n^ib , 63, Inf Hiph. of n;n , lit. for the pre- serving of life.. — IT?"; , Methegh, 87. d. (20) FiiJ>na , a prep.; n art. 152. a. 2.— ^iij-ab , ITi- suff. 336. b. — '^■'bN , prep, hii in the form of a noun plural 407. b, i. e. with such a suffix attached to it as nouns plural receive, viz. '^■'_ . — ni"'n!nb , see in v. 19, written ^Zene here. (21) hp, Imp. of npb .— bSN';. , Methegh, 87. e; lit. which should be eaten, 504. i. — FlBDNi , Fut. sense, 209. — il^fni , the same. — finb , 408. b . — MbSNb , Dat. after ii;rT to become, which is the usual construction, 507. b. (22) v:si2 , apoc. Fut. Kal, 283. y. — rtiiss 'j3 , so did he, a rep- etition of the preceding assertion, which increases the intensity of it, (comp. 438. d) ; it being as much as to say : ' Noah did exactly according to all which God had commanded him.' No. XV. Gen. VII. 7—24. (7) ''iB'a , from, from before, compounded of ti^^B and 'jW, 407. c. (8) 'jM , of, out of, a partitive prep, signifying apart ot portion o/l— nnina?], art. 414. 1.— n^rN, ■;■;!< with verbal suff. M3^ , which suffix (with the preceding TiJN 478) makes the relative which, while 'j''ij makes the negative verb, is not. — na'lN!! , with Soph Pasuq after it, 93. No. I ; wrongly inserted here, for plainly the sentence is not completed ; comp. 96. PART. II. NOTES ON NO. XV. Gen. 7:10 — 19. 119 (10) n?=ia^ , const, state of ni-^'IJ , 457. a ; lit. after a heptade. of days.— •'m , =1 that ; ^a , const, of C]?: . (11) niNa aiia n:\^3, lit. in the year of six hundred, idl ; n:a , const, of nr^U , Dec. XI. — n:ia , i. e. r^yxz , a prep, being implied 559.— ijn5: , b as a sign of the Gen., 421. g ; i.e. the years which had respect to the life of Noah, which were computed by Noah's age.— ■i'lha , foriu-inns .-"':■>»" , the second [month], i. e. November ; for before the Israelites left Egypt, they began their year with October, called Tisri.— "itos-ni-s^ja, see in Par. XXVIII, B. No. 17 ; see also 458.- lanhb , for la'inr;^ ; used as a Gen. here, 421. g. — il^ri fiva, on the very same day, fii'a for nVna. — 'T'^!^;'? I const, fem. form, plur. of ■j^Sa , Dec. II. The present plur. is as those of Dec. XI. ; see 327. 2.— nanN , plur. of Dec. X. — =ihn5:;, 146. (12)DVa-iN, 459. (13) &S£S , self-same, lit. bone, substance, body ; applied to things, not to persons, 475. 2. d. — nilJb'iJ , const, state, 457. a. (14) P|:3-i'3, lit. of every wing, or every winged creature, li we construe is as being in apposition with 11322 . — nann-^N , into the arlc. (15) tii5ir D^a'a , 438. 6.— I'a-liaN , 478. a. (16) n?3 , I?? prep., behind, after, 506. c. (17) :iNiu''_i , for 1N'i;«l , 73. Note 3, Fut. Kal of Nijj: .— tJ'nPi , vat-tSrrom, 208. Note 2, Fut. Kal of Dan .— bsa , 407'./. (18) '•^r^ , 208. Note 2, Fut. fem. from ^jb;; . (19) Ito niia, 456. a.— las^i, Pual. Fut. of riDS; 1 without Dagh. after it, 208, in e. g. — 13''1^.(-!, instead of d-'-inn , 142. a. — D';aiin-b3 nnn -I'^is , i. e. over all the earth. That the writer here means to express the idea of universality, is clear. The evidences of this fact are now multiplying, in conse- quence of the progress of geological science. A multitude of phe- nomena are found to exist, which can be accounted for in no way, so probably and so easily, as by the supposition of a deluge such as is here declared to have existed. The student, who is desh-ous of pursuing the very interesting subject here introduced, may find notices pf tradition among heath- en nations respecting the flood, in Josephus, Antiqq. I. Cap. 4. edit. Colon. ; Eusebius, Praep. Evangelica, IX. 12 ; Ovidii Metamorph. I. 270, seq. Grotius, de Veritate, I. % 16 in the note. StiUingfleet, Origg. 120 NOTES ON NO. XV. Gen. 7: 20 — 24. pakt ir. Sac. III. 14. § 8 ; also in Faber's Horae Mosaicae, and Bryant's My- thology. Those who wish to see the subject geologically ti-eated, are referred to Buckland's Reliquiae Diluvianae, and the works there cited. (20) iTBX rtltoS "iJatt, 460. — rtsbta, with tone on the pe- nult, (the same in No. 14 v. 16) ; the !i_ therefore is local, 100. i, and the ground form is bytt , an apoc. form of nbs'q , the letters b'tt (^b ]a ) being a compound preposition, 407./. — ^ID?'] , see in v. 19. (21)^15^1, Vav regular, 271. b. — ]qiJ-3 for flisna, !i)3?J2a for nana-a , rrUz for rt^h-a , 152. a. Note. For the use of the article here see 412, b ; and so for the words which follow. (22) VENa T.ax , in whose nostrils, 478. — &''■'. h tin naiaa , lit. the breath of the spirit of life, i. e. life by animate breathing. — hyo , a ('ja), belonging to, consisting of, viz. all belonging to the animals living upon dry land. — t^S■^ha (for nanhrja), Dec. XI. The Q,amets under tl is immutable, as the form is a substitute for !ia'nh,58. For Seghol under a, see 142. a. — ina, with final Tseri, from nna , 270. a. 1, see in Par. XIII. (23) hja^l , (as the form is) belongs to apoc. Fut. Niph., for ^1(173^] , from -rta; h7?^i because of the Guttural n 11.3, instead of ha^T the regular apoc. form independently of the Guttural, 285, 3.— Dip^lri-lra-nN , Nom, case, 427. Note 2. For the omis- sion of Dagh. after the art. n , in Dip'^rr , see 152. a. 5. — The bet- ter text of the above phrase reads hO'T. , without Dagh. forte in a, and in the apoc. Fut. Kal ; if we adopt this reading, nin^ or ;i27art will be the Nom. implied, and Dnp^n-ba-nN will be iii the Ace. governed by ttiy'i . This is the preferable method of ex- plaining the phrase. ■^'9~.7~''? '°'^'S'3 . lit- fi'om man to beast, i. e. including both man and beast; and so of the rest which follow. — iha^T , Fut. Niph.— -iNSi'l , penult tone, Fut. Niph. 101. 6.— nana, for nan-2 , Beth with Dagh. lene, 79. 3. (24) DNa , const, of rtJja , Dec. XI., 461. PART II. NOTES ON NO. XVI. Gen. 8: 1 — 4. 121 The objection made against the possibility of a deluge which would cover the highest mountains, and be universal, is, that ' there is not suiRcient provision in the constitution of the atmosphere, or of the world, for sueh an occuiT^ce ; as such a quantity of water could in no way be generated.' The answer is, that though natural causes may not account for such an occurrence, the God who made the world, could deluge it with the waters of the ocean. According- ly in V. 11 above, it is said, that ' the fountains of the aiinpi , the great deep, the ocean, were opened [ispa:] ,' as well as ' the windows of heaven;' i. e. the ocean overflowed,' while the rain descended in vast quantities. That the occurrence, after all, was of a miraculous na- ture, I should not wish to deny. And considering it in this point of view, it is easy to see, that the cause can never be shewn to be inad- equate to produce the effect. We may believe the truth, of the nar- ration, on the authority of Moses, and because the globe now exhibits striking proofs that an event like the one in question has happened. Who wall shew us valid reasons for disbelieving the whole account, or for explaining it as a mere [ivd^og ? No. XVI. Gen. VIII. 1—20. (1) "15^^!] , apoc. Fut. Hiphil.— hm, wind, the literal and pri- mary sense of the word. — ^Sffi^n , Fut. Kal of ^sia . (2) ri:7sa,No. XV. v. IL (3) 13"J3';2, Fut. Kal of aiTU; for IB , see 41. — i'S'q, from on, from off, 4:07. f. — aviJT ^iVln, Inf. abs.,514. c; continually reced- ing, viz. into the Ci-R. — llpfrT, 225. — n:£pa , Dagh. omitted in p , 73. Note 3 ; nit)? const, of JiSSj: , Dec. IX.— riNtt , in No. XV. V. 24. (4) mni , 3 fem. apoc. Fut. of ni: ,270. 3, Fut. apoc— 'Bi'ina , for lannna . — Di"'as following riNH , see in 461.— ujnnb , Gen., 421. g. — ■'"nn , const, plur. of Irt , used in the same sense as the sing, number, 437. 3. — DTiN, Ararat, which still bears the same name. ' The tradition that the m-k of Noah lodged here, when the wa- ters of the flood subsided, is confirmed,' (says Rosenmueller, Al- terth. I. 257), ' by the most weighty testimony of antiquity, and is one of the oldest which has reached us.' The Persians in the neigh- borhood call it Kuhi Nuahh, mountain of JVbah. It is one of the loftiest mountains in all the eastern world, rising from a plain in Armenia, not fai- from Erivan its capital, and elevating its summit above the region of snow to that of eternal ice, which glitters fear- ftiUy under the burning sun of summer. The magnitude of the peak is constantly increasing, in consequence of the continual accession, of 16 122 NOTES ON NO. XVI. Gen. 8: 5 — 13. part ii. ice. No one has ever ascended it ; and its steepness, v^ith the ice upon its summit, renders ascent impossible. The fact that the ark of Noah rested here, favours the conclusion virhich was made above, that the original location of man vs^as in the region of Armenia. (5) "lioni ^ibri , Inf. abs., 514. 2.— i^itosz , on the tenth,, viz. month.— Ihi?. , 465.— 1J<-)2 , Niph. of rtijn . (6) yjja , after the close. — ]i^ll, probably the same as "link in No. XIV. V. 16.— ntos , Pluperf. 503. 6.— SiuJl ^1:2; Na;;! , and it went forth, going and returning, 514. 2, i. e. it continued to go out and return, until etc. — fTJii'; , fern. Inf. of 1235'' , 247. h. (8) !iDi'ri-nN , see the use of DN with the Ace. and article, 427. Note 1. a. For the use of the article n in this case, see 412. d. Note 2.— -inNtt , \ii. from with, 407./.— ni^-i^; , 522.— iiVj^n , n in- terrog. ; ^Vj? , Praet. Kal. of bbjJ . (9) flijaa , 3 pers. fem., for Methegh see 66 in e. g., also 87. e. — hT;a , Dec. III. — i'l^ni , vdt-td-shdbh, short O, apoc. Fut. fem. of STilJ , with tone retracted and final syllable shortened, 208. Note 2. — ^hj^'.T , Fut. of hg!? , with Vav conversive, and with sufT. Ji_ , 309. c For the form nj^^ , see in 312. 5. (10) bh^l, apoc. Fut. Hiph. of bm, with tone retracted, and final vowel shortened, 208. Note 2. — nsS'iJ , 457. a. — ti"'-ihN, ir- reg. plur. of IhN , which has a Pattahh Daghesh'd 58, and there- fore immutable. Theplur. t:"'-inN must therefore derive its form from -ihN .— SlD'i , apoc. Fut. Hiph. of qa;' , with tone retracted and vowel shortened, 208. Note 2.— nVa f\tr2 , lit. and he added to send, i. e. he sent again, 533. (11) ™^ ) «!< t^c season, so b before a noun indicating time often signifies.— M^y , const, of r^s , Dec. IX.— ^l^B , fresh, 'recent, ver- dant. — lVj5 , see on v. 8. (12) Vh; ?2 , peculiar Fut. Niph. of tlr , 247. e. 1. ^^V nDO"' 533. (13) nhN (for nnhN , 107. 2), fem. agreeing with inrij implied. The phrase without any ellipsis, would be thus ; In the first [year] and the six hundredth year. — mxr!-jj-.;j , viz. of the life of Noah ; comp. Gen. 7: 11.— ifiiN-i (for jldNn 118), on the first, viz. day, 551 under e. g.— ID^i , Fut._apoc. Hiph. of 11D ; for Pattahh PART II. NOTES ON NO. XVI. Gen. 6: 13 — 20. 123 under D , see 270. c. 3, Fut. apoc. with Guttural.— r;D::J:-nt< , DN without the article expressed, seemingly contrary to 427. Note 1. a; but not in reality so, for the article is here implied, see 413. 2. — ^1!] > see on Gen. 1: 3. — "'.:b , const, plur. used for singular, be- cause it has no sing. form. (14) ni-itoyi fii'S-is, 460. (16) NS , Imp, of NS; , 244. a. (17) fli:»3 for P|iyn2 and so of the nouns that follow. — toaSn , rt as a pronoun, 412, Note 1.— NS":n , Imp. Hiph. of Ni:^ , 247, g. 2. The reference (*) is to a Masoretio reading at the bottom of the page, viz, Nil'^n , i, e. NS?" , instead of the usual N:^in . — la-j'iT , made Fut. by "i after an Imperative, 201. Note ; so also, =]"1S!1 , na-l'i , which follow. (19) nn."'nn3"i!ab , suff, plur. of rnhB\aa , Dec, XI. g. (20) •ja^] , apoc. Fut, of n:a , 283, y.— haja , Dec, VII. d.— bs'i, 283. y. g.— ribj* (nibiy 65) plur, of nMs', — I32.T732, for hsTrana - That the whole narration respectmg the deluge has been re- garded, and is still considered, by many critics, as a stoiy which is partly fiv&oi and partly fact, need scarcely be said, after the details which have been exhibited above respecting opinions relative to the creation of the world, and the original condition of man. That a partial inundation, probably an extensive one, over some one of the widely extended plains of the East, very anciently took place, is gen- erally conceded. The extent which our author assigns to it, is re- garded as a fictitious supplement to the story made by tradition, or as resulting from the mistaken views of the writer hunself. That diffi- culties can be easily suggested, relative to an occurrence of this nature, no one will deny ; but that the event was impossible, or even improb- able, (considering the evidence of it afforded by the present condition of our globe), cannot in any way be made out. As to all the questions which can be raised, relative to the fomi of the ark, the possibility of immuring in it all the various Wnds of animals which water would destroy, and of supporting them there for so long a time ; it is plain that they must be matters of specula- tion merely. In regard to the beasts going into the ark, it is evident that the whole occurrence is regarded by our author as a mu-aoulous one • andadmittmg the truth of this, there is an adequate reason or cau^ for all the occurrences which took place. The vast quantities of relics, belonging to anunals of the tropical regions, which are now found in high northern latitudes, shew that some mighty engine of destruction, like that of the deluge, must have sometime been in ope- 124 NOTES ON NO. XVII. Geti. 11: J — 3. part ii. ration ; and the removal to so great a distapce, of animals that are in- digenous to the southern climate, shews that the agent must have been a water-flood. We may, therefore, believe the account of Moses ; at least we may do it, until something more probable, and better authen- ticated, shall be substituted for it. And this is not an event which is likely to happen. No. XVII. Gen. XI. 1—9. (1) rtftiB, lit. lip, but here signifying language; as in la. 19. 18. 33: 19. Zeph. 3:9. Ps. 81: 6.— nht?. , (instead of nhit); the pause-accent changes the Pattahh under n into damets 144, and then this occasions the preceding Pattahh to pecorae Seghol, 142. a. — d'^'ihN , plur. of 1ht< (for 'ihN, 142. a), and used as plural merely for the sake of agreement with a plur. noun which it quali- fies. The sentiment here plainly is, that all the earth (or all the land) spoke one and the same language. The repetition of the ide^, by adding ti'^ThN fi'^"lS'^ , is designed to express as much as to say, ' exactly the same language,' 438. d, and Note. Vitringa and others construe nhN rts*l5 , as meaning ' unity of purpose or design;' but Perizonius (Origines Babyhnicae Cap. IX.) has sufficiently refuted all such interpretations. (2) asDDS , Inf of i>D3 , with suff. D_ , see in Par. XXII. ; when they removed, 521. a. — DHBa , either eastward, or from the east. The word may mean either ; and there is nothing in the context which will certainly determine. Ararat in Armenia, where the ark lodged, lies north of the country of Babylon ; but as the original settlers of the eastern countries were wandering shepherds (Nomades), it is impossible to say which way the great body of them had travelled, before they came to the plains of Shi- nar. — Wp3, Dec. XII., properly a valley, intervale; but also a loio plain, as in Syriac and Arabic. — 'i^'pl2 > with accent on the penult, 101. d, from SiB^ . (3) ^n»n-bN ia"'N , lit. man to his companion, i. e. each to the other, or to one another ; Irtsn , from S"! , and (according to the PABTiT. NOTES ON NO. XVII. Gen. 11:3 — 6. 125 Lex. of Gesenius) standing for in""?;"! , which is the plural suff. form of S"i . But this solution does not appear satisfactory ; because, (1) The suffix W'_ , appended to the plural, belongs to poetry, (2) The noun nsn (Dec. IX) has the same meaning as an , and will regularly make the form iny'l , in the singular; see 336. Note 4. The Tseri of the ground-form is immutable. — fi3vj> Imp. parag. of an^ , with accent ( Yethibh) on the penult, but tone on the ultimate 100. h, the accent being praepositive. The Imp. without parag. ri— , is ari . It is used as a kind of interjection here, like age, agedum. — M33b: , I pers. plur. Fut. Kal of ]ab , with n_ paragogic, 205. — Q'':ab , fem. gender, with a fera. singular n;ab , 322. The two words together must be rendered : Let us make brick; a literal translation in Latin would be : Laterificemus lateres. — risnto; , Fut. parag. as above. — MDnil'b , Dec. X., the Tseri being impure , lit. to a brand or mth a burning, i. e. let us burn them thorough- ly. — 'j2Nb , the asterisk refers to a note at the bottom, ti yap , i. e. Qamets with Zaqeph, marking the effect of this accent in prolong- ing the Seghol in the word ■jSi* , 144. comp. 149. — 'itth'^l, ) where the first accent (Munahh) stands in the place of a Methegh, 87. Note 3. The bitumen, which is designated by this word, is com- mon in all the plain of the Euphrates, and floats on the surface of water standing in small ponds, marshes, etc. It makes a mortar, which in time becomes harder than the brick itself, and seems to be imperishable. — Itthb , for "nHhrib . (4) n:.a3 , 1 plur, Fut. Kal.— i:b , Dagh. in Lamedh, 75. a.— D''aaa , Beth Raphe 80 ; meaning : ' Whose top shall be exceed- ingly elevated.' — lib-fi'iJ?.? , the like forms as in i:b-n;55. — yiD3 , 1 pers. plur. Fut. Kal of yis, lest we scatter ourselves, or be scattered, 181. Note. 2. (5) T^.Xl, fromi-i;, 208. Note 2.— nKnb , 63.— \33, with the tone on the ultimate, as a verb ; but «3 would be a compound word, made up of a prep, and a pronoun, and signifying with us. In such cases, the accents not unfrequently answer a good purpose. (6) Db)?b , b3 with suff. n_ .— Sbhn , Q- suflF. pronoun ; bhn , Inf. Hiph.' of bbn ; regularly it would be bnri , but the final Tseri is shortened on account of the tone being thrown forward upon the 126 NOTES ON NO. XVII. Geti. 11: 6 — 9. part ii. suffix 129. a, while the fi takes a Pattahh ; which last circumstance is contrary to analogy, for this would make the form to be tiShn; see 133. a. As to the Daghesh in b , see 258.— ni t>^-"; cVnn nn , and this is their commencing to operate, or tlie commencing of their operation. — CriTJ 1^3^ Nb , there shall not he cut off from them, i. e. one shall not hinder, 500. a. — "if N Y3 , all which. Both phrases together mean : ' They will not be restrained as to all which etc' —W!" , from tl>2T , 266. (7) nn-i; , parag. Fut. 1 pars. plur. of TiV For the use of the plural number, see on Gen. 1: 26 above. — rrVsj, the like form from b'ra, 266. — nsip, plainly meaning language. — Irti'.^, see on this form, in v. 3. above. (8) yo'i , apoc. Fut. Hiph.of yiB, with retracted tone. — ■n:'2h , 63. (9) baa , for tone, see 141. Note 2. The word is probably a contraction, from b?.b2 , confusion, or to confound. — fi^''2\][ , Hiph. Praet. of yis , with suff. fi- ; for the dropping of Tseri under the n , see 133. a. It has been a very general opinion in times past, that the origin of diverse languages among men is to be found in the occurrence re- lated above. But facts seem strongly to militate against this as a prin- cipal cause. From the earliest times, down to the present hour, hith- er Asia has almost all spoken a language which is radically the same. Wherever Abraham travelled, he understood the languge of the peo- ple with whom he met. We may then with great pi'obabiUty sup- pose, that the confusion here mentioned was but temporary in effects, continuing only until the purpose for which it was designed had been accomplished, viz. the scattering abroad, so as to people different countries, those who intended to cluster in one great city. It was thus that Providence made provision for the peopling of extensive regions; and the design of counteracting this, appeai-s to have been the criminality of the men who purposed to build Babel. Their pride and ambition also, in endeavouring to acquire fame (DO), were offen- sive in the sight of heaven. StUl, as the punishment m this case is comparatively light, their sin does not seem to be treated as of a very heinous character. That the diversity of languages among the whole race of man, can not be charged upon the building of Babel as its direct cause, would hardly seem to require proof. Still, as the occurrences on this occasion gave rise to the separation of men from each other ; and this eventually became the indirect occasion of great diversity in lan- guage ; it is not without some reason, that this diversity is attributed PART II. N0TE3 ON NO. XVIII, Gen. XII. 1 3. 127 to the building of Babel. The diversity of language, as it now exists, is one of the most difficult problems for the philosopher or the divine to solve. No satisfactory theory, in all respects developing an ade- quate and probable cause, has yet, as far as I know, been proposed by any writer, who has speculated on the subject of language. The gift or faculty of speech, may be regarded as natural to men ; as much a part of their nature as intelligence and reason. The pow- er of forming sounds, is, from its very nature, almost boundless in ex- tent and variety. Hence the very different sounds which are adopted as the medium of communication between men. Accident, climate, even the physical power of enunciation, with the passions and affec- tions, all have an influence on the sounds, which are employed as signs of ideas or of feelings. Of course the modification of these is subject, as experience shews, to perpetual change. Let a colony go out from a savage tribe, and remain entirely separate for several cen- turies, and the language of each will be scarcely inteUigible to the other. Still, even cases like these do not account for such radical differ- ences as exist, for example, between the Chinese and the Shemitish languages ; or between the latter and the Scythian or Tartar tongues. A part of this great problem, therefore, still remains without any sat- isfactory solution. No. XVIII. Gen. XII. 1—4. (1) 1^. , Imp. of ^bl , regular form ?[5 , but before Maqqeph ?jb , 89. — 'T^l:-^?. , lit. go for thyself, i.e. go; for the form of expression, see 545. The idiom is frequent in the Shemitish languages. In a similar manner, we say in English, ' Away with yourself.' — '^5?']N , tJiy country. — '^nlbi^aa , from thy native place, put elliptically for Simbia VJC*. thy native land. — yiNrj-^N, to the land. — ^^iJIN, ^^ epenth. suffix, 309. d; MN.nSt , Fut. Hiph. of HN"! , which loses its final syllable and vowel, when it takes a suffix, 313. (2) '^ipyNi , Methegh 87. 6 ; for vowels 326.— ■'lib , 507. 6.— '^SnaNi ," 129. a.— fib'^aNi , with parag, n_ , 205.— '^JM;^ , 148. a. — n"ni , Imp. in form, Fut. Kal in sense, thou shalt he; for Me- thegh, see 87. d; for the use of the Imp. as Future, 205. b. 2. (3) 'Tj'^Dnna , lit. thy blessers. Part. Piel, with plural suffix. — ^Vs.i^a , him who curseth thee, i. e. every one or any one who curs- eth thee, the sing, being used gentrically ; Part. Piel of bbjJ ; as to tone and penult vowel, see 129. a. — nb«N , Fut. Kal of TIN .— iDnasi , Niph. Praet., 209. 128 NOTES ON NO. XVIII. Gen. 12:4. part ii. (4) 'n2"! , Piel, 214. 1. — ]3 etc., lit. the son of 5 years and of 70 years ; the usual method in which the Hebrew describes the age of any person. — inNSa , Inf. fem. with suffix, from SiS^ ^ and nxa is put for nNa , 119. c. 3, also 521. — ]-Mn,from Haran, a town in Mesopotamia. There is a chronological difficulty respecting the departure of Abraham from Haran, to which it may be proper to advert. In Gen. 11: 26, it is said that Terah begat Abraham at the age of 70 ; in Gen. 12: 4, that Abraham left Haran at the age of 75 ; which added together make the age of Terah then to be 145. But in Gen. 11: 32, Terah is said to have hved 205 years ; yet Stephen says (Acts 7: 4), that ' Terah was dead when Abraham left Haran.' But as the Hebrew text now stands in Gen. 11: 32, this emigration of Abraham must have happened 60 years before the death of Terah. The Samaritan Codex, however, reads 145 years, in Gen. 11: 32 ; which exactly agrees with the account of Stephen, and also of Philo Judaeus, who says : TskevTri(Tavjoi; 8e avzw rov naTQog ixuas . ficja- vimcnai, i. e. Abraham left Haran, when his father was dead ; De Migrat. Abram . p. 463. The difficulty can be solved, only by supposing that the Samaritan Codex has preserved the con-ect reading, (which seems to be confii'm- ed by the authority of Stephen and of Philo), and that there is an er- ror in the Hebrew of Gen. 11: 32 ; or, that Stephen merely adopts the mode of reckoning, in regard to the departure of Abraham from Ha- ran, which was customary amomg tihe Jews of that day ; see Kuinoel on Acts 7: 4. The effi)rt of Jarchiand others to solve the difficul- ty, by alleging that Gen. 11: 32 refers only to the moral death of Terah, because he was an idolater, hardty deserves a, serious notice. Was he not morally dead, as an idolater, long before the departure of Abraham .' In regai'd to the nature of the promise here made to Abraham ; it is only general. In v. 2, there is an assurance of a numerous offspring, (' I will make of thee a gi-eat nation') ; of much prosperity, (' I will bless thee') ; and of great renown among the nations, (' I will make thy name great, and thou shalt be a blessing,' i. e. a subject of pi-aise or of blessing). In v. 3 is an assurance, that the friends of the posterity of Abraham shall be regarded with approbation, and their enemies with dislike, (' I will bless them who bless thee, and curse him who curseth thee'). There is a further and general assurance, that in Abraham, (including of course his descendants), all nations should be blessed. I understand this as a prophetic intimation, in very general terms, respecting the Messiah, " who was the son of David, the son of Abraham." In what respect have the descendants of Abraham been a blessing to all nations, or can they be, unless in the one which this interpretation supposes ? Comp. the sentiment of Paul, in Gal. 3: 14—18. Whether Abraham understood the nature or extent of this I'ARTn. NOTES ON NO. XIX. Gen. 15:1 — 6. 129 promise, when it was first made, may be questioned. But it cannot be shewn that he did not ; and perhaps not fully, that he did. Yet the fact, that he left his native country, in consequence of this call from heaven, shews that he had a strong expectation of future bles- sings of some kind or other. No. XIX. Gen. XV. 1—6. (1) 'ihN , followed by the accent Pesiq, which is preceded by Munahh, 93. Nos. 20 and 21. — d'''n5'7n , matters, affairs, transac- tions.— '^'D':^ , 469. — laa , Dec. VIII. h, with impure Qamets.— ^b', in pause 408. b .— na-i^I , 403. d. (2) •'jhN, 437. 2.— 'JFiFi-lna , 75. a; IpR, 89.— ''DbNi , ^ for since. — ^rbirt ,527. a. — p'iJa , a ana^ Xiyoftivov, probably it means I .■ V III possession, and is derived from the obsolete p"iJB=l^MA/o > *" pos- sess. Son of possession means possessor, 444. d; and here pi^a ■]?. ■'n'^a means, possessor of my house, or in other words, my heir. — Nilil, is this, 469. — pifl??.'3=ptoa-!'7 in IChron. 18:5,6; see 107. 1. c. The peculiar word pl?jJ3 , in the first clause, appears evident- ly to have been selected, in order to make a paronomasia with ptoH'7 in the latter clause. This last word here means, a Damas- cener, one belonging to Damascus. (3) nnlnj , with rt parag., 254. c. Note.— "IJ'i'l'' , Fut. in -rus, 529. (4) ''[■iJ'^"'''. , 244. b ; for Clamets, see 130. a. — ^IBN , he who. — 'T'sa , sufF. plur. of nija, with Tseri impure.— Tin""; , 148. a. (5) rrljinn , with art. and In local.— tasrt , Imp. Hiph. of DS; , 89. — 'n.'avyiiTi , with n local, tone on penult 100. i. — bSIFi , Hoph. oftb;, 186.— ^S"]!, 148. a. (6) IHNlril , for T'ONrjl , 63.— n^tr^^ , see Part I. No. 50.— tiattjmi, ri., suff. 309. c— lb , 75. a. For a commentary on this passage, see Rom. IV. throughout. In the second promise here made to Abraham, only a numerous offspring is included. But was this merely a natural oflfepring ; or were they 'children of faith,' who were promised ?— See the opinion of Paul on this subject, Rom. 4: 11, seq. ; paiticularly GaJ. 3: 7, 9, 14—18, 29. Rom. 9: 6—8. Gal. 4: 28—31. Whether Abraham had a clear appre- hension of the spiritual meaning of the promise in question, must 17 130 NOTES ON NO. XX. Gen. 17: 1 — 5. PAfeTii. have depended on his state of knowledge, and on his state of mind at the time when the promise was made ; and with neither of these are we definitely acquainted. That he, however, either in regard to the promise made here, or on some other occasion, was inspired with a certain expectation of a future Messiah, appears from John 8: 56 ; comp. Luke 10: 24. In regard to '^V~\l in v. 5, see Gal. 3: 16, No. XX. Gen. XVII. 1—8. (1) r,i'Si n-'Sirn-]?. , see in No. XVIII. v. 4, and also 459. — D"*:'^ sen , 457. — N"ij'.] , apoc. Fut. Niph. of inJJ-; , full form r.tf,-]"^, , 58 and 285. 3 ; lit. shewed himself, 182. b. 3. — "^Tii , Almighty ; perhaps pZaraZis majestaticus, 325. 5. 2 and 437. 2. — "i^sb iV.nnn , in other places, nN (with) is commonly used after the verb ^jjrjnrj , when it is employed in the same sense as here ; comp. Gen. 5: 22. 1 Sam, 25: 15. This verb also takes "'if.N after it, in the like sense; e.g. Deut. 8: 19. 11; 28. 13: 5. 1 K. 14: 8, et al., where, however, the conj. Kal (and not Hiph.) is employed. All these various forms of expressions mean : ' To live on friendly terms with God ; as it were to converse familiarly with him ; Deum ceu ducem sectari ; to act agreeably to his precepts.' So the sequel explains it; D'^rn nr.nl ) ^^io integer, be upright, (comp. Gen. 6: 9) ; D''j;n denotes freedom from blemish, i. e. from any charge of mora] cor- ruption or wickedness. For Methegh in the Imp. in.";m , see 87. d; and for the pointing T , see 152. c. 6. (2) njOijl , Vav simply conjunction, the Fut. form here retain- ing the Fut. sense ; r7:nN , Fut. 1 pers. of ]n: , with parag. rt_ , 205.— "^jrai , 148. a.— ii«7a , 456. a. (3) bb^i , from be: . (4) ■'2N as to me, Nom. abs. 415.— n''-;n-; , 209 and 503. Note 2.— SNl:, 507. 6.— ti-;ia 1173?:, comp. GalVs: 7— 9, 14—18, 29. 4: 28—31. Rom. 9: 6—8. Rom. IV. throughout. (5) N'llj?'; , 500. a. — Biay , from '^t^ pater and d1 excelsus, i. e. exalted father, 317. — finnSN , either compounded of SN father. tJ-i exalted (omitting the last letter), and p rn multitude (omitting the ending 'jT-), and so meaning exalted father of a multitude; or else of at* and Dli"i , which latter word is of the same meaning as the PART. II. NO. XX. XXI. Gen. 18: 6 — 8, etc- 131 Arabic -»\Aft (DNJi'^), great inultitude. The first method of com- position agrees best with the explanation subjoined by the writer. (6) ■'n-'ner!'! , 209. Hiph. of n-jB .— tiliai; , 507. 6. (7) "'nbi-sni , 65.— '^b'^l , 148. a.— 'r]ynT , comp. Gal. 3: 16.— Dnh'ib , 65. — niT^b , for the Methegh and vowel points, see 87. d, comp. 152. c. 6.— d'^fibNi:, 507. h. (8) 'r\'T\xyy\ , 209 — T'njjn , suff. of ni;?: , Dec. III., 63 and 41. — yj}3 ^nN , in apposition with the preceding y"jsi . — "'n'^';"'! , 209.— d-^nVN^.,507. 6. ' In regard to the promises here made, it is evident that they are of ^ temporal as well as of a spiritual pature. That they comprehend spiritual blessings, may be seen by consulting the passages referred to in the remarks subjoined to No. XIX. v. 6. That temporal blessings are also included, must be acknowledged by every one who attentive- ly considers v. 8 above. The greatest difficulty arises from Gal. 3: 16. The word S~\\ , in v. 7. above, seems to mean, 'thewhole posterity of Abraham.' T'hat this, however, is the necessa?^/ meaning of it, cannot be shewn. Certainly Paul did not consider it so, when he wrote Rom. 9: 6 — 8. No line of distinction is explicitly drawn, in the promises to Abraham, between spiritual and temporal blessings. We are lefb to gather it from the nature of the case, and from the reasonings of Paul. There is nothing at all incongruous in the supposition, that blessings of both kinds were promised. Nay, it is of course what one would nat- urally expect ; and it is what is found in many other parts of the Scrip- tures. And that Abr.iham himself apprehended the import of these promises to be spiritual in part, seems plain from the assurance of the Saviour, in John 8: 56. Comp. also, Heb. 11: 8—10, 13—16. No. XXI. Gen. XXII. 1—19. (1) in^;!, Methegh 87. g-.- D"'n3'=?!i , see on No. XIX. v. 1. — tl'^.T^Nn , the use of the article before this noun, is not common, 413 ; isut still it is allowed by the laws of the language, 411. — no; , tried, put to trial To tempt, in the sense of soliciting to sin, cannot be predicated of God; see James I: 13, 14.— ■':Srt , 410. Note. (2) "^la , Dec. VII. a. irreg., "ja , const. 15 , suff. ^a — Tj"'"^ , suff. of Dec. m.—T^^'lf:?,, see on No. XVIII. v. 1.— rt^-jsn , of \ 132 NOTES ON NO. XXI. Gen. 22: 2 — 13. part ir- Moriah, the hill at Jerusalem, on which the temple was afterwards built.— IMbsri'! , Hiph. Imp. of nb» , with suff. 313.— n^s!? , 1 omitted 63. — inN , const, form, which shews that the true ground- form is iriN = IPIN 58, but it is written TMN by the rule in 142. a. — ti''"nnn, 142. a. — "lBi«, 241. a. I; or it may be taken as the Part, active in Kal, (3) ti3i»;i , 206. Note 1.— "ij-sa^ , for 'lj?.3ln3 , 152. a. Note. 1.— UJlah*!, for first Methegh, see 87. A; for the second, 87. a.— Sips';! , Dagh. omitted, 208 in e. g. ; final Pattahh. 236. — '':1V , const, plur. of ys, Dec. VII. — tp^^l , vay-yd-qom, short O, 270. 3. Iht. apac, and 208. Note 2.— ^]?.r.3 > 208. Note 2.— laJJ , had named to him ;, or had commanded him. The latter sense is the predominant one in the Arabic ; in Hebrew, it is principally limited to the later books. — t3"'lr}bNfl , the student will note the repetition of the article before the name of God. (4) NiS'.i 1 tkis'i' lifted up, 1 then. — N"i;i , see on Gen. 1: 4. — ph'^a , 1 omitted, 63. (5) laia , Imp. of a-ij; .— QDb , 545.— nil;?. , from ^b;; , 244. a. — ri3-1? , lit. unto there, i. e. thither, yonder. — ninniiSJl , Fut. Hithp. 1st plur. of nn>a , 187. b. l.—Ti'zraw , 205. (6) tiiijn , apoc. Fut. Kal. of S'to, 274. 2. — isa , see v. 2. above. — '^'iT. > ^■i f*""™ ^® ^ noun of Dec. VI. with sufT. plural, (for V^n;; as it is sometimes written) ; used adverbially, 403. b ; lit. the union of them, or they together ; corap. 428. g. (7) riiJj, Par. XXIV. No. II.— ''Ssr! , with epenth. suffix, 410. Note. — nilJ , Dec. IX., const, rtto . (8) ib-nN'i;'., 75. a; for Methegh, 87, h. comp. I. (9) 'naN , commanded, see in v. 4 above. — D'^fi'bNM , again with the article.— IS'l , 283. y.— tiip^l , see in v. 6. above.— bsaa , 407. /.— a-'SS^ , for D'^aynb . (I0)tinii)i;,522.^' (11) ^^):a , const, of Dec. II. (12) tosn-bN , 101. c. in e. g. nb.— i'lS?a above. — VhN.a, a (la), of, helonging to, one of. (12) l&'^l , 283. y.— ]"•{« , as a const, state of 'J';j< , nothing of, none of, no. — •]^1 , apoc. Fut. Hiph. of rt55 , see in Par. XIX. — tin?, for b=in!i3. (13) d''-ia»,'325. e. g. 2.— D-'i?:, Part. Niph. of rtit:; for meaning, see 182. 6. 6. — nab {Milel); before Gutturals, rtSb (Milra) is the more usual form ; both have the same meaning. — n3n , Fut. Hiph. of nsj. — "^Sfn , 148. 6 ; but here (^ ) is put in the room of (.^ ). (14) '^aj!) , Praeter Kal of S'^iB, with suffix.— 'ij-'it^ , 507. 6.— lie , prince, lit. for a man, a prince, i. e. a princely man, or sim- ply, a prince. — "'rannbln , wilt thou kiU me ? ij interrog. ; b before the Inf ; ■'Sjl'in , Inf with suff. 306, the verbal suff. here denoting the object of the verb, i. e. the killing of me. — 1Bi« fins* , dost thou say ? In English, the force of the preceding interrog. Tx falls on these words ; in the Hebrew it is prefixed to the whole phrase ; or the whole phrase may be rendered : Dost tlwu think to Mil me ? laS, like the Greek cprifti, denoting to think, i. e. to say internal- ly. — '^5'^^ > '^* matter, the affair, viz. of killing the Egyptian. — •J^ia , a country in Arabia Petraea, lying south-east of Palestine. The student will find it useful to read the account of Moses in Josephus, where he will see what Jewish tradition has handed dovra concerning him ; or at least, what the fancy of the writer himself has added. PAKT II. NO. XXIV. XXV. Ex. 3: 1—6, etc. 137 No. XXIV. Ex. III. 1—6. (1) IS^Ji-riN, Ace. 527 and 531 ; 'jN'a for 16«2, 118.— "isrin , Dec. VII.— -iliN , the hinder part, i. e. the remote part.— "laian , of the pasture-ground, of the uncultivated country, desert, whichis the pasture-ground of the Nomades of Arabia.— Ini'nh , with n_ local, 100. i. Horeb is a peak of the Sinai ridge ; 'some say it is east, and some west, of the proper Sinai. The two mountains are not far distant.— N-j);! , shewed himself, 182. 6. 3. (2) lniny?jN^^ , Jehovah as manifesting himself to Moses, Je- hovah as exhibited by human appearance, or by symbol ; see Ex. 4: 1 1. 3:4, 6, 15, 16. 4: 5, and comp. with Acts 7: 30— 32.— IniSii , bush, thorn-bush.— '^■Dtft , for b3Na , 215. 2. (3)n'nC)N,41 and 205. (5) b-iJ , Imp. of b"ij= .— U5';![?-na'iN , 440. a.— NW, 469. (6) ^riOll 5 Milra, because the penult syllable is a composite one, 101. b. in e. g.— U''ana , M 521. Note ; ta'^art , Inf Hiph. of iol?; . — bti , upon, to, towards. No. XXV. Ex. VI. 2— 11. (2) 1J9^j^^ "^JTjTj the one with tone retracted, the other not, 101. 6. e.g. The verb la'i designates the idea, that some communication was made; the verb laN has reference to the words of that communication, and is followed by a recital of them. Often so, elsewhere. Whether words audible to the oviward ear, were addressed to Moses on this occasion, and often at other times, is not an important inquiry; neither can we answer itwith any absolute certainty. Jeho- vah can speak as weU to the soul, as to the outward ear ; and there is no need of an audible sound, in order that he may cause the soul to listen. On the other hand, he can speak audibly too ; for he cer- tainly is not limited in his method of communication. That he did speak so, at Mount Sinai, seems to be signified in Ex. XIX. , com- pared with Heb. 12: 19. But that this was usually the method of com- munication, when he spake to Moses and other prophets, is by no means certain. It is altogether unnecessary to suppose it. Commu- nications made directly to the soul by him, without the use of the common external means which men employ in their communications with each other, are surely as real, and as authoritative, as any that could be made in a different way. 18 138 NOTES ON NO. XXV. Ex. 6: 3 — 8. part ii. (3) N-INT, Niph. of riN'i, 182. 6. 3.— ■'Ti? i?N3, i.e. by the name oi God Almighty, "'TiJ bN Qi?J3, as the next words that fol- low shew ; lit. in El Shaddai, i. e. as an almighty God. See in Gen. 17: 1. 28: 3. 35: 11. 43: 14. 48: 3. 49: 25. (4) '^n'iil , i. e. ■'JS'JSSI , and hy my name, 5 being implied from the preceding VN3 , as there Di2i was impliedly taken from this place ; comp. 562, for the principle there stated applies, for sub- stance, to prose as well as poetry, in a great variety of ways. — ■'FiS'lii i either before me, or he- sides me. The former is followed by the Vulgate, coram me, by Rosenm., and others ; the latter by the Sept., ■a'kriv ifiov, and by many critics. The usus loquendi will support either ; e, g. !;» , coram, Ex. 27: 21. Gen. 18:2; b?, nlriv, except, Gen. 31:50. Ps. 16: 2. Coram me means, (as God was present in the camp of the Israelites), in my sight, in my 'presence ; i. e. he would suffer no rival god to prefer any claims to be worshipped. The phrase he- sides me, needs no explanation ; and (with the Sept.) I prefer this sense. (4) !i3ian~V!3'i bpS, graven image, nor any likeness, viz. of God ; for images of other things were not prohibited, as appears plainly from directions respecting the architecture of the taberna- cle and temple. — 'lllJN, i. e. TiJN nsiaFi, a likeness of any thing which, etc. (5) nihMPi , Hithpalel of 'ntw, see on No. XXVI. v. 27.— Cl^sn , to-obh-dhem, Hoph. in the same sense as Kal ; which is quite unusual : or we may render thus, thou shall not be made to serve them, which will preserve the sense of Hophal. — NSJ? , jealous, i. e. he will not bear with any rival gods ; as v. 3 indicates. — 1p.B (visiting) means punishing, when liy follows. — fDZ-i'S, 506. — •'iOiab , Part. plur. sufF. from N3i»5 .— ti-'UiV.UJ , 'CSz-i , i. e. S'^nn' generations, which is understood here. But how does this consist with Ezek. 18: 20. Deut. 24: 16. 2 K. 14: 6. 2 Chron. 25: 4. Jer. 31: 29, 30 ; in all which places it is afHrmed, that the son shall not die for the iniquity of his father ? Onkelos felt the difficulty, and adds, in his version, ' when the children continue to sin afler the exam- ple of their parents.' In whatever way the difficulty may be met, it is clear that our text agrees with many others in the Scriptures ; e. g. Ex. 34: 7. 142 NOTES ON ffo. XXVII. Ex. 20: 5 — 7. part ii. Lev. 26: 39. Num. 14: 18 ; and also with examples of the execu- tion of such a threatening, e. g. 2 Sam. 12: 14. 1 K. 13: 34. 14: 10, 17. 1 Sam. 2: 33. Josh. 7: 24, 25, and a multitude of other cases. I understand the text simply to threaten severe punishment, for the crime in question. In the East, when any man commits an offence against the government, with which offence it is specially displeased, he and all his direct descendants, even to the remotest branch, (and oftentimes all his near relatives), are destroyed to- gether. Such is the common practice, over all western Asia, even to the present day. The meaning of our text then, is, that the man who makes idol-gods, shall be punished with a severe punishment, (like that of utter excision in cases of high treason); for here is treason against the Majesty of heaven. More than this need not be drawn from the text ; and more than this, I do not apprehend it was designed to convey. But in this, there is no contradiction to Ezek. 18: 20, and other texts like it. It is interpreting by the letter, and not by the spirit and object of the text, which creates the difficulty in question. (6) lO.tt iniiJS , doing kindness, performing that which is merci- ful ; the Part. ^^S here governs the Ace. after it. — t!"'Bbi ^^ called upon the name of Jehovah, i. e. he prayed to him and praised him. (6) 1''JB'~b5 , before him, so Vs in this connection usually signi- fies. — i^'lpll , proclaimed, uttered aloud. — '^'\it , const, of ^"IJ* , Dec. V.,'423. (7) ilNtari'; S125B1 pS , i. e. every kind of offence ; for these three words are nearly synonymous in Hebrew, 438. ;Note. — rtD5 !^i?5? N- . Inf. abs. with a finite verb, 514. 6. — 1j5S etc., see above, in No. XXVII. V. 5. (8) ip'.l, from '^'^;?",— ^hna-;! , apoc. Fut. Hithp. 120. 6, and 292. (28) iT^Ta!! , of the covenant, or rather here, arrangement, or- dinance. That the word ri''"i3 , is used to designate ordinance or arrangement, {Sta&riKrj as the Seventy render it), as well as com- pact or agreement, is clear from the application of it here to the Decalogue. No. XXIX. Lev. X. 1—3. (1) !ihJ5'.i , Dagh. omitted in p, 73. Note 3.— inntlM , Dec. X. — ina, in them, fem., referring to niPlfia implied, for if each man took a censer (as is assented), then the plural number may be pro- perly used to designate the whole of the censers. — ii"*!;* , on it, viz. the fire, "iJN being comm. gender, and here treated as feminine. — rrrt lasj , strange fire, i. e. fire not consecrated, fire not taken from the altar. (2) \L'iJ. Nljn] . '^^^ tliere went out fire, i. e. lightning ; for this is called the fire of God; see Job 1: 16. It is obvious here, that 148 Nos. XXIX. XXX. Lev. 10: 2, 3, etc. part ii. the kind of punishment was adapted to the species of crime which they had committed. (3) NW, this is, 469.— "in^;??, suff. plur. of ii"!;?, by those who are near to me, i. e. who approach my presence. — ^aJ^jSN , / loill he treated with reverence. — d'"'.} , from fi?2'7 , 261. In V. 9 which follows, is a command to Aaron and his sons, that they should ' drink neither wine nor strong drink when they were to go into the tabernacle of the congregation, lest they should die there,' viz. as Nadab and Abihu had just done. The connection of the whole would seem to shew, pretty plainly, that these offenders were under the influence of intoxicating liquor when they offered strange fire before the Lord. It would be well for all who minister in the sanctuary of the Lord, to observe the prescription here given to Aa- ron and his sons ; that they may not offer " strange fire" before Grod, which may devour both them and the people of their charge. No. XXX. Num. Vi. 22—27. (23) "niasj , saying, or thus shall ye say. Inf. abs., 517. The whole phrase filled out would be thus, l"iaj 521. 6.— yjjaM, that the earth opened itself , separated itself , Niph. Fut., 182. 6. 3.— firpna , plur. suff. of it;? , irregular, and actually derived from nns or ra. (33) HbtJ-a , as in v. 30 above.— Dam , Piel Fut. apoc. of lr!i53 , Dagh. fortJ omitted in the D, 72 and 286. 2.— Crj^V.? > 506.— *]ina , from *^n!j . (34) nr!''n,h'';3p , prop, a noun, used here as a preposition, 407. 6, — tkp'b, 103 , fled at their cry, viz. cry of terror and distress. — IIMN , viz. the men of Israel said. — 13Sban , for Q,amets under )>, see '312. 5. (35) \Liii,Jire, i. e. lightning.— ">a"'« , 461.— i5"''li:» , Part. Hiph. in const, state, the offerers of, those who presented incense. ^ In re- spect to the 250 men here, who offered incense, see in vs. 2, 6, 7, 16 — 18, of this chapter. The narration contained in the preceding extract, has met with pe- culiar treatment from some of the critics of the new school in Ger- many. One class have suggested, that Moses probably caused the tents of the rebels to be undermined ; and as he knew at what hour of the day the mine would be sprung, so he could predict when the rebels would be swallowed up in the earth. Eichhorn is somewhat more expert, in his explanation. He at- tempts to shew, that Moses ordered the rebels to be huried alive, with all that appertained to them. As to ' the 250 men, consumed by fire,' he thinks that ' they were fii'st slain, and then their bodies consumed by fire ;' and this, by the orders of Moses. To argue against conjectures of such a nature, would be operosi nihil agere. It is not possible for any one who reads the narration above, really to suppose that the writer did not regard the event in question as miraculous. Now the object of an interpreter is, to ex- PART II, Nos. XXXII. XXXIII. Num. 20: 7 — 11, etc. 151 plain the meaning of the author whom he intei-prets. The question : Whether such an event as that related above is possible, or credible ? may be raised by critics, or skeptics, and may be answered by them in the negative ; but those who believe that the Creator of the world has it at all times entirely under his control, and that the authors of the sacred volume are worthy of full credit, will not be anxious to explain away the obvious meaning of the Scriptures, nor to free themselves from the oMigation to believe in occurrences of a super- natural Idnd. To wonder or to scoif at this (so named) credulity, is not difficult ; but to argue it down, with grounds of reasoning that will abide the test of careful, extensive, and sober investigation, is quite a different task. No. XXXII. Num. XX. 7— 11. (8) nu?3n , the staff or rod, viz. that with which he had per- formed miracles before ; see Ex. 17: 5, and comp. v. 10 below. — ■l%">a , suff. plur. of Q^a . "(9) =iW}i:,313. , (10) Qi-iisrt , ye rebels, Part, of rtna . — ISfl , ne ex, num ex, S5_ interrogative. — M"'iti3, must we bring forth, 504. i. — DSb, Dat. commodi. (11) n-1^^1, apoc. Fut. of on, in Hiphil.— *J!1 , apoc. Fut. Hiph. of rtS: , see Par. X^.—iJlniaa::!, from HE a , 336. Note 4. — t)^as;s, iwo^imes, twice. Dual of t3SS, — naJnl , nude apoc. form ofnnia,Fut. Kal, 183. y. From Ps. 106: 33, and Deut. 39: 49—52, it appears that Moses sinned on this occasion ; but the nature of his offence is not particu- larly specified in either passage. In the Psalm it is said, that 'he spake unadvisedly with his Ups :' in Deut. (loc. cit.) that 'he did not sanctify the Lord in the midst of the children of Israel.'— But by Num. 90: 12, it appears that Moses and Aaron themselves indulged a spirit of unbelief on this occasion ; and on this account did not cause God to be sanctified, i. e. revered, by the people. It was for this, that they were excluded from the promised land. Well may we conclude, that an unbeUeving spirit is offensive to God. No. XXXIII. Deut. VI. 4—9, 13, 17, 18. (5) nWtt , one, in opposition to the polytheism of the Gentile na- tions. The metaphysical nature of the Godhead is clearly not the 152 Nos. XXXIII. XXXIV. Deut. 6: 5 — 18, etc. part ii. particular object of assertion here. — ^SSb , and ^^ps? , a repetition of words nearly synonymous here, for the sake of intensity, 438. d, and Note.— ^ni^M , Dec. VI. y. (6)'!]'!aa, Part. Piel, 313.— is, in, on, before, for the same sense will be conveyed in either way, i. e. ' constantly remem- ber.' (7) aijSSiai , and ye shall inculcate, reg. Piel in a verb »3> , 262. ^naaja , Inf fem. with suff. from aa; , Dec. XIII. g-.— ';;r!Si:i=i , id. from ?[b; .— ':;asirni , Inf suff., from ii'^ .— "Tjaipal , id. from n^ p , in pause. (8) nixb, /"or a token, for a remembrancer. — r'SDbb , jfroBi- •pieces, frontlets. From this precept, in later times, the Jews de- duced the obligations of wearing phylacteries ; which they greatly abused to superstitious purposes. (17) 'jiiaiBR -lia-ij , 514. «.— niaa, mits-^oth, from nnaa . * (18) 'T'niliSb, i.e. 'he bound himself by an oath uttered to thy fathers, that he would give this land to you.' No. XXXIV. Deut. XXXIV. 1—8. (1) fia'iyn , const, plur. of irilans , Dec. XI. — isa , a mountain on the east side of the Jordan, probably not far from the northern part of the Dead Sea, and the summit (iBNI) of a ridge, on the northern part of Moab, called Pisgah, rtJDS . — ^'iiN'n , in apposition with 1133 . — ''3.S~bS , before, in the face of, i. e. on the east. — 1!lijt'^!!l, Hiph. Fut. of rtNT , made him to see, shewed him. — "I^bart , the region on the east side of the Jordan, which the two and a half tribes possessed. (2) ''i;ae3-b3 nXT , i. e. •'btjSJ y-jN ; for so runs the next clause, fi'I'^S^ Y"7.'?. • The countries mentioned in this verse, lie on the west side of the Jordan, and reach to the Mediterranean, for a considerable extent from north to south. The distinctive portions of tribes, which are here named, shew that the present narration was composed, or at least revised, after the division of Palestine among the tribes. — 'ji'^fNn D^n , the sea behind, i. e. the Mediter- ranean. To a Hebrew, who reckoned with his face toward the PART II. Nos. XXXIV. xxxr. Deut. 34: 2 — 7, etc. 153 rising sun, the east was before, the west behind, the south on the right, and the north on the left. (3) aJSrt , the south, here the south part of Palestine. — 'iBSfi , lit. the circle, viz. the bow or circle of land made by the windings of the Jordan. — inn'' riSpa, the plain, or rather, intervale of Jer- icho, the city of -palm-trees, (so called from the great number of these which grew in its neighborhood). — ^SS , a town near the southern extremity of the Dead Sea. (4) TiJN , concerning which, 428. 3. — T["»n''J«-ifl. , for the Seghol under n, and the Hhireq under N, (instead of the usual ""n'^N'nr!) , see 287. 1 ; lit. / have caused thee to see, viz. the lands above men- tioned. — ln?3-02 , n local, 100. i. (5) ''B~b» , lit. according to the mouth, i. e. according to the word or declaration ; mouth being taken for what it utters. Comp. Deut. 32: 49—53. (6) "iap'l, and one buried, or he [Jehovah] Sanerf; for the Nom. is not expressed in this case, and we are left to make it out from the context. The latter seems to me to be the mind of the writer. One would not expect an impersonal "teth here. — ^^35 , in a valley, (a Wady, as the Arabians call a ravine, either narrow or wide, and with banks steep, or otherwise), — bia , before, i. e. on the east ; or over against, i. e. not far from, in view of. — n''3 liSB , the name of a mountain, probably one of the summits of the Pisgah ridge. — lL"'i< ST; wfb"! > which seems plainly to indicate, that it was Jehovah who buried Moses, and not any one of the friends of the prophet. How could such an one forget the place of his burial 1 (7)lria3, Inf. with suffix, 521. a.— rtnns, fem. of Sin3.— linlb, his vigour, active power. — iain',1 , from tian , 261. No. XXXV. Josh. III. 9—17. (9) liaa , gd-shii, a peculiar form of the Imp. of ttJaj , not noted in the lexicons or grammar ; drcao nigh, approach. — HSn hither, with tone on the penult, 100. i. (10) Ui-'ir UJnin , Hiph. Inf. and Fut. of ttSn^ , 614. 6; the 20 154 Nos. XXXV. XXXVI. Josh. 3: 10 — 17, etc. part ii. Inf. is written defective for TtJ'^'niM , 63 ; he mil surely dispossess, drive out. (11) y-iijlrj-i'3 'J^^i< rt't'iarj 'jilN, four successive words all in regimen or const, state. (12) CSb , Dat. commodi.—iif-'Si , 458. — ntiN repeated, 438. b. (13) 01:3 , Inf. const., 521. b, comp. 525 for the relation of niS3 to h'i33 ; and for the form of the latter, see 270. a. 2. — "'Nipb , 531. — ■'aa, const, of d';?? .— may;:'] , 226; Vav not conversive here. — "inN 13 , one heap, Ace. of manner. Meaning: ' The wa- ters, instead of flowing on as usual, shall accumulate and form a rising mass or heap.' (14) sb3s , 521. a.— l:n">b™a , from bniJ . (15) Ni:i3i , 521. 6.— rtSps , Dec. IX. const.— b? tskiz , isfuU above, overflows. — T^jniia , Dec. XI. from !Tia , — "'B'' , const, plur. of Civ (16) inas^i' 226. — pn.'in, as an adverb, 403. d; far, remote from. — li^a very. — fi'lij?, for which (in the margin) we have tJ'itJB , from Adam, a town or city, as the context shews. If the reading CiSja is retained, then we must render the whole phrase, very far in respect to Adam. — isa , at the side. — d'^'l^iifil , viz. a";B , [the waters] which came down, i. e. towards the Dead Lake, otherwise called (as here), Sea of the Plain or 8alt Sea. — ir'lSS =)an, were entirely cut off, 533. — 333 , opposite to, over against. (17) nijnhs, 142. a.— ■jsn, Hiph. Inf of 1=13 as to form, but used as an adverb here, 403. d ; firmly, safely. It is quite impossible, here, to explain away the meaning of the writer in respect to this miraculous interposition. The 15th and 16th verses ki-e so specific and definite as to their meaning, that to al- lege that the Jordan was forded by the Israelites, at a time when the waters were very low, is quite impossible ; i. e. it is impossible to shew that the writer means to convey this idea. There is no alterna- tive here, but either to believe in a mh-aculous interposition of God, or to abandon all confidence in the correctoess of the sacred historian. No. XXXVI. Josh. X. 12—14. (12) nn , for n;n , 107. 2 ; from in: , and Inf fem. in the const, state, 520. 6 ; the subject of the verb nn follows it in the Gen., 525. PART u. Nos. XXXVI. XXXVII. Josh. 10: 12 — 14, etc. 155 — T?^ , lit. in the eyes of, i. e. in the sight of, before.— t:i'7 , Imp. of blTj , with'Vav fulcrum, 64 ; comp. 264. 3, where are examples of the Fut. with the like form. — tiT'l , and thm moon, Voc. case, fiT7 is implied after it. (13) DliJ, 261.— IttS, i. e. nas, the final vowel being pro- longed by the accent Rebhia upon it, 144. 149.— Dj5^ , Fut. Kal of fijPJ , took vengeance upon. — Nbfl , not question-wise, nonne ; but for Titn , ecce, lo. So the Seventy frequently render ^fb!^, viz. by i8ov and in the Samaritan and Rabbinic, this is the predominant sense of the word ; also in Arabic, dwb means ecce. — 'bZ , »"• — *T'^!J, ofJasher, i. e. of the upright; a book of national songs or narratives so called, probably because it contained narratives re- specting men of an upright character; comp. 2 Sairi. 1: 18. — D^:aia^ 'arts , in the midst of the heavens, i. e. at the meridian. It was about noon, therefore, when this occurrence took place. — yjj tib , did not hasten, i. e. did not move rapidly as he usually does ; for his movement is described as rapid by the sacred writers, e. g. Ps. 19: 6 (5). Ecc. 1: 5. It is difficult to say, however, whether the expression yjj Nb be not litozrig here, so that the meaning is simply : ' It stood still.' — B'^aij Di''3 , about a whole day, 428. c. (14) Ninrt aiia rt^rt i put him into thy power, or under thy control. — Nbn , ecce, as in No. XXXVI. v. 13.— N5i;,g'oe«A/ortA, including the Fut. also, 503. d. 2. (15)Dn^2, vay-yorhom, short O, Fut. with Vav, from "oan, 156 Nos. XXXVII. XXXVIII. Judg. 4: 15 — ^24, etc. part ii. 208. Note 2. — ^51?! , generic, cavairy. — isi? , hy the edge of the sword.— C 3^1 , apoc. Fut. Kal of D13, 270. a. 3. (16) iljhin , the infantry, if we may employ the present tech- nical language of military men, in order to translate the word. (17) dibia , a state of amity. (18) nN-];?!:, for form see 118. Note 2.— ITI^O , 270. a. 4. Imp. parag. The asterisk here, and again on the same word in the sequel, points to a Masoretic note at the bottom', viz. Milra, i. e. the tone is on the ultimate, (99. Note) ; see in 100. i, under e. g. — ID^l , Hiph. Fut. apoc, 270. c. 3. Fut. apoc. with Gutt., which causes the final Pattahh. — IribnNn , with fi local, and in the Ace, 428. a.— !in&5Pil , Fut. Piel of riD3 . — MS'^Stea , with a mattrass, with a smair piece of carpeting, such as was used on couches. (19) ■'3"'pttJn, Imp. fem. Hiph. of nj5--2J .— Tias , from Nas, see 278 and 63.— IINS , nodh, for liN:, 118. (20) iw , Imp. masc. form, although addressed to Jael, 490. — nns, 428. 6.— ^jb-N/iJI , from bNia ; for the dropping of the Q,a- mets, see 133. — "^ajjl , and he shall say, 209. (21) ^Tyi , const, of in^ , Dec. V. — t2NV3 , with secrecy, privily. — W~\'_ , Niph. 182. 6. 4. — ^S^Jl , and he sunk down lifeless, faint- ed, Fut. apoc. of ^l^y , with Pattahh under the Guttural S>. — riajT , with final vowel long, because it is in pause. (22) in5«-3i5i? , 278. 2 ; for the form of the vowels, 118. Note 2.— ^b. , Imp. of ^b^ •— ,T?.1^'l . Fut. Hiph. of 'nan , with epenth. suffix, 309. c?.— Ujpatt nnN , 527. a. (23) 'SZ'y^'y , thus or so did [God] subdue or humble. (24) '^ib'r^ .... ^b.W , 514. 2, denoting continuance ; while 7\tDp^_ denotes the kind of action, viz. was heavy or oppressive. No. XXXVIII. Judg. XVI. 23—31. (23) ISDN? , 226.— rthnia!;!! , and for r^oicing. — 'jna , sing., 437. 2. " (24) ^nS* , him, i. e. Samson. — ^a''~!t!» nijl , and Mm who de- stroyed. — Wiblrfl , and him who multiplied our slain. <25) tilB'^S , the vowels are made to fit the Qeri at the hot- PART II, NO. xxxviu. Judg. 16:26 — 31. 157 torn of the page, viz. S1B3 .— na^ ai't:3 , when their heart grew merry, 521. 6.— tii-i«&Nn, the pointing is adapted to the Qeri at the bottom of the page. Part. pass, of nijij .— pna':i , Piel. Fut., that he might make sport. (26) rth''Srt , station me, Imp. parag. Hiph. of h:; , 251. — ■'S.'??'?'''?.! J (with points adapted to the Qeri), Hiph. Imp. with suf- fix, from -ilJi , Yodh omitted before the last radical, 63 ; Qamets dropped under h, 133.— drnii-y • . . "nffiN , «re wAJcA, 478.— pb: , Niph., is built. — )S-m'\ , that I may lean. (27) p"-ij»uj phipa", 525. 521. (28) ■'snij, Imp. Par. XXII.— S^rtbNn , 412. rf.— nttpSNI, Niph. Fut. paragogic. — ''ntBa , on account of the two ; the asteria-k refers to a note, which denotes that the n here is Raphe, contra- ry to the usual form of this word. — d'^niabsa , [that I may be avenged] in respect to the Philistines. (29) n'sb'".!) stooped down, towards, viz. in order that he might take the advantage of position, in order to lift up the pillars ; which he might do when he made the effort to rise. (30) •'UiSS riSin , let me die, 475. 2. a.— till , Par. XIX., he laid out, he put forth. (31)rri8J, for1''h{J, 142. B.— INip'l , Dagh. omitted in the Sin, 73. Note 3 ; Fut. of Ntoi .■— r?.1 I"*?. , between and be- tween ; the Hebrews repeated the particle in such a case, while we use it only once, and that before the first noun, e. g. here, be- tween Zorah and Eshtaol. — tasia , ruled over, governed, directed. The office of judge in the East, is invariably connected with that of magistracy in other respects. All kings are judges ; and all judges besides them, are executive officers under them of some kind or other. Hence, in the Scriptures, the word to judge often means, in a figurative sense, to have a predominance among, to have a superiority over, etc. If any one should question the possibility of 3000 people being upon the roof of the temple in question, he may be referred to the accounts of the temples at Thebes in Upper Egypt, which have been given by all recent travellers ; accounts which, while they come to us authenticated in such a manner as to admit of no doubt in regai'd to their verity and correctness, at the same time present things appa- rently incredible, and contrary to all tile philosaphizing of most spec- 158 NOTES ON NO. XXXIX. 1 Sam. 3: 1 — 5. part ii. ulative and theoretical historians. The ruins of ancient Greece and Rome, so far as vastness and extent are concerned, dwindle into in- significance when compared with the astonishing remains of eai-ly ar- chitecture at Thebes. What is most confounding of all to that phi- losophizing, in which historians of a skeptical cast are continually prone to indulge, is, that these mighty ruins are, beyond all doubt, the relics of architecture designed and executed in ages, when, as some popular writers urge us to believe, men were not yet weaned from contending with the beasts of the forest for their lairs and for their acorns, nor but very little elevated above them. The ruins at Thebes, present evidences of control over physical and mechanical power ; of skill in architecture on a scale of surprising magnitude ; and of art in mixing and laying on colours, that are fresh as if painted but yesterday, after having been laid on for more than 30 centuries ; which confound and put to shame all that the arts and sciences, and the experience of 3000 years, have since been able to accomplish. So much for the rudeness, and bai-barity, and ignorance of the primitive ages. The Philistines, the near neigh- bors of the Egyptians, and their hearty coadjutors in polytheism, might well have, and doubtless had, large temples as well as they ; large enough to afford room for 3000, and some of them not improb- ably for many more, to stand upon the roof. As to the strength of Sampson, in tearing away pillars on which such an enormous weight rested ; those who disbelieve any thing which is miraculous, will of ^course regard the whole as iiv&og' those who admit the reality of miracles, will doubtless be ready to beheve, that there was some supernatural aid afforded him, in the case under consideration. A heavy blow was inflicted on polytheism, by the event in question, and on its votaries who were the enemies of God's chosen people. No. XXXIX. 1 Sam. III. 1—14. (1) ri'^a*?, Part. Piel, 231.— ynSS, lit. spread abroad, i.e. common, usual. (2) njiS'i , dud suflT. of B')5"'S ; the asterisk refers to another or- thography (plene) in the Qeri; see 336. Note 5. 1. — 1*ihln, Hiph. of bbh.— m'ns, Piel Inf. of rtrtS, comp. 232. 6, but the form of the Inf. mood is not stated there; to be dim, to fail. (3) ^l , also T"; , 63.— d'lt: , not yet ; as to the form, 403. 6. (5) V"3tl . from VI ^ , 270. a. 3, Iht. apoc— ■»33rT , Dagh. omit- ted in the first 3 , 73. Note 3 ; corap. at the end of v. 4. — ^^V , 75. a. — 35U5 Sitti , lie down again, 533. — SStt) , in pause. PART II, Nos. XXXIX. XL. 1 Sam. 3: 6 — 14, etc. 159 (6) Pltj-il (iqDi»l), Hiph. apoc. Fut. of riD;, 63 and 308. Note 2. (7) S*V^ fm, hadnot yet.knoion. (8) ■;?!«] , apoc. Fut. Kal of fa , 274. 2. (9) ^b , Imp. of ?jb; .—131 , speak, Imp. Piel. (10) DS>23 DSB3 , as orece and again, as repeatedly before. (11) ni?J» •'Sbij', 527 and 529.— n3'''|aiji , fem. plur. Fut. Hiph. of b'bJJ . — rt^.S'i bhij , Inf. abs., although not the usual form as to the latter verb, 514. e ; lit. beginning andjinisldng, i. e. thoroughly executing the whole. (13) fi'^bbiJa , Dagh. omitted in the first i , 73. Note 3.— tliib , 545.— nns , Piel.— na , 506. (14) DN , if, but in an oath (as here) it means not. The rea- son is, that the phrase is elliptical. Fully written out it would run thus : If I do thus and so, may God do this or that to me! See the formula in full, 2 Sam. 3: 35. 1 Sam. 25: 22. In such cases, the meaning of course is : ' I surely will not do this or that.' — "iSSn^ iibf, shall not be expiated, 187. c. 3. No. XL. 1 Sam. XVII. 38—51. (38) Vja , suff plural of Dec. VIII., from "la , raiment, apparel. — inai , put, placed. — 'j'V'iiB , second Ace, 511. (39) bij'l, Hiph. apoc' Fut. of i^N^, 63.— n5'?.b, nb!; Inf. of ^b;j . — !iD3 t^b ■'3 , but he had not put them to trial, he had not proved them. — ti'iO')!, Hiph. Fut. with suffix, from TlD, reg. form *n''&^ , here written defective 63, and the Q.amets dropped un- der the Yodh, 133. (40)ibpa, from i>;?a, Dec. VII., Dagh. omitted in p, 73. Note 3. — ia"'3SN ■'jP.Sh, lit. smoothones of stones, i.e. smooth stones, 423.— •'jS^n , const, plur. of pi>h , 41.— D'^siri , root rtsn . (41);ili5l ?Tbh,514. 2. (42) IrtWi , from nia .—Ts^l , const, of nB'j , Dec. IX, ; lit. with something beautiful, i. e. with beauty. (43) Na , Part, of Nia , 527.— m'bjSBa , Dagh. omitted in p, 73. Note 3. 160 NOTES ON NO. XL. Sam. 17: 44 — 51. part ii. (44) ns^ {If:,), parag. Imp. of *J^; . (45) mb-nsa , const, plur. of "^'^sa , Dec. XI.— ns'nh , Piel ofP)^h. The asterisk refers to a Masoretic note, which is, that 'Soph Pasuq (Silluq) is placed on the vowel Pattahh;' which is rather unusual, inasmuch as it generally prolongs it. (46) ^''n3n'i, Hiph. of na:, 63.— ''nntjni C'nn'n-'Drii), 63. from Til D . — "155, corpse, collective here, corpses. — i'N'lip'b , wAo belongs to Israel, or who is on IsraeVs side. (48) 'nsysii'n , toward the camp, viz. the camp of the Philistines, Ace. of place, 428. a. (49) mi , from n33.— sirtra';2 , Hiph. Fut. of niaB, 63. (51) sirtnnfci';i , Polel of na . — d'^^aa , their champion, hero. — 1D3*n , Fut. kal'of D« , 63 and 41. PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF HEBREW POETRY, The poetry of the Hebrews has characteristics which are peculiar, and wliich widely distinguish it, in some respects, from the poetry of the western world. So far as any one has yet been able to discover, the Hebrews had no knowledge of what we call quantity, or syllabic measure as employed in the construction of poetic verses. Many attempts have been made, since the revival of Hebrew study in Eu- rope, to discover something of the Grecian and Roman measure in the poetry of the Scriptures ; but none have met with the desired success. Men of different nations, of extensive learning, and of great enthusiasm for Hebrew study, haye made these fruitless attempts. It has indeed been aflSrmed by Jerome and others in ancient times, and by critics of no small reputation in modern times, that the poetry of the Old Testament displays all the rich variety of Greek and Lat- in measure ; and that one may find there the heroics and lyrics of the West, not only in respect to spirit, but even in regard to form. Every attempt however to discover them, has failed to produce any general conviction of their real existence, in the minds of those who are best acquainted with oriental studies ; and it is now a mat- ter of almost universal accord, that the characteristics which distinguish Hebrew poetry, are principally the following : viz. (1) A kind of rhyth- mical conformation of (rrt/oi or distichs. (2) A paralleUsm of the same in regard to sentiment. (3) A figurative, ornate, paraboUc style. (4) A diction in some respects peculiai-. In regard to the first of these characteristics, the measure of syllables, i. e. their length or brevity as it regards what is called quardity, is not concerned ; at least it is not, as has been already said above, discov- erable by us. The terms rhythmical conformation, here employed, are designed only to mark a conformation in general, as to the respective length of hues and the number of syllables, in two corresponding arlxoi or distichs. This is tlae most general of all the distinguishing features of Hebrew poetry. The exactness does not, indeed, corres- pond with that observed in EngUsh rhyme. But still, it is so gene- ral, and so considerable, as to force the obsei-vation of it upon every reader, who has any powers of discernment. The second characteristic, viz. parallelism, applies to the corres- pondence of sentiment. This sentiment may be either the same, (or the same with only a slight variation in the diction, or the thought, 21 162 REMARKS ON HEBREW POETBr. PART IH. or in both), and then the distich consists of two parallel passages, in the usual sense of the word parallel, as well as in a poetic sense ; or the sentiment in one arlxog maybe an antithesis to that which is contained Ln the other, the antithetic correspondence being plainly a matter of design and calculation ; or lastly, there may be nothing more than a coiTCspondence in the length of the (nlxoi, and a gene- ral sameness of design, without either a synonymous or antithetic sense in the members of the distich. To produce examples of all these would be very easy ; but it would be out of place here. I refer the reader, for ample satisfaction in respect to this whole subject, and that he may acquire a right and adequate understanding of it, to Bishop Lowth's celebrated and admirable Lectures on Hebrew Poetry^ in particular Lect. XVIII — XX. ; or (to what in some respects is still more satisfactoiy) to his Preface to the Translation of Isaiah. He may also consult De Wette, Commentdr iiher den Psalmen, Einleit. § 7 ; Vogel, de Dialecto Poetico ; Meyer, Hermeneutik des ML Testa^ ments ; and other writers, who have composed introductions to the Hebrew Scriptures. In regard to the third characteristic of Hebrew poetry, it is com- mon, in some respects, to the poetry of all languages. A diction fig- urative, elevated, more or less remote fi-om the vulgar one, and abound- ing in comparisons, is almost of course the characteristic of aU poet- ry, which exhibits any striking display either of feeling or of imag- ination. But the Hebrew poetry, (which is in a peculiar sense the ofifspring of feeling), abounds to an uncoiimion degree in these cha- racteristics. The peculiar diction of Hebrew poetry is displayed in the choice of words ; in the meaning assigned to them ; and in the forms which it gives them. (a) The choice of words ; e. g. IT 12N instead of fi'lN, mnn; fsriH instead of N13 , to come: n\'q instead'of ~\yi, word) 'o'Tp^ instead of CbiS , former time ; fiinn instead of Q'^a wider. (b) The meaning of words ; e. g. T'llij strong, or the Mighty One, tot God; T'SN strong, for bvll ; rt'l'^h^'i^ only, the darling, for life; f\p'T Joseph, for the nation of Israel, etc. (c) The forms ofioords; (1) The peculiar forms of entire words; e. g. nibN instead of D'^nVN , God; Wfi instead of rT"!! , to be; fattS instead of d''73?, nation^; niDlC instead of D'^riJ ,years; niB"' instead of d'^K^ , days; • (in the title) means, either ' pilgrim-song,' i. e. song sung when going up, ascending, to Jerusalem, as at the year- ly feasts, etc. ; which explanation will fit several of the 15 Psalms with this title : or ' gradation-song, degree-s'6ng,' i. e. a song in which one distich gradually advances upon the other, or is built partly upon it, by repeating some of its words or thoughts; which explanation fits many arlioi,, but not all, of the Psalms bearing the title in question. Such are the usual explanations. But may not some light be thrown on this word, by referring to the poetry of the Syrians 1 One of the eight species which they distinguish, is I jl>2s»siai , gra- dus, scalae, of the same signification as nibsa . The name in Sy- riac appears to refer to a particular species of metre ; see Oberleit- ner's Chrestom. Syr. p. 387. But what the metre is, in the psalms entitled niVsa , (if indeed this title refers to metre), we have not the means of determining. (1) rtSJi, see! i.e. attend, hortatory in its sense, as here em- ployed. — 1i'^^ , Imp. Piel, hkss, i. e. praise, laud. — '^'i^S here means, those employed in the temple-service, as the next crixog shews. — ti'^'iasrt , n loho, 412. Note 1 ; lit. standing, which is the attitude of those who are in waiting or attendance, and alert in per- forming service. — !ii!T'~ri^a, house of Jehovah, may mean either the tabernacle, or the temple. — nib''>5, plur. masc. of V'.b, 322 ; by night, lit. during the nights. Meaning : ' Ye Levites, minister- 166 NO. XLii — XLiv. Ps. 134: 1 — 3, etc. part hi. ing in the temple, and keeping the night-watches there, praise the Lord !' (2) 1i^ , 236. c, suff. plural of 2d pers. feminine. (4) "3^*5 , suff. plur. of D'^'^h , the suflf. being of the same form as the preceding. — 'S'^tasan , Part. Piel, Dagh. omitted in a , 152. 168 NOTES ON NO. XLV. Ps. 103. 5 11. PART III. a. 5; ^3_ fem. suff. referring to "iJs: •— nD,h , Ace. 511. — n'^an'n , ib., used only in the plural, and of a peculiar form. (5) aiD, with good of every kind adapted to produce happiness. — ?J.';'1» , from •>'^» , Dee. VI., suffix as in 336. b, 2d pers. fern. ; a doubtful word, but probably meaning here, senectus, advanced age, o as the Chaldee has translated it. The Arabic oc {Sed) means seculum — uS^^hrnn , 3 fem. sing, in Fut. Hith., with "'S'^Tiys for its Nom., 495. 6. This noun has the fem. sufT. ■'3';_ in pause, for ''3^_ , 336 in c, and comes from theplur. t]'''i1S'3 ; lit. thy youth is renewed like that of the eagle. — Some translate thus ; thou renewest thy youth like the eagle. If this be the intention of the author, one would ex- pect ■'U5'7hnn, as tLJDD is addressed, which is usually feminine. But as TIJBJ is also masc. occasionally, there can be no valid objec- tion to this mode of interpretation. — T2ji.3, viz. as the eagle renews her pinions, and thus puts on the appearance of youth ; the actual renewing of her age is, of course, out of question. The object of comparison is adverted to by4he writer, in the same light in which it is commonly viewed and spoken of The meaning after all may be simply, that a vigorous and healthy old age shall be enjoyed, like that of the eagle. (6) n\ay , lit. the doer of, const. Part., 531. — ri'ip'JlS , justice. — TiVT] , [is] Jehovah, 554 ; i. e. Jehovah executes justice. — Ci''a3'iJa!i and judgment, equity ; the plur. form increases the intensity of the expression. (7) S'l'ii'' , Fut. as past time, 504. c. 2. (8) Bihn , with Daghesh'd Pattahh, 58. — ^'IN , const, of rj^iN , Dec. v., constructed like participials. — tl'jBN (dual) indignation. Whole phrase; protracted of indignation, i. e. long suffering, slow to anger. — IDh-^'n , abounding as to kindness, 428. 3. (9) a-"i; , Fut. Kal of la-") .— "lici:, Fut. Kal of ^t:3 , with 1 fulcrum, 64. The phrase is here elliptical, PjN {anger) being im- plied after IIB'; , i. e. he will not always retain his displeasure. (10) w-'Niaris , suffi plur. of HQY: , Dec. VI.— I2b , Dat. incom- modi here. (11) rtaSS, Dec. III., from Jiaa , lit. according to the height.— PART HI. NOS. XLV. XLVI. Ps. 103: 12 22, ETC. 169 1''N'7.7'"b? , towards those who fear him, b? having here quite a dif- ferent sense from what it has' in the preceding azlxog. (12) pn"l3,521. b, like to the removing, i.e. remoteness. — |?''^J"in etc., i. e. he has separated our sins very far from us ; which means : ' He has fully and freely forgiven them.' (13) Cih-]3, 521. 6, Inf. Piel—bS, towards.— Brt") , Piel Prae- ter, 232. 6. (14) =i:'lS'; , suff. stale of IS."; , our frame, i. e. of what materi- als we are made ; as the sequel advertises us. — "list, i. e. TJST "ibt' , 517 and 514. c. ; he surely remembers, he recognizes welL (15) UiijN , 415, as to man, — TianSi, as the grass, i.e. short- lived, soon withermg away. — y^s; "j^ , so he blooms, Fut. Kal of y'S. (16) 13 , 75. a, for the Dagh. is here cotyunctiue ; see also 506. — 1SDW, 405.— in/s;, Fut. Hiph. of IS;, with epenth. suff., 309. d. (17) injJ'ia'; , kindness, beneficence, a sense which this word frequently has ; and so StKaioavvt], in the New Testament. (18) ■'■^aiub , with injs'ia implied before it, taken from the pre- ceding ar//off. — dnito^b , to do them, i. e. to obey them. (20) hb '''^33 , ye mighty of strength. — 3 sb'iih , who hearken to, 523. 6. (21) Vn-iffia, Part. Piel.— ■'iii> , const, plur. Part, 531. (22) ni!TJ-nN ""asj "'S'ja , ending with the same words which stand at the beginning ; and which probably were sung as a gene- ral chorus. It is difficult to conceive of any thing more delightful, than this hymn of gratitude and praise to God for his bounty, compassion, and kindness. He who can read it without entering into the feelings and views of the writer, by sympathies kindred with his, may well suspect that all is not right within him, and that his heart is yet estranged from God. No. XL VI. Ps. 100. mini , [Psalm] of praise. This title is probably taken from the first arixog in v, 4. In construction it is the same as b auc- toris. 22 170 Nos. xLVi. XLVii. Ps. 100: 1 — 5, etc. part hi. (1) 1S'>"irj , Hiph. Imp. of SIT , shout, make a joyful noise. (3) ISt, Imp- of ST •— ^!1t^, 2«, e.ven he is, 469.— NOT, 467. — !i:tos , 313. — 13h:s< iibi , i. e. we [did] not [make ourselves]. So with the Sept., the Accentuators, our English Tersion, and most critics, I interpret this expression. Bat Rosenmueller and others read ib for isb , and translate, he made us for himself, throwing 1Dri;N into the next oxixog. — la? , i. e. la? l^nSN, from the pre- ceding aic](og, 562 ; toe are Ms people, because he made us, and we did not create ourselves. (4) ii^Jins , with song, i. e. songs. (5) in:iaN , his faithfulness, fidelity in keeping his promises. No. XLVII. Ps. 93. (1) ?jbJ3 , in pause, Zarqa being a disjunctive here 149 ; reigns, is king. — n^NS , Dec. I., with mcgesty, a second Ace. after TSab , 511, fiJBJ being the other Ace. here, which is implied after tSab . Meaning : ' He is all-surrounded with majesty or glory,' or ' he is ex- ceedingly majestic or glorious.' — lljab , in the second arixos, im- plies a repetition of niNa , 562, thus marking intensity by repeti- tion. — 'iTNnrt IS , he girdeth himself with strength, constructed as before in the case of niNa . — "jfsn , 3d fem. Fut. of Niphal, from ■jis , and agreeing with ban , which is fem. and has immutable vowels; the world is made firm. — D1?an , Fut. Niph. of CI a . (2) Tija , lit.yrom then, i. e. from ancient times, of old ; for it is parallel with tibl'sa in the next line. (3) m'nfi: , floods, a figurative term, designating an over- whelming multitude of threatening enemies. The repetition in the next line denotes intensity. (4) nib'pH , in comparison with the roaring, 454. The adjec- tive which in sense precedes this comparison, viz. T^^.N , follows in the third arlxog. — fi'^'i'^'ifj , i. e. with 53 implied, [in comparison with] the mighty waves of the sea, Jehovah in his lofty place is mighty. Meaning : ' God in heaven is mightier than all my strong and numerous enemies.' After D''"i'''74* , B^a is probably implied, and then Q^~''n3tt)a is in apposition with it. (5) ''S'^lJIS , thy testimonies, i. e. thy promises, assurances. — PART III. NOS. XLVIK. Ps. 65: 1 5, ETC. 171 13X3}?.:, 226.— niN:, is becoming, becometh, Pilel of nsj; , 292.— ^■Ji:;i!i3 1 Polel of pw, with suffix.— ngn, much, abun- dantly, as an adverb here.— DTibN aV.B , the river of God, either the river which God provides, or a great river, 456. «.— Nba , is TART III. NOS. XLVIU. XLIX. PSALM 65: 10 14, ETC. 173 full of. — m3^DR 1?~'3 ) wAen thus thou hast made provision for it, viz. by watering the earth abundantly. (11) nn"! , I take as the Inf. abs. of Piel, and standing for nin njinn , 517, thou dost copiously irrigate, dost cause abundantly to drink. — nh? , Inf Piel, of the same construction as fijn . — '^'7.1'IJ! , plur. with Yodh omitted, 336. Note (5) 1.— fi-'l'-a-ia, with the drops, viz. of rain, MSajian, Polel of aia . (12)n~)t35, thou crownest, i.e. thou adornest. — '^IH^itS Tfya , lit. ^^' ['^^ waters] roar tumultuously, the first verb (from !n»?l) being rendered adverbially, 533. ' Should the mountains shake iniNJS , with the swelling thereof viz. of the sea. Thus far the figurative language employed by the writer, de- scribes the commotions and threatening troubles of the times in which he wrote. He proceeds to open a more cheering prospect ; not that of angry and overwhelming waves, but that of fields water- ed by copious streams, which gladden the country where they flow- PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLIX. Ps. 46: 5 11. 175 (5) "in: , [there is] a river or stream, — I'^lbs , means the chan- nels or rivulets deduced from it {in the oriental manner), and di- rected as convenience may demand. — tlTrVN "T'l; , lit. the city of God, viz. Jerusalem ; but the whole is figuratively said. — ■'33iaH Ztp, the holy dwelling place, 440. 6. — n3'i[?3, in the midst of her, viz. of the city — "ipb nisel? , at the approach of the morning, lit. at the turning towards of the morning, i. e. very early, in good season, op- portunely. What VFas hefove Jiguratively pourtrayed, is now more literally described. (7) ibipa inj , he uttered with his voice, where some comple- ment in the Ace. after 'jn3 seems to be necessary, viz. DS'J (thun- der) or some like word; comp. 1 Sam. 7: 10. Ps. 18: 14 (13). — y nsj SITan , the earth melted ; an exceedingly vivid description of the powerful effects of Jehovah's mere word of rebuke. (8) niNiSi: Ini^i"; , Jehovah of hosts, i. e. God of the hosts of heaven, Sovereign of the skies. (9) 15^, Imp. of ^b; .— nibssa , const, pi. of rtbssa , Dec. XI. — t3ili~T0N , who hath made, caused. — niaia, from n72ia . — yjiJS , viz. in our land or country. (lb) But now, how different the scene! n"'2\25a, he maketh to cease, etc. — 'n^p_ ns , even to the remotest part of.— ysp , he cut- teth off, viz. the sharp or wounding point ; or, he cutteth in sunder. — nibss , the chariots of war. (llYlB-iri, Hiph. Imp., addressed to the enemies of God's peo- ple ; cease your vain efforts.— IS^I , Imp. of sn , and know, that I have the sovereign control of all.— CmN , fi-om ti^'^ , passive sense, 181. Note 2. — nbtj, prob. interlude, viz. with instrumental music; so the Seventy, dtaijjaXfia, an instrumental chorus ; perhaps fi-om NbD or bbD , to lift up, to elevate, viz. the instruments of music in this' case ; possibly from n^D = n^ia , to cease, to he quiet, i. e. the vocal music was to stop, while the instrumental music proceeded. 176 NOTES ON NO L. Ps. 29: 1 8. PART ir. No. L. Ps. 29. (1) B'^ItN '^l'3 , ye sons of the mighty, or ye sons of tJie gods, an honorary title of nobles and princes ; comp. Ps. 89: 76. Some un- derstand it of angels, in both places. Sept. vlovg y,gtmv, the sons of rams, i. e. lambs ; and so all the ancient versions, with Houbigant, making cirN the plural of b^N ; a most singular example of failure in taste to perceive the beauty and meaning of poetry. — lart etc., ascribe to Jehovah glory and power. (2) 1B\Z5 1133, the glory due to his name, i. e. to him, 424. 3. — viyp D'l'lfia , in sacred ornament, with holy splendor, viz. dressed in sacred, splendid attire, becoming those who approach the pres- ence of the Majesty of Heaven ; see 440. a. (3) rtiST'. bip , here means thunder ; as the sequel plainly shews. — S'jart bs , above the waters, viz. the waters which are in the firmament, the waters in the clouds ; comp. Gen. 1: 7. — liaSfj bN , the glorious God, 440. a. — ' Jehovah is above the mighty waters,' expresses his supremacy, or his omnipotent control. (4) hba , lit. with strength, i. e. strong, powerful, 442. — Tirta , lit. with majesty, i. e. majestic, 442. (5) ti''l"jN '-O.Ta , describes the effects of the lightning, in rend- ing the lofty trees on the mountains of Lebanon. — 'j'iSifc!!, from 'fib to be white, and so, '(13^^^ means White-mountain. (6) t3l''p"i2 , he mdketh them to leap, i. e. the mountains ; refer- ring to the rocking of them under the awful reverberations of the thunder. — 1^3 , poetic form for 3 . — 'ji"'"iil5 , the Sidonian name of mount Hermon (see Deut. 3: 9), which the poet here employs as a diction somewhat more ornate, perhaps, than the common ap- pellation. — ff'ttN'i-'ja , the young buffalo, or the young wild ox. (7) 'atx 322:n, divideth the fames of fire, I refer to the scat- tered lightning, which so frequently appears in a thunder-storm. Rosenmueller seems to think that it means, ' the thunderbolts strik- ing fire.' (8) b't\^^, Hiph. Fut. as Present, from bin, 504. 6.— lai;? , Cadesh, the desert through which the Israelites passed, on their way to the promised land. / PART III. NOTES ON NO. L. Ps. 29: 9. 177 (9) nib^N , from nb^N .— niV^N i'bin': , maketh the hinds to bring forth. It is said, that parturition is exceedingly difficult among this species of animals; and hence the efFect of the thun- der is represented as being very great, by this description. The simple meaning is, that the terror occasioned by the thunder, pro- duces the effect in question, which is often' a well known conse- quence of terror; see 1 Sam. 4: 19. — nini"; Rtoh;;, it lays bare the forests ; which marks the effects of lightning on the trees, as it strips them of their bark and foliage, or scorches both so as to de- stroy all power of vegetation. — ib^Tiil , and in his palace, which appears to be the original meaning of the word ; temple is a se- condary meaning. In Ps. 11: 4 and 18: 7 (6), the word seems clearly so be used for palace in heaven ; which recent commenta- tors suppose to be here meant. — ib? , every one, all of the ti'^bij "^zz , V. 1, the suffix i being pronomen multitudinis, as in Jer. 6: 13. Ps. 53: 4. Is. 15: 3 (written rfb?), and often elsewhere. — iai< , der dares, speaks forth, celebrates. — 1123, i.e. 11133, his glory, viz. the glory of God. So De Wette ; but Rosenmueller quite di- versely, thus; 'In his heavenly temple, throughout the universe [so he translates iV?], the voice of Jehovah speaks his glory;' i. e. the thunder proclaims the divine glory in heaven above, and throughout all the universe below ; an expression, which, if cor- rect, is in this sense at least a ktik^ Xsyo/Aivov of the Scriptures. I must differ from both of these commentators. In vs. 1, 2, princes and nobles (so I understand it), are called on to praise God on account of his power and glory, to praise him in their sacred and splendid attire, ffiljp-nniiia, i.e. garments such as they put on, who worshipped in the temple or tabernacle, in Jehovah's immediate presence. Then, after recounting the en- signs of Jehovah's power and glory, in wielding the thunder and directing the lightning, the poet resumes his exhortation : Let every one in his palace (temple) celebrate his glory ; the same idea as in the first part of the Psalm, except that here is a little amplifi- cation, ilrs instead of CbN ''JS . In this way, the sentiment is nat- ural and easy, and is consentaneous throughout. The simple mean- ing is : * Ye who worship in his temple, all ye princes and people, 23 178 Nos. L.LI. Ps. 29: 10, etc. part hi. celebrate the glory of him, who wields the thunder and lightning of heaven.' (10) 5a; , sits enthroned, comp. Ps. 2: 4. 9: 8 (7). 55: 20, et al. The verb is thus used in the way of constructio praegnans, the com- plement to it being implied. Irisaj , on the flood; comp. Ps. 9: 5, NDSb Rl'iO"' , thou art seated on the throne, a clear case of similar usage ; comp. also b signifying ?!n, with regard to state or condition, Is. 1: 5. Ps. 69: 22.' 45: 15. By bisia here, I understand (with Gesenias andDe Wette) the ocean or flood above the clouds or firm- ament; see Gen. 1:6, 7. Meaning: 'Jehovah, who wields the thunder, also directs, controls the flood of water, which the thunder- cloud bears in its bosom.' Rosenmueller : ' Jehovah who controlled the flood of Noah, still directs, and always will control, the tempests of the skies ;' which seems to me to be too far fetched, in the pres- ent case. — S'iJ^l etc., Jehovah will sit enthroned as king forever. (11) VS , lit. strength, metaph. protection, strong hold, i. e. pro- tector, the abstract being put for the concrete. — aib'iS? , with safe- ty, with a peaceful state. No. LI. Ps. xxin, (1) "^sh , Part, of ni»T , my shepherd. David who was in early life a shepherd's boy, and who probably retained, ever afl:erwards, a vivid remembrance of his former condition, here uses the charm- ing imagery which is borrowed from pastoral life, to designate the tender care that God had exercised over him, and the kind provi- sion which bad been made for all his wants. Comp. John 10: 11 — 14. Is. 40: 11. (2) NO". nnNlS , in pastures of tender herbage. — ■":^''3^2j '*« maJceth me to lie down, lit. applied to quadrupeds only ; but the connection here demands a verb of this nature, because the object of it here is the flock or the sheep. The whole denotes repose, quietude, a state safety. — mh=i:?3 '^a , waters of stillness, still wa- ters, in distinction from rapid torrents, where there might be haz- ard in watering the sheep. — '':b.!j.57 , ;-: means, to lead out, as a shepherd does his flock in order to water them. (3) aari'^ iu;B: , he restores my life, i. e. he invigorates, re-an PART III. NOTES ON NO. LI. Ps. 23: 3 6. 179 mates me, when weary and fainting, viz. from being exposed to the heat and drought of summer ; for the pastoral imagery is still continued.— "ishr , Hiph. Fut. of nnj . — pi:£— i!:ay732 , lit. in the paths of rectitude, i. e. in the right paths 440. a, so that I may not wander from the fold, or fall into danger. — lat! ';s»b , for his name's sake; fully expressed in Ps. 79: 9, "rjE/iJ li;3 la^-Vy , ore account of the glory of thy name, which in the next hemistich is ex- pressed by tjri'ij ]yab; so in 1 K. 8; 41. The word D-a is often used in the sense of glory, fame, honour, reputation. De Wette however interprets thus : ' Because thou art named Jehovah.' The sense is well, but the usus loquendi can hardly be vindicated. (4) r^b^is; , FuL of i]^; .— N"'?. , const, of JJ-;? , Dec. VI., 363. 4. — niab:;=niM b^, shadow of death, deaiA-s/iatfe, i. e. darkness such as exists in the tomb, total and frightful. Meaning : ' Though I may be placed in circumstances apparently most hopeless and distressing.' — 5>"1 , 149. a. — '^t?S">p , thy rod, here the shepherds crook, by which he guides, restrains, and controls his sheep. — ^^rijSiiJ^i , thy staff, the same as the preceding Da"£ ; save that here the use of it as a staff is indicated, there the use of it as a crook. No translation can well express the delicacy of the original. — "'jTah^? j Fut. Piel, 41 and 63, give me comfort or support., or cheer me ; i. e. the idea that God will be his guide and support, cheers him when in the deepest, darkest valley of affliction. (5) ''jSb ,for me, 475. 2. 6. — ''"I "lit nJ.J , in presence of mine en- emies ; I. e. such is the provision thou hast made for my peaceful and happy support, that I can sit down and feast, even in the pres- ence of my enemies, without any fear of disturbance. — fiJ'ia'r , lit. thou hast made fat., i.e. thou hast anointed ray head with oil; an expression borrowed from the oriental custom of copiously bedew- ing the head with perfumed oil, on festive occasions, see Matt. 26: 7. Ps. 45: 8 (7). Ecc. 9: 7, 8. Amos 6: 6. — n^i'l , uhertas, abun- dance, overflowing, from ni") . The idea is that of a plenteous banquet, in which the cups are filled to overflowing. (6) "inaijJl , Inf. with suff. from ia; , 247. a.— rtin;' n^a , etc., i. e. I shall be permitted, in circumstances of quiet and plenty, to worship before my God, all my days. How earnestly David de- 180 NOTES ON NO. Lii. Ps. 24: 1 — 2. part hi. sired the privilege of worshipping in Gjsd's house, is sufficiently testified by many psalms, which shew the very high value that he set upon this privilege. No. LII. Ps. XXIV. If we suppose this Psalm to have been composed and sung, at the time when the ark of the covenant was brought up to Zion by David, (2 Sam. 6: 1, seq. 1 Chron. 15: 1, seq) ; or on the occa- sion of the temple being dedicated by Solomon ; and that it was sung responsively by priests and people, (as bishop Lowth conjec- tures, Lect. 19) ; the beauty and force of it cannot fail to be per- ceived and felt by the reader. If the inscription is to be trusted, David was the author of the Psalm. This may have been the ease, even if it was first sung at the dedication of the temple ; for David, who had prepared •«mple materials for this building, may have prepared a song also for the occasion of its dedication. (1) RNlba , the fulness of it, viz. of the earth, i. e. whatever it contains, all that is on it or in it. — b^n , 63, a poetic appellation, clearly a synonyme here of y^N - — ft^ "'^'C'' , 432. a. 1. (2) n'lD'] Li'^itsl b?, Ae founded it upon the seas, i.e. he (Jeho- vah) built the earth upon the seas. Such is the scriptural repre- sentation of this subject. See Ps. 18: 16 (15), where it is said ; ' The channels of the waters (the sea) were presented to view ;' and the parallel hemistich responds : ' The foundations of the earth were disclosed ;' i. e. the channels of the great deep are the foun- dations of the earth. So Ps. 136: 6, ' To him who spread out the earth upon (b?) the waters.' Comp. Prov. 8: 28, 29. 2 Pet. 3: 5, 6. Thus were the Hebrews accustomed to think and speak, respecting the construction of the earth. That it is not philosophically cor- rect;, i. e. that water does not constitute the interior part of our globe, cannot well be shewn ; and perhaps not even rendered pro- bable. But if it could be, there would surely be no more objection to the sacred writers' speaking of this subject more hominum, than there is to their saying, that ' the sun rises and sets,' or to our dai- ly affirmation of the same thing. Nothing can be more manifest. PART in. KOTES ON NO. LU. Ps. 24: 2 — 4. 181 than that the Scriptures were not given to teach astronomy, geolo- gy, or any of the physical sciences ; and, consequently, whenever any thing connected with these is the subject of affirmation, the common popular modes of expression, and only such, are every where employed by them. So, even after all our knowledge of the Newtonian principles of astronomy and our universal assent to their correctness, we still continue to speak of the sun, viz. as rising and setting ; and who is deceived or misled by this ? We may ask for the sacred writers only the same liberty of employing language, of which all other writers avail themselves ; and when this is granted, the case needs no further explanation. rtSDiD"; , Polel of 'jl3 , the accent falling on the penult Sheva, and making a Seghol of it, 148. a, occasions the vowel that would otherwise be written under the first 2 , to be dropped, i. e. instead of 7123137 , we have the present form. The sentiment of this (sriyog is altogether parallel with that of the one which precedes it ; nilrtn being here employed as a synonyme with 'O^lVl . (3) But who can presume to approach the presence of this great and glorious God ? Who shall draw nigh to him, and wor- ship acceptably before him ? — nin'J-nria , the mount of JehovaJi^ i. e. Zion where the ark of the covenant rested, and where God dwelt. — Tiilp DipM3,lit. in the place of his holiness, i.e. in his holy place 440. a, in his sanctuary. (4) ti'^.BS ■'i?? , lit." the clean of hands, ''p3 const, of ■'[33 , the whole phrase is like the Latin, integer vitae scelerisque purus. Ad- jectives are often employed in this manner, 423. — aab 'lai , and pure of heart, is the same construction. Both are figurative ex- pressions, denoting innocence of heart, and blameless external de- portment. — VaSi Nrab NiUS-iib , a locus vexaius, as the critics say. Stange (and after him Da Wette and Rosenmueller) makes it the same as Ex. 20: 7, Niiab !ii!T; C^-nN Nian Nb , making iuJD3 to mean not merely him, i. e. Jehovah, but also the name of Jehovah; a forced construction, which can not well be supported by any ex- ample. What can T£e3 . . . NtoJ , to utter . . . him mean ? Much more easy and natural does it seem to me, to interpret it thus : Who has not sworn to a falsehood intentionally, i. e. iiasaa , 559. J 82 NOTES ON NO. Lii. Ps. 24:4 — 7. part hi. So the Syriac, cnja.aii5 , cum animo suo ; and the Chaldee nearly so, in damnum animae suae. In rendering Ni!;; sworn, the verb is taken elliptically, as a constructio praegnans ; and surely if we con- sult Ex. 20: 7 and Deut. 5: 11, there is no difficulty in this. d'iJTiN tiin'; is implied ; but then this is accordant with frequent usage of the like nature, in regard to iSilJD ; while the construction of the critics above named, is foreign to all usage. Sentiment : ' Who has not intentionally called on God to witness that which is false.' — So the OTi'xo? which follows explains it : ' Who has not taken an oath to a falsehood.' (5) NiB'^ , he shall receive, not without a design of paronomasia here. He who NUJ: Nb , has not sworn to a falsehood, Nte;'; , shall receive etc. The paronomasia appears sufficiently evident, although I do not find it noticed by the critics. See 571. e. — !^j^'^i?^ , fa- vour, kindness. (6) !iT , this, viz. such is the generjition, etc. ; i. e. such are the acceptable worshippers of him who created the world, and to whom it belongs. — "li'l , genus, race, class. — T'laT", not "Without "parono- masia again with the preceding word "li^ 571. a, or d. — ^""IS , lit. thy face, i. e. thee, 475. '2. h. — Those who seek thee dps^ , are Jacob, i. e. true Jacobites, or Israelites. So Rosenmueller and De Wette. I prefer the elliptical construction, ip3;2 for ''^^VlS* dps*:;, as it is expressed in Ps. 20: 2(1). 46: 8 (7), 12 (11). (7) INip etc., may be construed thus : 'Be ye more elevated, so as to make a more spacious way for the entrance of the glori- ous king,' (so De Wette, Lowth, and many others) ; or ' Be ye el- evated, be ye built lofty and magnificent, in a manner worthy of the residence of the King of kings;' (so Rosenmueller). Whoever examines the architecture of the eastern palaces and temples, and sees what boundless expense was laid out upon their lofty and magnificent porticos, will probably feel, that the second mode of interpretation is the most significant. If David viTote this psalm, in anticipation of the building of the temple, the words thus under- stood would be full of meaning. Whoever wishes to understand them in their extent, let him survey the plates which present us with views of the Egyptian temples at Thebes and other places. PART m. NOTES ON NO. Lii. Ps. 24: 7—10. 183 Our text so interpreted, means thus : ' Raise high the porch of the royal palace ; make it worthy of the king of heaven and earth.' — l3r ii» ■'hns , permanent, eternal doors, in contradistinction (it is na- tural to suppose) from the mutable and moveable tabernacle, which had never obtained a permanent station ; comp. 2 Sam. 7: 6, 7. 1 K. 8: 13. — Nia;;'] , that [the glorious king] may enter. , (8) MT— la , interrog., who this ? i. e. who is this 1 The gates seem to be personified here, and represented as asking with aston- ishment: Who is the glorious king, that is about to enter? To which the poet replies, 'liail ^W Tm" , Jehovah strong and migh- ty, i.e. Jehovah potentissimus, 438. d, and Note. — JiBhba, mighty in battle, which epithet refers, no doubt, to the many signal deliver- ances from their enemies, and victories over them, which Jehovah had wrought for the children of Israel. If we suppose our Psalm to have been sung, when the ark of the covenant was introduced into the temple, in which was Jeho- vah's throne, and where he dwelt, we may see an appropriate rea- son why the portals of the temple are required to be lofty and mag- nificent. Jehovah was, indeed, in a peculiar sense, to enter the temple. The ark itself seems to have borne the name of him who sat enthroned upon it, (see 3 Sam. 6: 2, comp. Num. 10: 35, 36) ; so that there was a double propriety in the expression, that Jeho- vah was to enter the temple gates, when the ark came in. (9) The call for a lofty porch, worthy of Jehovah's place of re- sidence, is repeated, in order to make the deeper impression ; INip etc. (10) The question and answer also are repeated, for a like rea- son. In the answer, we now have niNliE niln" , instead of rnTt'l "liaai TlT^ as before ; the idea being substantially the same in both cases. — ^^n iViri , he, viz. Jehovah, and none other, is the king of glory. It is not improbable, that this psalm (and also many others) was sung responsively by the temple choir ; in which case the dia- logue form of it would be strikingly represented. On the subject of such responsive singing, see Lowth on Hebrew Poetry, Lect. 19 ; and for the present Psalm, comp. Lect. 27. 184 NOTES ON NO. LIII. Ps. 19: 1 3. PART III. No. LIII. Ps. XIX. The inscription assigns this psalm to David ; nor is there any good reason to suppose, that this assignment is not well-grounded. God, as revealed in the book of nature, is the subject of vs. 2 — 7 ; God, as exhibited by the purity and excellence of his revealed pre- cepts, is the subject of vs. 8 — 15. Rosenmueller (1st edit.), De Wette, and Stuhlmann, suppose this psalm to be a compound of two different ones, because of the two subjects which it presents, and the difference of parallelisms between the first and second part. But in the recent edition of Rosenmueller's Commentary, he says, . . " olim in banc iucidimus conjecturam Quae tamen parallelismi diversitas qualis sit, non indicavit vir doctissimus [De Wette]. Sed missam jam faci- mus istam conjecturam, ut minime necessariam." May the candour so ingenuously displayed here, be extended to many other " conjec- tures," which this able critic still defends ! (2) ft'^Mian , the heavens, i. e. the heavenly bodies, by their mo- tions, splendor, and usefulness declare the power and glory of their Maker. — ?^i?'^n , the firmament, i. e. the expanse above us, in which all the heavenly bodies appear to be placed, and to move ; see on Gen. 1: I.—T'i.iz , Hiph. Part, of 1i: •— T"i; iitol^tt , the work of his hands, i. e. the work performed by him, hands being used only as a symbol of operative power. Meaning : ' The expanse of heaven exhibits evidence of divine, creative power and glory.' (3) ClT^b tro , day unto day, i. e. one day unto another. — S'^S^ > Hiph. Fut. of S>55 . pi'oclaims, utters, 504. 6. — "inil , speech, de- claration. — iljh"'. , Piel. Fut. of rtin , used as a general present tense, 504. 6. — n?'^ , knowledge. Meaning : ' One day proclaims as it were to another, the power and glory of the Creator ; one night shews to another, knowledge respecting him ; and thus the celebra- tion of his praise is continued through all successive time, without intermission.' The idea is exceedingly beautiful, and the personi- fication of day and night, successively handing down to each other the declaration of the divine power and glory, is worthy of the pen of David. ' It is wise to give all nature a tongue, when God is to be praised.' PART IIT. NOTES ON NO. LIII. Ps. 19: 4 7. 185 (4) 'j^N etc. lit. there is no ujprd, no speech, their voice is not heard, i. e. the heavens and the firmament, day and night, (which declare the glory of God), do not indeed utter articulate speech, or pronounce words ; they have no voice which addresses the outward ear. (5) D^j5 , i. e. 1j5 , Dec. VIII., with suffix; sound, Sept, (p&oy- yog' Symmachus, ^x°S' but the Chaldee has nn» , extension, which Rosen mueller follows, because the usual meaning of IfJ. is line, meas- uring-line. But how does this parallelize with the following HrptTZ, their words ? — l:rj''^a , Dec. X., from n\'a , Nom. to INJ:^; implied. Meaning : ' Although the natural world has no articulate, audible voice, yet it every where proclaims the power and glory of the Cre- ator.' Before bSa , at the beginning of this verse, n tamen, attamen, seems to be implied, 561. a. — ^aJSaiab etc, De Wette renders, where the tabernacle of the sun is stationed ; certainly with great liberty in respect to the original Hebrew. I find here the beginning of a new strophe, and therefore clear indications that a new verse should commence here. The writer, having spoken of the heavens at large, now proceeds to select the most magnificent object in them, and to present it. The course of thought is : ' The heavens declare the glory of God, etc. In them hath he placed a dwelling [taberna- cle] for the sun ; which, above all the rest, makes such a declara- tion.' So the sequel shews. (6) NW) etc., and he is like a bridegroom going forth from his bridal chamber, i. e. the sun comes forth, all splendid and glorious, like the bridegroom in his richest attire, adorned with splendid jew- els, and gold-embroidered garments. To apprehend the force and beauty of this image, one must be conversant with the nuptial dres- ses of the east, which are magnificent almost beyond description. — to'^to"' etc., [Fut. Kal), he exults, like a mighty man, to run the race ; another image to pourtray the sun, drawn from a different source. One characteristic of heroes, greatly admired by all the ancients, was swiftness in the race. This touch characterizes the motion of the sun in his daily course ; as the following verse shews. (7) !^2(;)5» , Dagh. omitted in p, 73. Note 3 ; from [one] extre- fiiity. — DniSp , plur. of n2Cp , the extremities of them, viz. of the '24 I8G NOTES ON NO. LIII. Ps. 19: 7 12. PARTIII. heavens ; describing the apparent circuits of the sun. — inatna , from his warmth, i. e. from his warming and cheering influence. Having thus set forth the testimony which nature gives, and in particular which the sun her most splendid work gives, to the pow- er and glory of its Creator, the Psalmist now comes, (which is very natural for every mind deeply imbued with piety like his), to the contemplation of God as revealed in the Scriptures. (8) nini nnlFl, the law of Jehovah, i.e. the Scriptures. — aie: n5""ija , (Part. fem. Hiph.), reviving or refreshing the life or soul ; the expression, no doubt, is figurative here, and means, ' to refresh or quicken the soul in a moral sense.' " Converting" is not agreeable to the usus loquendi. — J^WNa , true, free from all er- ror. — Tis , (148. a), the simple, i. e. the inexpert, the uninstructed. (9) The same sentiment, or nearly the same, repeated in dit ferent words. — B'^'n'JS^ , right, i. e. not erroneous or deceptive. — Jin^ , pure, clear, having no obscurity, and so — ri'l'^ija , enlighten- ing the eyes ; all in a moral sense. (10) niir; nst")'; ,piety, reverencefor Jehovah, 424. 2. — STiitilB, pure, free from spot or blemish. — ^Sb rTin's , permanent, lasting, uniform, not being now one thing, and then another, like human institutions or observances. — "lijh^ 1p"}i£ , are altogether right, i. e. are all accordant with each other, correct and true in union or uni- tedly. (11) fi''"ian|rt , Part. plur. Niph., the article is used as a pro- noun, 412. Note 1, referring to ti"'t:S'iJa . — i&n, than pure gold, dif^- fering therefore from the common aSlT . — b^DIS DSb , lit. than the distillation of the honey comb, i. e. than the honey which flows from the comb ; before n3'; , Dec. XIII., a compar. is implied. Both of the images here are intensive ; the first being taken from one of the strongest passions of our nature, viz. the love of riches ; the second, from one of the most delicious of all substances in respect to taste. ( 12) The operation or good efiect of these ' statutes' is next described. — fia » moreover, also, i. e. besides being very precious, thy precepts are of an illuminating nature. Obedience to them, also, is crowned with great reward ; — d'n73\a2 , in the keeping of them, Inf. with suflf. etc., 521 and Par. XXII.— :i1 , 144. PART III. NOS. LIII. LIV. Ps. 19: 13, ETC. 187 (13) niN'^Sia etc., who can comprehend his errors ? i. e. who can remember and reckon up their extent and their aggravations? — tninDsa , from hidden [errors], i. e. from those which escape my notice or recollection. — "'ajiij , cleanse me, make me pure, i. e. forgive me in respect to such offences. (14) And not only so; but interpose, and 'keep back thy ser- vant from arrogant offences,' CnTn , i. e. from offences knowingly and presumptuously committed. — DO'^JJ , in pause for finN , which comes from Dn; , see 264. 3, Fhit. with Pattahh. — Ti'^jiiS') etc., then shall I be free from much transgression. (15) •jiS'ib , 507, 6.— Tjipab , 475. 2. 6.— •'-jilJ: , my rock, i. e. my defence, my defender. — "'tNiSl , and my vindicator or redeemer, i. e. either, ' who liberatest or redeeraest me from the power and penalty of my sins,' (referring to the context) ; or, ' who hast deliv- ered me in times of trouble and danger.' A truly beautiful psalm, scarcely excelled by any in the whole com- pass of the Hebrew lyric poetry, in regard to those qualities which please and delight the pious reader. May every one who studies it, and who can look with rapture on the evidence of the power and glory of God which the book of nature discloses, be able to turn with still higher satisfaction to the brighter evidences of these and other attributes of the Divinity, which are exhibited by the holy Scriptures ! No. LIV. P^. XV. It seems probable, that this Psalm was composed by David, when he brought the ark up from the house of Obed Edom, and placed it in the tabernacle on mount Zion, 2 Sam. VI. (1) 'm^ and i3l2J^ , lit. who shall dwell, sojourn, i. e. who shall be an acceptable, habitual worshipper there ? The answer follows. (2) ?tbin, walketh,i. e. conducteth, demeaneth himself.— 'p^'T!., and speaketh, the Part, only (in Kal) having such a signification. Piel is the usual conjugation, which has such a meaning. — riTai* , for nja.N , 107. 2. — i^iba ) «'ith his heart, i. e. who sincerely, hear- tily, speaks truth. (3) ban , lit. runs about, metaph. goes about slandering. — iS, 188 NOTES ON NOS. LIV. LV. Ps. 15: 3, ETC. PART III. with, used sometimes before a noun signifying the instrument, in the same manner as a . — OT2"ib , from t^?J'^ , Dec. IX., 336. Note 4; lit. Ms associate. — Nip: , utters. — iilf? , suff. of Si'ijr . (4) tarn: , Part. Niph.— n{*l , "i but, in an antithetic parallelism, such as the present. — Snrib , Hiph. Inf. of S=l"i, (and not for 1!^?.!^ ) *s some have taken it) ; lit. to do evil. Rosenmueller and De Wette : Malum facere, in the moral sense. But how will this consist with what precedes and follows? Therefore I construe yirtls , to do that which is disagreeable, unpleasing. So S"! and ns'n are often taken, specially before B';:i2'2 . Most evidently the writer could not design to represent the man as acceptable to God, who is sworn to do moral evil, and perseveres in it. Ad sensum the word is rendered, in our Eng. Version, to his oirni hurt. — "la^ ='1''a^ , 63, from 11 B . — isp3 etc., his money he does not loan on usury, or with usury ; for this was forbidden among the Hebrews, see Ex. 22: 25. Lev. 25: 36, 37. — Ihizjl etc., he takes not a bribe etc., i. e. as a judge he will not be bribed to condemn the innocent. — BIH'; , Fut. Niph., shall not he moved, i.e. he may always dwell in thy tabernacle ; or, he shall never be in danger. The Part. fito'S is here in the const, state, before the pron. !i^N, 531, and comp. 433. d. No. LV. Ps. I. (l)-:3''Nrt •^■lajj, O beatitudines illius viri! — ^^M Nb , walks not., i. e. is not conversant with, is not familiar with, does not de- mean himself agreeably to. — iSy , in pause, standeth not, i. e. does not await the company of sinners, does not associate with them. — aiiJiail etc., and does not sit in the seat ofscorners, indicates a still more intimate familiarity with the wicked than the preceding oxi- Xog. — tl'^ab , those who make a mock at religion and virtue. The repetition of the same idea, (the same with a slight variation), in the three different czlxoi, means ; ' Who does not in any way what- ever unite with, or act like, the wicked.' (2) DN ■'3 , but if, i. e. ' happiness to the man who does not PART III. NOTES ON NO. LV. Ps. 1: 3 6. 189 walk, etc. hut if'ya the law of the Lord, etc., [then happiness to him !] — irriinlnn , and on Ids law will he meditate, etc. — Da'T' Mb^b"] , hy day and by night, i. e. continually, habitually. (3) TVTC] ,for he shall be. — ^jbs , channels, canals, rivulets, with allusion to the method in which trees are made to flourish in the East, by means of being watered by little canals. — "I'nsa, from n^ , Dec. VIII, in its season, in due time, when one expects it, thus subjecting the owner to no disappointment. — bl'a^ , from b33 , with ys.\ fulcrum in the ultimate, 64. — bisT etc., either, all which it [the tree] may produce, shall come to maturity ; or, all which he undertakes shall prosper. Usage will support either interpretation. In order to avoid tautology, I prefer the latter ; as do Rosenmuel- ler and De Wette. The former is followed by the Chaldee, Faber, Knapp, and others. (4) ^."isb , not so, i. e. it shall not go thus prosperously with the wicked. — DJ? i3 , but. — yHl=yJ3n3 , but [he shall be] like the chaff. — !)3E'!iPi , Fut. Kal of ^"V^ , with epenthetic suffix. ; for !|3_...Ti:N, see 478. (5) =iap.^ S5b , shall not stand, shall not abide, i. e. shall not con- tinue to hold their place, or to keep in it — tasaian , in judgment, i, e. when [God] judges; which may relate either to this world, or to the next, or to both. The proposition is general. — fi'^Ntati'! , I nor, 558. Note. — nny? , i. e. sinners [shall not stand] with or in the assembly of the righteous, they shall not be associated with them nor partake of their rewards. (6) S-p"^ , (like the Greek ytvcaaxo)), approves, is pleased with, regards with favour ; comp. in Ps. 144: 3. Amos 3: 2. Nah. 1: 7. — ?T11, manner of life, the course pursued, viz. course of conduct. — "O.^n , but the way which the wicked pursue, leads to destruc- tion, perishes. So De Wette : " Fiihrt zum Verderben." The way itself (an abstract thing) cannot be said literally to perish ; but the counsel, designs, and efforts of the wicked, (which constitute their way, i. e. manner of life), may well be said to he frustrated, (^a^{n) ; and this seems to be the meaning of the writer here. Comp. Matt. 7: 13, 14, ' Broad is the way which leadeth to des- truction, etc' 190 NOTES ON NO. LVI. Ps. 84: 1 5. PART III. The general sentiment and nature of this Psahn, probably occa- sioned its being placed at the head of the whole c?5'3 > of thine anointed one, i. e. of David whom thou hast anointed to be king. (11) PlsiPltJin, Hiph. of fllD; standing upon the threshold. — ")!l'7a , rather than dwelling. (12) ^hs, grace, favour. — 11331 , and abundance, i. e. abundant favour, 440 ; or 1133 may be interpreted as meaning splendid and honourable state or condition. For the former sense of 1133 , see Ps. 49: 17. Is, 10: 3. 66: 12, et al.— ti-'ana vdbW: , to those who live in an upright manner, who behave themselves with integrity. No. LVII. Ps. XC. The title attributes this Psalm to Moses ; nor is there any thing in the contents of it, which would render it improbable that he was the author. If we suppose that it was written by him, near the close of life, and after a great part of the adults who came out of Egypt with him had fallen in the wilderness, in consequence of having incurred the divine displeasure, we shall see a force and beauty in the language which are peculiar, and well become the pen to which they are attributed. (1) pS'n , dwelling place, but here in a secondary sense, refuge. — 15b , Dat. commodi,for us, i. e. for men such as we are; for so the extent of the following words direct us to construe this, in as much as 1111 Ilia cannot be said of any one generation, and therefore not of that merely which was contemporary with Moses. (2) 11^.'; , in pause, 146, lit. were begotten, or were born. So the creation of the mountains is sometimes expressed ; see a simi- lar expression respecting the dew, in Job 38: 28, 29 ; and also re- specting Wisdom, Prov. 8: 24, 25.— bbl nni , or thou hadst brought forth, viz. formed, created ; a figurative mode of expression, of the same nature as the birth of the tnountains above. — b^ni y^.i? , the earth and the habitable world. When conjoined, as here, b^S^ means, orbis hahitdbilis, olxovfitvrj' and so it is often taken for the inhabitants of a land. But in many cases, there is no difference PART III. NOTES ON NO. LVII. Ps. 90: 2 9. 193 between 7-jtj and ban.— bN n!nN , thou art God, i. e. always the same, always God ; there is no change, no failure, incident to thee. (3) But how different is man ! Thou turnest him i<32-1J>-, lit. until he is crushed, i. e. until he becomes dust, or, to the dust, lavij, return, i. e. to dust; comp. Gen. 3: 19. (4) Exceedingly diverse from this is the condition of the ever- lasting God ; who is not affected by any succession or length of time ; — 13 etc., but with him, or before him, a thousand years etc. — ;ianiJ fii''3 , like the day of yesterday, or like yesterday. — i'::!;] 13 , when it passes away ; a vivid image, descriptive of faint impressions on our minds, which is proverbial in the mouth of even the multitude. — rTliaiUNI , i. e. iin^a-aNSI , 3 being brought from the preced- ing oxixog, 562. — riblba, during the night. The question has been disputed, whether the Old Testament makes mention of on- ly three watches ; or (like the New Testament, Mark 13: 35) re- cognizes _/oMr. The former is altogether the most probable ; see Judg. 7: 19. The object of this comparison is like that of the pre- ceding one, viz. to represent as it were the nothingness of a thou- sand years, in respect to the eternity of God. Rosenmueller con- strues this verse differently, and (as it seems to me) with a loss of the antithesis which the poet designed to present. (5) DPiMTT, lit. thou dost overwhelm them, i.e. thou dost sweep away them [men], as with a flood. — l''"'^ i^^'ij, a sleep are they, L e. they vanish or pass away like sleep, or as a dream. — Slbn; they shoot up, spring up, like grass in the morning, i. e. like grass when the dews of night have refreshed it. (6) yia-; , Fut Kal of ya , [which] blooms in the morning.— Jlbni , (in pause), and shoots up. At evening bbia'^ , one cuts it down, 500. — ^iZJa^'l , and it withers ; a beautiful image of the brevity of human life, often repeated by the sacred writers. (7) =l3i]3::— '3,ybr2«e are consumed., 181. Note 2; from rtS- (8) 'm , Praet. Kal. 2 person, from n''ii} , and put for nnia , 293.— Ijyjbs: , 41 and 63, suff. state of Qlbj" , pass. Part, of ob? ; lit. our hidden thing, i. e. our secret sin. — ^"'rs 'lINlob , in thy light, i. e. in full light, thou hast fully disclosed our secret sins. (9) 13B , turn, revolve, pass away, or vanish, because of thine in- 25 194 NOTES NO. NO. LVII. Ps. 90: 9 16. part III. dignation. — Our years =15''ls3, we spend or finish. — iJ33, as, poet, for 3 . — ran , a sigh, a murmur or a thought ; another very vivid image of the brevity and misery of human hfe. (10) IS'^n'WiJ 'Vy] , as to the days of our years, Nom. abs., 415. — Drja , lit. in them are 70 years, i. e. they include 70 years. — ^^1S33 QN'i , and if by reason of strength, i. e. robustness of body, there be 80 years. — ti3!i"i"i , from ajjh , yet is their pride, i. e. that of which men boast or in vphich.they pride themselves. — b'ns , trouble, vexation, — 'jliS , sorrow, wretchedness ; for pN means, tlie consequences of sin, i. e. misery, as well as sin. — TS , from T=ia , [their pride] passes away. — ^IJTi , swiftly. — i'lSSiJ , Fut. parag. 1 plur. of P|=t5>, and we flyaway; another image of the rapid decline of our days. (11) S'li^~^J3 etc., who knoweth the poieer of thine anger, in re- ference to the destruction of human hfe, when the divine displeas- ure is incurred.— Tjn-iay ^ni<-)'^S:i, and according to thy fear, i. e. in such a manner as becomes due reverence toward thee, [who ac- knowlegdeth, S'li"'"''?;], thine indignation 7 Meaning: 'Who knows the extent to which the power of thine anger may punish : and who acknowledges, with becoming reyerence, thine awful indignation V In this simple way of interpreting, this difficult verse becomes quite plain. (12) snin ]3, so make us to know, teach us. — niaai; , to com- pute, number; i.e. make us so to reckon upon the brevity of human life.— i«"'i51_ , Fut. Kal. of Ni2 , that we may acquire. — nain ::ib, lit. a heart of wisdom, i. e. a wise understanding, 440. (13) IniVd, Imp. parag., turn away, viz. from thy wrath.— •'na-'T? , hoio long ? A ammjaig standing for, ' How long wilt thou delay to have compassion V (14) "i|7.33 , lit. in the morning, i. e. soon, early, speedily. — b52 , during all. (15) nia"^, according to the days, i. e. make us glad for as long a time as thou hast afflicted us.— m:ttj , i. e. nirijs, like niars, 561. c. (16)rti*^_-;, Fut. Niph. of l-!8-j .— 'T'lrys , thy works, viz. of deliverance, aid; Nom. to ntj-j:, 489. But other copies make PART III. NOS. LVII. LVIII. Ps. 90: 16, ETC. 195 '^bi'S , sing. — Tl^tt] , and thy glory, i. e. the glory of thy,benig- nky ; oomp. Ex. 33: 18, 19. (17) Di'b , kindness. — ^3"''1.» •^TP?'? > the work of our hands, i. e. (if we refer this to the times of Moses) our undertaking, viz. to reach the promised land.-^lijsis. Imp. parag. of Polel, render sta- ble, secure. — ^li'^b.^ , to us, for us ; the sense of b? not uhfrequently agrees with that of bN and b . The wish above expressed, is repeated in the final clause, in accordance with the earnestness of the writer's feelings. The whole Psalm is acknowledged, by all critics of taste, to be one of the most beautiful of all the elegiac compositions which the Scriptures exhibit. Who can read it, especially in a season of af- fliction, without feeling its power and admiring its excellence 1 No. LVIII. Prov. XXIII. 29—35. (29) ^IN, moy, woe; also the interjection O! which is an ex- pression of woe. — '^i!3N , sorrow, a paronomasia of the preceding form here, for the sake of consonance with '^TN, 571. a. — B'^Sl'io, from 'Jlitt , Dec. III. in the singular ; the plur. has Vav moveable, as if from a sing. 'j'HH. — h'^i? , complaint, complaining.— 'a'^V'^'B , wounds. — sari , without reason, gratuitously, i. e. without being en- gaged in honourable warfare, without fighting against the enemies of his country. The ignoble cause of a drunkard's wounds is, by implication, set in antithesis to the cause of a patriot-warrior's wounds. — nibbpH , dulness of eyes., an exceedingly characteristic trait of the appearance of the drunkard, after his intoxication. The dull, heavy, (as we say) glassy appearance of the eye, is an obvious and well known trait of intemperance. In the text of Van der Hooght, the first b of this word has a Munahh over it, which is omitted here because it is an error. (30) Now follows the answer to the above questions.-t3'''ilnNab, to those who delay, to those who tarry long etc., is woe etc.-— bg •J "^ ■" n over the wine, or at the wine. Before U'^lflNa!; , and B'^NSib (to those who go, from NT a), the words woe, sorrow, 'etc., are ob- viously implied ; i. e. to such persons as delay etc, all the woes enu- 196 NOTES ON NO. Lviii. Prov. 23:30 — 35. part hi- merated belong. — "iTptlb (l fulcrum, 64), lit. to seek out, to inves- tigate, which means here, to taste, to make trial of. It seems like an ironical expression, borrowed from the language which drunk- ards employ, when they represent themselves as tasting, proving' wine ; a soft expression in their mouth, to describe the excessive drinking of it. — ^DMH , mingled wine, i. e. wine mingled with drugs of an intoxicating nature, wine in which such drugs were steeped. (31) N'in-bN, Fut. apoc. KaJ of rjiJT; thou must not look, 5M. i. — ■'3 , when. — U'lNn'; (in pause), when it looks red; which is the distinguishing trait of wine that is most approved by the people of the East. E. g. Olearius (Travels) states, that the Armenians col- our their white wines with log-wood, or saffron, in order to make them red. — ^fi^ '^3 etc., lit. when it shall present its eye in the cup, i. e. when it shall sparkle (as we say), when it shall foam with the gas which is in it, and have a lively, sparkling taste. The Hebrew expression has great vivacity. — ti'^T.^iKia ^r.'ini > ^^ S"^^ [down] smoothly ; which is characteristic of the best of soft wine. — a'''lTa"'B3 means, directly, straightly, i. e. without any impediment, smoothly or easily. (32) in''")tlN etc., as to its latter end, or as to the sequel of it, like a serpent will it bite. — ^^1 , Fut. Kal in pause, from ?|UJ3 . — 1I}"1E2, Hiph. from 'ii^^, which means to separate, to divide. But the Syriac Aphel (Hiphil) of this verb, t..«is| , means punxii. Hence we may render here, stings, wounds. This description of the consequences of intoxication is exceedingly vivid. I know not how it could be made more so. (33) ni'lT , Part. fem. of "ilT, strange women, i.e. prostitutes; one of the natural and usual consequences of intemperate drinking. — "as'l , et animus tuus, i. e. thou thyself, 475. 2. c. — niSSfin , per- verse things ; another natural consequence of the same beastly vice. (34) ^llSiUS, like one who lays himself down, i. e. in order to ob- tain sleep. — aba (Sb), in the midst, lit. in the heart. — ball , prob. mast. By the first image, the reding of the drunkard is designat- ed ; by the last, both his reeling and his extreme danger are char- acterised with a powerful hand. (35) '':i2r; , Hiph. of nsj , they have stricken me, [shall he PART III. Nos. Lviii. nx. Prov. 23:35, etc. 197 say] ; for 'lajit'' is here implied, 555. — Tii^jh ba , [yet] I fdt not the pain, i. e. they have stricken me when I was insensible to the wounds, and could make no efforts to escape them. — '';=;aV~, they have thrust at me, ""RSt!^ -? , [when] I knew it not. So much for complaint, on account of the beating and wounds which the drunkard had received in his broils. But all this does not wean him from his cups. No sooner has he finished the com- plaints, which his pain at first occasions after he has awaked from intoxicated sleep, than he again thirsts for the fatal cup, and asks; — V"'i5N "'na , when shall T rouse up? an exquisite stroke delineat- ing the inertness, lassitude, and drowsiness, which are not yet shaken off, and under which he is now impatient, because they keep him from his cups. — ^J'^DIN, i. e. f)"'uii< "ina , when shall I aM? when shall 1 again? 533. — ISiaplN , Piel Fut., Dagh. omit- ted in p , 73. Note 3 ; — n5_ epenth. suffix, referring to 'J';^ wine. — iSs , yet more ; i. e. the first inquiry of the person, who awakes from his intoxicated state, indicates an impatience to repeat his draughts. What can be more to the life, than this 1 No. LIX. Job IV. 12—21. (12) "^bNI, now to me, or moreover to me. — lip,^, (in pause), was a matter secretly brought or disclosed. And mine ear received yavp. , a whisper, respecting it or of it ; i. e. it was whispered, q. d. secretly communicated to me. A preparation by the speaker for the narration which follows, and well adapted to excite attention. (13) 'In the thoughts ni 3 i">T ha , [which s.xQse\ from the vis- ions of the night,' i. e. in a dream, or nocturnal vision ; as the fol- lowing (jTtxog shews. — bbJa , 520 and 521. a. (14) "'2i<"ip., came upon me, N'ij5 in a like sense with iTlp, 279. — i-ii , lit. the multitude, here put for b'3 , all. (15) h=l^1 ,for a spirit. — ' The hair of my flesh I??.!?!! , was stiff with horror ;' a most vivid image of fear and alarm. (16) "iai'^ , viz.. r!=l"l . — T'SN , Hiph. of "ISD , / could not dis- cern or distinguish, 504, i. — ^^lijt"!^ , its countenance. — n;1?:3n, a form, image only, was before my eyes ; i. e. he could not, on ac- 198 NOTES ON NO. Lix. Job 4: 16 — 19. part hi. count of terror, look on it steadily enough to recognize What its fea- tures were ; he only saw an indistinct form : all which is graphi- cally expressive of terror and astonishment. — h'ipl n^a^ , lit. silence and a voice, i. e. a low voice, a whisper, Hendiadys 569 ; it is fine- ly adapted to increase the awe and solemnity of the whole. (17) ' Shall mortal man be more just than God?' — 1:^5 , ne, in- terrogative. 'Shall man ('i^S in pause for ISS) be purer than his Maker V (18) V'laS'a, ira Jds sei-vants, i. e. those who are more imme- diately employed by him in heaven, as the following orixos shews. — And to his angels he attributes ~^!^n , folly, error, i. e. compar- ed with his own infinite perfection. (19) !1^ , how much less ; so Rosenmueller and Gesenius, sup- posing it to stand for "'3 SjN . The sense is good ; but we may come to the same idea with a less violent ellipsis, or at least, by one which is every where practised in poetry ; i. e. by simply carry- ing forward ]''J3N;;; tJb from the preceding verse, we have a plain idea, viz. ^ii , ' surely then, [he will not Confide in] those who dwell in houses of clay, etc. ;' see 562. — ifta , irreg. const, plural of rT;a . Houses of clay is a vivid image of the frail and perisha- ble nature of human bodies. There seems to be a reference in this, also, to Gen. 3: 7. 3: 19 ; but it is not absolutely necessary to sup- pose this. — Q'liDj ■ • • T'PN., whose foundation is in the dust; an additional evidence of great frailty and of a perishable nature.^— BINS'!'; ,lit. they crush them, viz. men who dwell in houses of clay, etc. But the verb has an indefinite Nom., and is here employed in a passive sense, i. e. they are crushed before the moth ; an addi- tional and vivid image of the frailty of man ; see 500. Note 2. Ro- senmueller and Gesenius construe izSy i_j&^ , as the moth, sicut tinea, and appeal to 1 Sam. 1:16, as a confirmation of this meaning. But as this is a very doubtful sense of "'JDb, even in the case to which appeal is made ; and as the Hebrews familiarly say, ' are smitten, scattered, crushed, dispirited etc., ''JDb , before an enemy ;' I understand the phrase in a' like sense here. ' Men are crushed before the moth ;' i. e. the moth, insignificant and harmless as it ap- pears to be, has power to crush them ; a more vivid image than the other, while the usiis loquendi is better preserved. PART in. Nos. Lix. LX. Job 4: 20, ETC. 199 (20) 3'lS.b 'Ij?,-'? tfrom morning to evening, i.e. in a day, in one day, in a very short space of time. — WB.'; , Hoph. Fut. of nn3, 261. in e. g., and 146. — t:"'toKi '^baa , without any one considering. — D''iaa is a Hiph. Part, of filiU, and is a constructio praegnans, implying ab («mm«m) after it ; and a? D1U3 means, to consider. The meaning is, suddenly, i. e. before any one has time to consider or to think. In the same manner, the Hebrews use S1^ iib , one knows not, for suddenly, unexpectedly. The whole verse is exceed- ingly animated. (21) ijbri, ecce, Zo. — d3 tann-;, lit. their excellence [which is] in them ; but the pron. ds is redundant, 544. — SS3 , Niph. of 503 , lit. is torn away, viz. by violence, an intensive description of the sudden and violent manner in which human glory and fancied ex- cellence perish, or are wrested from the possessor. — nashi iibi , lit. hut not with wisdom, i. e. men die before they have made any great advances in knowledge and understanding ; another trait which strongly indicates their frail, perishable, imperfect state. The implication of the whole is this : ' How can man, so frail, so short-lived, so ignorant, and so erring, presume to be righteous before God, or to plead his merits there !' The whole picture is drawn with a master-hand, in colours so vivid and so skilfully laid on, that he must be destitute of all taste for painting of this nature, who is. not deeply penetrated with a sense of its beauty and excel- lence. No. LX. 2 Sam. XII. 1—7. The student will find an account of the occasion which gave rise to this beautiful parable, in the history of David's conduct, chap. XI., and in the context which follows the parable itself. (1) ■'Jffl, 457, a.— nniJ.,for nnN,142. a, "and 144 — •m'\,j)le- ne, for ttin , Part, of -li^"! , 270. a. 5. (2) na-in , 403. d. (3) lB"\bi , where •J3~\ is written in the usual form of the Part, in verbs I's . — b3~'J''iit , nothing at all. — AN "3 , exc^t. — njDjS , fem. pf Ita,"? .— rt»>]';i , Fut. Piel of n^h, with sufF. rt,.— ^rSJ? , of 200 Nos. Lx. Lxi. 2 Sam. 12: 2, etc. part hi. his morsel, viz. of bread, from nB , Dec. VIII. c. — MRiprn , did it drink, Im^&ci., (as also the preceding bSNPi), 504. c. So also, asuiPi which follows.— n53 , na for n:3 , 107. 2. (3) ^rfl , lit. way, journeying, here for traveller, i. e. elliptically for l^brr •iZ;"'N , 548. 6. — bbh;;;! , and he spared, i. e. he was sparing, he refrained. — riiiUS'.lb , to dress, to provide. — Nan , wlio liad come, 412. Note 1. (5) nrt^l , apoc. Fut. of tTlh . — nin^ ■'n , lit. alive is Jehovah, i. e. as Jehovah liveth, as surely as Jehovah liveth ; an oath of the highest nature. — nia—j!? ""S , it is certain as Jehovah lives, that a son of death, i. e. condemned to death, shall the man be who has done this, 444. d. (7) X"'Nn inPiN , thou art the man ; i. e. thou art the man who hast done this, viz. who hast acted in a manner which corresponds with the conduct of the rich man in this parable, and which may be justly compared to it ; thou art the man, who hast wronged and oppressed the poor, and taken from him that which was very dear to him and which was rightfully his ; thou, by thine own declaration, art the man, who is worthy of death for the crimes which he has committed. It may be seen here, that according to the laws of interpreting parables, one principal point is to be taken as the aim of the speak- er ; and this in the present case is, to illustrate the oppression and wrong which David had done to Uriah ; while all the other circum- stances of the parable are added, principally for the sake of verisi- militude and concinnity. No. LXI. Judg. IX. 6—20. (6) ■'i'.?^3 > possessors, inhabitants. — 'jibN By , by the ilex, near the ilex. — :jSM , Part. Hoph. of SS3 , planted. (7) ITa;:] , with an indef. Nom., 500. a. (8) l^bn rjibrt , 514. c. — rtSlba , mSl-khd, the points are adap- ted to the Q,eri InSb^a , which is the Imp. paragogic ; for such a form, see 212. 5. (9) '^nb'Jhn, ri interrog., 152. d. 2, which, however, supposes PART XV. NOTES ON NO. Lxi. Judg. 11 : 9 15. 201 that the following M is pointed with Q.amets. And this should be the case ; for no analogy explains the Hhateph damets here, and the word should be written and read "'Pii'ihn . — ""a TiiN , by which, through me. — DTibN IISS? > they honour God, i. e. God is honour- ed, etc., 500. Note 2, which seems to refer to the oil used in conse- cration, as in Ex. 30: 24, or to the oil which was mingled with cakes presented in sacrifice, as in Lev. 14: 10, 12, 21, 27, etc. ; and to the perfumed oils used on the head, and parts of the dress, etc., in the East. — ^S S^ih , to wave over the trees, i. e. to reign over them ; which is here designated, very appropriately to the nature of the subject, by waving over them. (12) ''Sb , Imp. fern, of ^b^ ! — FiN , pronoun fern., see 165. e. — ''^iba , the points are adapted to the Qeri, viz. '^stM , fem. Imp., see in 212. 5. — "ipibinii., as before in v. 11. — D'TjbN t!'?.iP'?V' which gladdens Elohim ; Dagh. omitted in a , 152. a. 5. The re- ference here is to the use which was made of wine in the libations, etc., which were presented to the Deity, and to the common use of it by men. — S=i:b , as before. (14) "lUSjn, the buck-t/iorn, or bramble; for Qiamets under rt, see 142. a.'No'te.— ^fba , 89. (15) t3''hilJa SRN , ye will anoint me, i.e. constitute or make me king, which was done by the ceremony of anointing ; 527. a. — Ipnh , 507. 6.— 1 on , Imp. of rtDh .— ''bS2 , from ba , Dec. VIII. The explanation of this parable or fable, immediately follows v. 15. The general object cannot be mistaken. Of com-tesy and from gratitude, if not of right, one of Gideon's lavsrful heirs should, in the view of Jotham, have been chosen for a leader in Israel, seeing that Gideon had wrought so many and such signal deliverances for them. But the men of Sheehem had slain his 70 sons, (all of the legitimate ones except Jotham), in one day. By the symbol of the olive and the vine, two of the most useful of all the fruit-trees which grow in Palestine, Jotham reminds the men of Sheehem, that the nobler branches of his family, (although they ought to have been chosen as leaders in Israel), might despise the thought of ruling over such men as the Shechemites. The bramble represents Abimeleeh ; a truly sarcastic image. The olive and the vine could speak of waving over the trees ; but as to the little stinted buck-thorn or bramble, which grows only in a barren desert, how could this toave over them ? And then the irony contained in the invitation given by it to the trees, to come and seek refuge in its shadow — the ilex and the lofty cedars of 26 202 NOTES ON NO. LXU. Is. 5: 1, 2. PART IV. Lebanon seeking refuge in the shadow of a stinted bramble-bush ! — what could be more severe upon Abimelech ? Finally, as the bram- ble assumes to itself airs of haughtiness, when it is invited to be king, and threatens vengeance to the cedars of Lebanon, in case they refuse to pay due homage to its importance ; so Jotham warns the Shechemites, that Abimelech, vile and insignificant as he was, might be expected to revenge all the slights which he would receive from them, after a Uttle time, and that mutual jealousies and contentions would destroy them both. The whole apologue is not more beautiful for the simpUcity of its language and structure, than for its eloquence, the severity of the appeal which it makes to the Shechemites, and the boldness of the man who dared thus to address the murderers of aU his father's house. No. LXII. Is. V. 1—7. (1) i<3 trn'ittJN, let me sing now, KaJ Fut. parag., from ^''iii. — ■'I'^'T'b , either respecting my beloved, or [a song] of my beloved, taking rrp'lh from the next stanza, 562. ■'1"'T'b may also be ren- dered, friend. The prophet means to represent the case of a friend of his, who had a vineyard, and who dealt with it as the sequel shews. — n'^'^UJ , before this ri'l'^iDN is implied, 562. — "''IIT (==''C'''r) , friend — IMTSb , respecting his vineyard. — 1'7r2,ore a mountain-top, or the summit of a hill; prAbably the southern as- pect of a hill is here meant, a place best adapted of all for the production of choice grapes. In Arabic, 'jnp means hill or moun- tain-summit ; and so the Swiss call their mountain-summits, Shreck- horn, Wetterhorn, Aaerhorn, etc., i.e. Terror-horn, Storm-horn, etc. — 'javu-'is , lit. the son of oil, i. e. fat, rich ; comp. 444. d. (2) inp.T?"; , he dug it up. — And he planted it with the p'lto , a noble species of vine ; at the present day, in a like sense, we could say : ' With the Madeira-vine.' — h'^M , a tower, viz. for the residence of the keeper, and for defence against predatory ravages. And he hewed out a wine-vat (sp.;;) therein, iz . — ip'^T , Piel Fut. of nip , 286. 2. — niiUSb ,for the production. — d"'-i;N2 , sour, worthless grapes ; which, after planting the pn;D , he could not well expect. After ti'^ttJNa , the word ti'^qsy (grapes) is implied. Here, as it seems to me, the parable properly ends ; as ap- PART IV. NOTES ON NO. LXII. Is. 5: 2 — 7. 203 pears from the direct address to Jerusalem and Judah, in the fol- lowing verse. It is God who speaks, in this direct address ; and in speaking employs the imagery already introduced by the parable. The interpretation of this could be attended with no difficulty on the part of those who were addressed. (3) SlOi"' and I13"'i< , each sing, generic. Judge now between me and my vineyard, i. e. judge of the case in respect to me who am your God, and yourselves who are my people. (4) nitoS^-na, 75. a; what can he done, 523. d.—iz''rr''m isbl , lit. and I have not done in respect to it, i. e. which I have not done for it. — SI-^Ta etc., why then etc., i. e. why, when I had a right to expect obedience and affection, have Israel rebelled, and rendered me evil for good 1 (5) ns'^'lfN , Hiph. Put. of yn; , / rBill shew.—IVD'S, acturus sum, 529.— 'iDri , Hiph. Inf. abs. of -ilD , elliptical for T'DN "iD.- , / will surely remove, 517. — 'iSib n^rtl , lit. and it shall he for burning, i. e. it shall be consumed, 523. d. — -15>3 is the Inf of Piel. — yhs , Inf abs. elliptical for y^BiJ yhB , I will surely break down, 517. — b irim , 507. 6, and it shall he trodden down. (6) nna , lit. I will make it an end, i. e. I will make an end of it. More probably the true reading here is JlRB , wasting, desola- tion ; comp. m'n? in Is. 7: 19.— "llS: !Sh , it shall not be dug with the mattock, hoed, or it shall not be weeded, cleaned.— 'ribS] , and there shall grow up.— bs\ , and unto.— -\-'Uiyn'q , lit. /row raining, i. e. that they shall not rain, 521. Note. Meaning of vs. 5, 6 : ' Because I have done every thing for Israel which could be done, by way of favour and blessing, and they have been altogether ungrateful and disobedient, therefore I will give them over to severe punishment, to wasting and destruc- tion.' (7) The person speaking is now changed, and the prophet him- self directly addresses his countrymen, adding a summary explana- tion of the whole, in a single sentence. The vineyard of Jehovah are the men of Israel, and the men of Judah, the plant in which he delighted, rsi wa , lit. of his delights. And he looked for justice, hut behold, murder; for equity, tut, lo ! the cry [of the oppressed]. 204 REMARKS ON NOS. LXII. LXIII. PART I r. A most striking portrait of the character and conduct of the Jews. The student will not overlook the paronomasia here ; He looked for DBUJa , and behold hStoW ; for ^!)5'i!!? , and lo ilj^SS? , 570. 6. In this figure Isaiah greatly abounds, so that it may be regarded as one of the usual characteristics of his writing. In interpreting this parable, Gesenius makes it to end with v. 6 ; and in regard to ni^N d"'3Sn bs} , he remarks, that ' the wri- ter has fallen out of his fiction here,' inasmuch as the owner of the vineyard is a man merely, and cannot command the clovds. Eichhorn also, feeling the like difficulty, has rendered STl.^N by heschwSren, to conjure, to exorcise ! — a liberty sufficiently great. But on the ground above stated, viz. that the parable properly ends with v. 4, (which seems to be plain from the change in the language, for would the prophet's friend, in his song, address the men ofJudah andJerwscdem?) there is no need of charging Isaiah with having forgotten himself in writing — a charge to which he is as little exposed as any author whom I could name ; nor of introducing an exorcist into the scene. Did the vine-dressers of Judea, (who had so much occasion for time- ly rains, and for the want of which they often suffered much), seri- ously believe, that they could exorcise the clouds, and make them pour down the rain, or refrain from pouring it down ? If not, how can the verisimilitude of the parable be kept up, by representing the vine-dresser as declaring that he would exorcise the clouds, so that they should not rain ? Where is there any parallel to this .' The whole parable, and the application of it, is exceedingly strik- ing and beautiful. The moral impression is of a high and awful na- ture, and leaves the mind deeply affected with the guilt of ingratitude and disobedience, on the part of those who are continually receiv- ing unnumbered blessings from heaven. No. LXIII. Ps. LXXX. 9—20. This exquisite composition is ascribed, in the title, to Asaph. But whether it was Asaph so noted in the time of David for his skUl in music, and probably in song (I Clu-on. 15: 19), there is nothing which can certainly determine. Some have assigned tliis Psalm to a period as late as the time of the Maccabees ; others to the time of Jehoshaphat ; and some to that of Joram ; all without any definite and satisfactoiy reasons. On the contrary, v. 3 seems evidently to refer to a state of things in Palestine, antecedent to the division of the ten tribes ; nay, one might almost suspect, antecedent to the time in which the tribe of Benjamin was neai-ly destroyed, Judg. 20:41, seq. ; for the reference in the Psalm appears to be to those tribes which were, at the time of wa-iting it, of conspicuous military significance PART IV. NOTES ON NO. IXIII. Ps. 80: 9 — 15. 205 and power. On the whole, however, one may assign it to the Asaph who WM contemporary with David ; and the occasion of it seems to have been, some reverse in war which David had suflfered, and the consequent destruction of some part of his kingdom. The ardent intercession which the writer makes for his suffering people, in the first pai-t of the Psalm, is crovmed by the allegory or parable which concludes the piece, and which is one of the most ex- quisite of all this species of composition that can any where be found. (9) S'^BR , hast thou removed, hast thou transplanted, for so the nature of the image requires it to be rendered. — Thou didst drive out the heathen [the Canaanites], tl¥.Bni , Fut. Kal of SBJ , with sufRx ; and didst plant it, viz. the vine, i. e. Israel. (10) rT'SS , thou didst make room, thou didst remove, viz. what- ever stood in its way. — uiniZJni , and cause to take root. — n'^aj'iui , sho'rd-shh-hd, 68. (11) ^D3 , kos-su, with Qaraets Hhateph; see in Par. I. Pual. nViSj [by] the shade of it, the Abl. of instrument. — n"'Q2Sl , and [by] the shoots of it, [were] the cedars of God [covered] ; =IB3 is implied after these last nouns, and is to be adduced from the pre- ceding arlxog, 563. Cedars of God, lofty cedars, 456. e. Rosen- mueller and De Wette understand this comparison to mean only, ' like the cedars.' (12) fn''~i"'iP , its branches, luxuriant shoots that were to be pruned off, as the etymology of the word shews. — B; , i. e. the Mediterranean Sea, the western boundary of Palestine. — in; , i. e. the Euphratess the eastern boundary of Palestine ; see Gen. 15: 18. rT'ljipJI'' , i. e. it sent forth its branches, nViBR from the pre- ceding otIxoS- The imagery thus far presents a lively representation of the flourishing state of the Hebrews, after they had been transplanted from Egypt to Palestine. Next comes the reverse of this prosper- ous condition ; the imagery being still kept up. (13) tT'll* , why has thou broken down its hedges, and thus exposed it to be devoured 1 as follows — So that all who pass by the way ?7=nN , crop it off, devour it ; from niN . (14) n'siSap-!?'' . Fut. Pilel, from the pluriliteral fiij-iB , 300. 3. —^y»j2 , out of the forest, or belonging to the forest,— •'•j^ V]] , 206 NOTES ON NO. Lxiii. Ps. 80: 14 — 19. paet it. and the wild beast (lit. the moving creature) of the field; from TIT , to move about. — fis:?'!'^ , Fut. Kal of iiS"! , devours it, or feeds upon it. (15) Thus far the wasted, desolate condition of the country ; or at least of that part of it which is the subject of complaint. And now follows supplication in its behalf. — iViJ , return, turn back, viz. from thine anger. — Daii , from Ui: . (16) ilSDl , and protect [it] ; so Ges. and LXX. Rosenmueller and others, plantam, i. e. plant ; but with a less certain etymology. I take it as the Imp. parag. of 'j;3 . — Protect what thou hast plant- ed with thine own right hand. The parallel (sxl%og explains the figure. — 13~b5'! , i. e. 'J5~i'? !^3S^ , yea, protect the son, viz. Israel, often called a son, see Hos. 11: 1. — ^^ Tir{S{ni^,whom thou hast es- tablished for thyself i. e. to whom thou hast given a settled abode in the promised land, and that they may be a people devoted to thee. (17) tlS'na) , Part. pass. fern, of Jl'nto; burned in the fire is the vine, etc. The writer, from the strength of his feelings, again re- turns to complain of the desolation which had been made. — ntilDS, Part. pass, of nD3 ; cut off, cut up. — ^''jS n^saw , lit. at the rebuke of thy countenance, which may be retained ; or we may render sim- ply, at thy rebuke, 475. 2. 6. — 11i6<"' , in pause; the meaning is, either that the vines perish, or that the Israelites (the fi'^ia referred to in the preceding verse) perish. (18) Let thy hand be ■ii'^N bs , over the man, i. e. let it protect him. — '^iS'^M'; ■>:i"'^? , lit. the man of thy right hand, i. e. Israel whom thy right hand has planted and established ; comp. 424, for the latitude of the signification of the Gen. case. — 'ja-b? etc., as in the preceding verse. (19) The writer pleads that this supplication may be answered, because distresses have not come upon them in consequence of apostasy from the worship of the true God : We have not turned back from thee. — «"'?h!n, Piel of M^ti , lit. restore us to life, i. e. rescue us from our distressing condition, in which our very life is endangered. — ^asini), for by thy name are we called; another motive why they should experience the interposition of God's pro- tecting hand. PART IV. NOTES ON NOS. LXIII. LXIV. Ps. 80: 20, etc. 207 (20) Jehovah! [God of] the armies of heaven, =i:a''ttjrt, bring us hack, viz. from our calamitous state, restore us, viz. to our former condition. — '^'IB "INI^ , Hiph. Imp. of "liit , lit. make thy face to shine, i.e. look propitiously upon us. — !ny"i25=i^:'i , 1st pars, plur. of Fut. Niph. parag., from 5>U5^; and we shall he delivered, viz. from our troubles and distresses. The temper of mind, the subdued yet deep feeling of soul, which the writer exhibits ; the delicacy of his touches, the simplicity of his imagery, the earnestness with which he pleads for his people and country, the high sense of dependance on the mercy of God which he evidently cherishes, and the unaffected manner in which the whole is presented ; unitedly constitute one of the most delightfol pictures of this nature which has ever been drawn. May he who reads, leai-n to plead for himself and for others with such fervency, and with such a humble yet confiding spirit ! No. LXIV. Ezek. XVII. 1—10. For an account of the historical facts which gave rise to the par- able before us, the reader is referred to 2 Kings XXIV. and XXV. ; also 2 Chron. XXVI., Jer. LIL, and Jahn's Hebrew Commonwealth, § XLIII. The sum of the historical facts, to which reference has now been made, is as follows. Jehoiachim or Jeconiah, the son of Jehoiakim, came to the throne of Judah when he was eighteen years of age ; and after he had reigned three months, the king of Babylon came up against him, besieged Jerusalem, and cai-ried away into captivity Je- hoiachim, his household, his nobles and princes, the artificers and wealthy men of the country, with the treasures of the temple and of the Jewish state. In the room of Jehoiachim, the king of Babylon made Zedekiah king. After a few years, he and his court, growing uneasy under the yoke of Nebuchadnezzar, determined to shake it off; and to effect this purpose, they made a treaty with the king of Egypt, who stipulated to render them assistance against any inva- sion on the part of the king of Babylon. It was to reprove the treachei-y of this revolt on the part of Zedekiah, contrary to his ex- press covenant and league, that the prophet Ezekiel composed the allegory before us. The first great eagle represents the king of Bab- ylon ; the cropping of the cedars of Lebanon, his invasion of Pales- tine, and carrying away Jechoniah its king, with his nobles and treasures ; and his planting a vine in a fi-uitful field, is the symbol of his making Zedekiah king, and placing him under circumstances fa- vourable to prosperity, so long as he would maintain his allegiance. The second great eagle represents the king of Egypt ; the vine bend- 208 NOTES ON NO. Lxiv. Ezck. 17: 2, 3. part iv. ing her roots and shooting out her branches toward hira, is a symbol of Zedekiah seeking for alliance with the king of Egypt, and for aid from him. The questions whether this conduct shall prosper, are designed to show, that every effort of this nature on the part of Zed- ekiah will be utterly frustrated, and will end in his own destruction. God had determined, that the 70 years' exile at Babylon should be accomplished ; and no counsels or efforts of wicked men could frustrate his purpose. The reader will find, in vs. 11 — 21, an explanation of the parable by the prophet himself, which rests on the basis just described. (2) tll"'ri "11 n , lit. aenigmatice loquere aenigma, propound a riddle, or utter an allegory/. — hp'O bilJB , lit- compare a comparison, i. e. propound a similitude. The noun fl'l'^h characterizes the enigmatical nature of the allegory which follows; while b IB a is designed to express the figurative nature of the discourse. — n"'3 bN may mean, to the house of Israel ; or it may mean, concerning the house of Israel. The latter is the more probable, in this place. (3) iin^n TiJ|rt , the great eagle; or (as we should say in En- glish) a great eagle. This is one of those cases of the use of the article, where the definiteness of .it must be referred to the state of the writer's own mind ; see 411. Note 2. — t!"B23ri bil-i , with the adjective in the const, state, 453 a. S)33 means, the whole wing as a member. — "^^.SitvJ , pinion, quill (as we say) ; i. e. with long pin- ions. — rtSJiS , plumage, feathers. The enumeration of each partic- ular is designed for ornament and impression. — nTSp'iM , parti- colour, variegation of hues. Bochart (Hieroz. II. p. 749, ed. Lips.) describes the stellar eagle as marked with variegated spots, and as being the largest species of ' the King of , birds.' Such an one is therefore a proper emblem of the powerful king of Babylon. •jisi^n (white mountain), I understand as merely the symbol of Palestine. The king of Babylon entered Palestine from the north ; and therefore passed through some of the Lebanon ridge of mountains. The loftiest peak in all that region, is one in the Leb- anon ridge, a part of which is almost perpetually covered with snow ; which last circumstance, no doubt, gave rise to the name of the mountain. — nnas means, the topmost tender twigs and leaves ; the significant symbol of the king of Judah, who was a youth of only 18 years of age, when carried away in exile to Babylon. PART IV. NOTES ON NO. Lxiv. Ezek. 17: 4 — 6. 209 (4) mp'':'J , lit. the sucklings, meaning the young and tender shoots; and "JBt}"! of course designates the topmost ones. — S)t2p , he plucked of, in pause.— !irtiS''S';n , and he brought it, where the'pro- noun agrees with the preceding singular, lUNn . — 'jSp", of mer- chandize, (not Canaan a proper name) ; which is descriptive of Babylon, so famous for its wares and merchandize ; comp. Rev. 18: 10, seq. And so the next clause leads us to explain ^?53 , viz. in the city of merchants he deposited it ; i. e. the king of Babylon carried away the youthful Jehoiachin to his own land. (5) ff'lTa , of the seed, some of the seed, i. e. a seedling of the country. Meaning : ' The king of Babylon took Zedekiah, who belonged to the country of Palestine, and made him king.' The sequel shows that the vine is referred to here, as the symbol em- ployed by the writer ; WnT , therefore in this case must mean, shoot, sucker, slip (as we say) ; for vines are not propagated by seed, this being a very slow and uncertain method of propagation. (6) S'^T fi'itoa , in a seedrfield, i. e. in a spot of land appropri- ate to nourishing the shoot which was to be planted. — hj5 , proba- bly for npb ; see 107. 1. 6,— and also Hos. 11: 3, finj? for ti'npb . The form, however, is unique. The meaning of njJ here is, brought ; see Gesen. Lex. tlisb , No. 9. — Di^n &■;» hs , to abundant waters. There are some vines which grow best on high hills and dry places. There are others which flourish best by the side of marshes and streams. — !iB^s:£ , [like] the willow did he make or place it. It is difficult to determine with certainty what riBSES means ; but that it designates some shrub or tree which has its proper place near streams, is obvious from the context. And of these, none is more appropriate than the willow. For the ellipsis of 3, the particle of similitude, see 561. c. — )ti^_ shews that the vine is referred to by the S'HT mentioned above. — nh'lb , widely diffused, spreading out widely. — tiaip nlbsu) , of low stature, i. e. it Spread out widely, but did not run upwards; which desig- nates the flourishing condition of fruit-vines in their best state, when the fruit is all accessible to the owner. — V^N niasj; , so as to turn its shoots toward him, viz. toward the great ea- gle which planted it. For r\'Msh, , the Infinitive used in a defi- 27 210 NOTES ON NO. Lxiv. Ezek. 17: 7 — 9. part iv. nite way, see 523. This expresses the dependence of Zedekiab upon the king of Babylon, who had appointed him to office. THiiT^JT etc., and its roots were under it or him ; for the suffix in T TIT : ' T^nhn may refer to the vine, or to the eagle. In the former case, the meaning would be, that it became rooted, i. e. firmly fixed, or that its roots were confined to a narrow circle (under it), and did not extend themselves far abroad, as the roots of vines usually do ; thus designating the limited nature of Zedekiah's dominion. In the latter case, the meaning would be, that the vine was under the eagle as its protector and guardian ; i. e. Zedekiab stood in such a relation to the king of Babylon. The former seems to be the most natural method of construing it. Qi^a to3>ril , and it produced branches ; which is designed to shew more fully its flourishing state. — r)i";NSi (for rii'iSO 118), twigs with leaves. Such was the flourishing state of Zedekiah, so long as he was under the fostering care of the first great eagle, viz. the king of Babylon. Let us now see the change which he underwent, by seeking new protection and alliance. (7) ^^N. seems here to be equivalent to our English article a.— iri3S3, lit. to hunger and thirst after; which is hardly applicable to the present case. The meaning seems necessarily to be, directed with strong desire, turned with eagerness, its roots towards him, i.e. toward the second great eagle ; and so the sequel would lead us to interpret the word. — fiia'n?.'?. i from the conductors, i.e. sluices for water, in allusion to the method of watering gardens and vineyards in the East. Rosenmueller renders nii'l^.a hy ex areolis ; but the connection here is better consulted by the rendering above given ; and the etymology will favour it. — TJSJS'a , of his plantation. (8) In a good field, and ly much water, had it been planted, in order to bring forth ^2S , shoots, and to produce fruit. — fiNfcb, fem. Inf. of Nipa , riNii) for nsjip , 119. c.S; b, 152. b. 2.— "''is', 148. a, comp. 149. — nn'jN (in pause), fem. Segholate form of 1"''7N , formation in 323. c. 3, noble, splendid. (9) nbSt^, to be read and construed as a question, 557. — isbin, eece. — pM'^ , i. e. he, the king of Babylon, the first eagle, shall PART. IV. NOTES ON NO. Lxiv. Ezek. 17:9, 10. 211 pluck up, etc.— ODip^ , Peel of DD)5 . — i it shall continually wither or dry up. — nj"!?. nhBS , hy the sluices which caused it to sprout, shall it wither ; i. e. all the advantages which it possesses by its new alliance, will not save it when the time of drought comes. This plainly signifies, the utter insufficiency of Zedekiah's new alliance with Egypt to protect him against the incursion of the king of Babylon ; and also the certainty that this new alliance would be the cause of his destruction. And so the fact was. The king of Egypt fled at the approach of Nebuchadnezzar's forces ; and Ze- dekiah being deserted fell an easy prey to the mighty conqueror of the East. The reader of discernment and taste, will easily perceive the char- acteristic difference between this pai-able, and those which precede it. The difference in style is, for aught that I can perceive, as great among the sacred writers, as among Greek, Roman, or English ones ; a convincing proof, that, whatever was the aid which inspiration af- forded, it did not abolish, and probably did not much diminish, the native differences of taste and style among the sacred writers. Of all the prophets, Ezekiel indulges a powerful imagination the most, in his imagery, and is least governed by rhetorical rules. There is a luxuriance of metaphor and of diction in him, which is characteristic of oriental writings even at the present time, particularly among the Persians and Arabians. APPENDIX CONTAINING EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. VERBS. No. I, (§212, seq. Par. I.) taaj? naj? ^p_o ^jpa loa vhj2 laa ]ffl^ laj?^ (a) ^El? ^i^l? SI? "i53D Maj oaiB -jDto ■nttij? yaj? No. II. (§220, seq. Par. II.) (pn-i) pa-i 6^^) Vap (]aaj) ia^ (ins) ins («) t(^i5) ^la J (buj) Vst) Vd; ffip^ -13; ]bp (6) No. III. (Comp. § 78 seq.) affiS a^S D53 D^3 Iffll pH ^T5 ^aa np3 !?D3 5 IE?: No. IV. (Comp. § 78 seq.) toip Vap aJBia ^bq ^sd -ids n:i» !?3D p^ lat No. V. (Comp. § 78 seq.) i 51SE 51BE riMs 1532 'TjaD si^jd -Jiffla 'noa '?i^a laV 214 EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. APPEND. No. VI. (Comp. § 78 seq.) \^m ^33 -132 ins 1&3 nn^ 'tiiaB tons laa Via No. VII. (Comp. § 78 seq.) {'TSp nes IBS IBD na& "riaD T:»a nsV 15^ nnr No. VIII. (Comp. § 78 seq.) { np_& :iDB a!3£ tj&s ^i^s aVs ^ts ^(^'^ 'las n^5 No. IX. (Comp. § 78 seq.) J 5113 153 ana naa I — T — T — T •• T No. X. (§ 224 seq. Par. III. IV.) { at? na? na:? yn "^m nnn apn Y&ri tiian "^sn No. XI. (§ 229 seq. Par. V.) t-ina ns'D V^ia ij^a pizj V^b ina nnsa iriT No. XII. (§ 233 seq. Par. VI.) yai n^D na^a nas naus nss mi tnaa ?Va nua No. XIII. (Comp. § 111 seq. also Par. V, etc.) SB"! pn-j nn-j yip-j ajn nsn pn-i nnn 5iin(a) tann Y19 ffl-iD y-ia qin y-it laii 'rini Bia -^jia (6) tnai -im "lat -lya -iva nrm nsa laa -ids -iaD(c) APPEND. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 215 No. XIV. (§224 seq. Par. IV.) thii nni^ m bt^iA ^nna iia u^a -i:s« pna ^ai* No. XV. (§ 240 seq. Par. VII.) tnsK n^K *nn^« *&Di« nai* !?aj< *Tn>{ "nx TT TT "*▼ '""T ~"T ""T ~T "T No. XVI. (§ 243 seq. Par. VIII.) nd"^ dp'^ I-)'' &o^ i?^ Hb^ ns^ yi^ Vn^ bn'' («) } U-in yyi qy^ -^^jh tj-)^ yj?^ -)j?^ -ja^ y^i ^ijn; (6) No. XVII. (§248 seq. Par. IX.) *{ iD^ 153'' nuj^ pD^ -ia^ ^V"^ nt}'' ~"T I ~T " T I ""T ~T ~*T "T No. XVIII. (§ 251. Par. X.) { -laji 121 ps-i -1&1 ID-'— t ys'' ns'^ isi ns'' — T ~*T r ~T ""T — T ~T — T "T "T No. XIX. (§ 252 seq. Par. XI.) { T2ity: ns2 ^535 bii t3p_: !ji:3 qia '^D3 -115 3>53 Dn3 No. XX. (§ 256 seq. Par. XII.) bby bbj2 wm ijsa bb'a pp_T V!?'i ^w V!35 !?!?2 tt2 tnns No. XXI. (§ 267 seq. Par. XIII. XIV.) 5)13 51& -ii5> qi? -lis n^nB w pid niffl niPi («) { nix aiD ^is 216 EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. APPEND. n''! )^^ an. (c) No. XXII. (§ 276 seq. Par. XV.) • K2: 4*^5 (»«!:») s<^a jsi^3 Nan J^a'n ^m ft<-)S .roa T T No. XXIII. (§ 280 seq. Par. XVI.) nss nsa inns n&s riDn nsT nfl'i nn- nVs nsa } nrd n"n mp nap nip No. XXIV. (§ 293.) t risJ3 nm n'Dt nn'jj nnui miS nsaj NOUNS MASCULINE. No. XXV. (§ 345 seq. Par. XXV.) nis^a -lias p^^s nis i^a ia yiiT ainV Vip T^? No. XXVI. {§ 347 seq. Par. XXV.) ■j^y^a naya ^jyn natsa no^a nsij* Va^a Va'^n T T T T r f'i — No. XXVII. {§ 350 seq. Par. XXV.) ■j'lan ^isa Dipa pax niTx lian fi^a ms? ^i^ip^ APPEND. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 217 No. XXVIII. (§ 353 seq. Par. XXV.) )?-ja sm by^ nay yj? pm ymi nni -la; la'in Vna T T No. XXIX. (§ 356 seq. Par. XXV.) &Dn pn? tj^s Hy nsp ^n^ ti-ij* ^w "^i-i^ nna No. XXX. (§359 seq. Par. XXV.) (1) .a form, 5 363. ■jna -i^a ^^3 p,p. in:?. dSD nnn ibj t^ni. "j^.ij. inN j ntin cnV nDD y^so yns (2) £ form, 5 364. 13S -IU33 np.b fi«!33 "in;', nna nnj ^i*! d'^3 lan tl^.n nns -ii? -12,2 pisn ann ijp.n aj: ^^aa ^ds { pa? (3) form, $ 365. nnh "iBis ^yb' -ids ins niN ^-la -la.jt ^ni« ]s.j* (4) A form in verbs <^y and ly, $ 366. ■^y_ t-h Y^n -i^a )y_ n^d "i^s ^^^3 ^>^ Tjin iicj } (i nni< 5 i:Bri3 -laia ^tii ■]?> nsio -inb No. XXXII. (§ 374 seq. Par. XXV.) '^n nax ^a 55 a"^ ;n^« in T^a laa ph in p m tjn uhii paya '^fflna naaij, id^ ^53t ^nn p^p^ 22? t? No. XXXIII. (§ 377 seq. Par. XXV.) nja nnia ni^ia non^ nn. nixa n^-ia niin ns^ ; nsaa riEi52 riDna nbnn n-iT52 NOUNS FEMININE. No. XXXIV. (§ 380 seq. Par. XXVI.) t^^'bn n^ajii^ nV3?B n?^^^ npis-; nsjia nsiia ni'in rj'jnm win n^iy n-iiap nn^es wn^ nsibs APPEND. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 219 No. XXXV. (§ 383 seq. Par. XXVI.) nn?in nsaV mj«sn ni<^S3 n^ps n^sn nVna } nVs nsyia ms nan nasa No. XXXVI. (§387 seq. Par. XXVI.) ns-in n^s? muj^ n-i33 naa'i^ na^n nssn nep.a { nni nn-ip napy mnD nnnx n'^ay nnan No. XXXVII. (§390 seq. Par. XXVI.) n^.^aa np.Da npoa nnsa nW^ nnnis nan'in n-i>3 n^sna nibtoa nm^cj n'j.s^.a nyiia n-js'^a {npVnanm APPENDIX, NOTES TO THE APPENDIX. The object proposed by the selections of Hebrew words in this appendix, is, to fnrnish the student with examples, in order to aid him in the practice of declining, both viva voce and by writing out, the various forms of words as made by conjugation, declension, etc. If learner and teacher will have the patience to go through with these, in regular course, they may be assured that a more radical knowledge of grammatical forms will be obtained, in this way, than can be done by reading over the Hebrew grammar and simply committing it to memory, for almost any limited period of time which can be named. It is not intended, however, that Praxis in this way should, at the outset, be the sole and exclusive occupation of the student, for any considerable length of time. A few lessons, devoted entirely to it, will impart a facility of pursuing it, which will make it after- wards more of a pleasure than of a toil. After such lessons, the student can begin with the study of Part 1., and proceed on regu- larly. In the mean time, however, as soon as he begins to make some progress in Part I., one paradigm at least, under some one of Nos. I — XXXVII. in this appendix, should be either written out, or recited viva voce, as often as he recites a lesson in Part I. It is best, by all means, to write out paradigms, at least one half of the time employed in the exercises on the appendix. It will be useful, for the other half, to recite them viva voce. This will accomplish two objects at the same time ; it will impart a facility in Hebrew chirography, (which is altogether desirable) ; and it will train the mind of the student to habits of nice grammatical and orthographi- cal accuracy, which cannot be acquired equally well in any other way. But the student need not write out all his paradigms fully. 222 NOTES ON NO. I II. APPEND. Of some, he may make skeletons ; writing out only the 3d persons singular and plural of the Praeter and Future, with the Inf., Imp., and Participles. But let him also write out many paradigms _/«%. And where there is a class, and the instructer attends to them all at the same time, the correction of one exemplar, which exhibits a written paradigm, (if the correction be made viva voce and in presence of the class), will of course serve for the paradigms of all the class ; as they can be required each one to correct his own paradigm, while in the lecture room, agreeably to the directions of the instructer. I would earnestly recommend to all teachers and learners, who make use of this Chrestomathy, to pursue the method here pointed out. Experience has long since taught me, that seemingly rapid advances, at the commencement of Hebrew study, are not to be regarded as being of course real advances. He will ulti- mately make the most rapid and sure progress, who carefuUy, deliberately, and with great pains-taking as to grammatical princi- ples, lays a foundation broad and deep, on which he may erect a superstructure at his will. I venture to pledge myself, that if the method above recommended be followed, neither learner nor teach- er will ever see cause to regret it ; nay, that both will become fliUy persuaded of its usefulness and importance. The examples in No. I. are chosen, with much pains-taking, from roots which have neither Gutturals, nor Cluiescents, nor Aspi- rates in them, in order that the student may have as little difficul- ty as possible to encounter, in the first stages of his praxis. A few of the examples have a final Resh; but such a Resh usually makes no irregularity, excepting that the future (and its cognates) of such verbs not unfrequently has a Pattahh final. But in the ex- amples here selected, this is not the case ; and all, therefore, which are ranged under a, may be declined, in respect to their vowels, af- ter the model of h'a^ . Those under 6 are declined after the manner of Xl'^ in Par. I. of the regular verbs. There are but very few verbs of this kind. In No. II., the examples under a resemble lb"' , bB'iJ , b^^tt3 in Par. II. of the regular verbs. The student must resort to the APPEND. NOTES ON NO. II VI. 223 lexicon, in order to determine the forms of the respective Fu- tures, etc. The verb bNia properly belongs to verbs S Guttural; but it was necessary to employ it here, in order to exhibit the pecu- liar forms of the 2d person plural in the Praeter of Kal. The examples under 6 comprehend nearly all the -verbs Jinal Hholem, that have three radicals in Kal Praeter. Of the last four, no Inf., Future, or Imper. occurs. No. III. exhibits verbs whose jfrsf radical is an aspirate. In writing out the paradigms, the student must recur to the princi- ples respecting Dagesh kne, in §§ 79—82. E. g. hm , (a not S) 79. 1, the same principle applying to a single word, which ap- plies to the beginning of a chapter or verse ; Fut. H/DS'; , 80. Imp. iJa-j etc.— Niphal baas , by the principle in 80 ; Fut. baa'^ , 78, Note 2.— Piel Fut. i'73a^ 80.— Pual Fut. bas; , 80.— Hiphil b"'ai!i , 80.— Hophal baart , 80.— Hithp. baan!! , 79. 2 ; and so of all the other examples in this species of verbs. No. IV. exhibits verbs with an Aspirate for- the middle radi- cal. Kal Inf Sat , 80 ; Fut. Ssr , 79. 2 and 81. 2, Note 2 ; Imp. -ibt , ■'-15T , 80 ; Part. -i5t , 80.— Niph. 'i?';: , 79. 2 ; Fut. I^n , 80.— Piel -iST , 71, also 78. Note 2.— Pual -i3T , ib.— Hiph. T'STrt , 79. 2.— Hoph. "i3Tn , ib.— Hith. ISinrt , 71, also 78. Note 2. ' ' No. V. exhibits verbs with an Aspirate for their final radical. Kal Inf const, na^ ; Fut. I'ab': ; Imp. I'ab ; Part. IMi!? .—Niph. ia;?3 .—Piel 'ra.b .—Pual Ijab .— Hiph. T'abn .—Hoph. labii .— Hith. "labnn ; all according to the principle in § 80. Also Imp. Fem. ■'■jai; , Um-dU (not na^ Um-di), 81.1; plur. ^lab , ibid. The same is the case in the Imp. of Nos. VII. VIII. IX. which follow ; e.g. Imp. nsD, ""IBD; I'pB , "''liJS ; anS, ■'^n3, etc.; comp. 81. 1, 2, and Notes. The same principle applies, of course, to all cases of the like nature. No. VI. exhibits verbs with two aspirates for the two first ra- dicals. Kal ms, 79. 1, and 80;* Fut. ttjas-: , 80 and 81. Note 2, also 79. 2 ; Part. "23513 , 79. 1, also 80.— Niph. -iiass , 80, also 79. * In accumulated references like this case and otliers wliich follow, the design is, that they should answer to the various cases in which Daghesh lene is admitted or excluded, as they successively follow each other in each word. 224 NOTES ON NO. VI XIV. APPEND. 2, comp. 81. Note 2 ; Fut. lUliy] , yik-korbhesh, 71 and 78. Note 3, also 80.— Piel tt5?3,79. 1, also 71.— Pual UJ33, ibid.— Hiph. ffl-'asn, 80, also 79. 2.— Hoph. UiaSrr, ibid.— Hith. -asanrt, 79. 2, also 71 and 78. Note 2. No. VII. exhibits verbs with ttoo aspirates for the two ^nal let- ters. Kal. Praet. TSb , 80 ; Future ■is):': , 79. 2, also 80.— Niph. T3b3, ibid.; Fut. li^-] , 80.— Piel nsb .— Pual 13b, 71, also 80. Hiph. TisT], 79. 2, also 80.— Hoph. 13):?;, 79.2, also 80.— Hith. 15'rnn , 71 and 80. No. VIII. exhibits verbs with aspirates for the Jirst and third radicals. Kal Praet. SjS , 79. 1, also 80 ; Fut. STS';) , 80 ; Part. ans , 79. 1, also 80.— Niphal :313D , 80 ; Fut. ajS': , 71, also 80. —Piel 373 , 79. 1, also 80.— Pual iiT3 , ibid.— Hiph. S'^tSri , 80.— Hoph. aprt , ibid.— Hith. aj.inri , 79. 2, also 80. No. IX. exhibits verbs with Aspirates for all their radicals. There are very few of these in the Hebrew language. Kal Praet. ans , 79. 1, also 80 ; Fut. ans-; , 80, also 79. 2.— Niph. inS: , 80, also 79. 2 ; Fut. Niph. an3^ , 71, also 80.— Piel 3173 .—Pual 3r)3 , 79. 1, also 71.— Hiph. i-insn , 80, also 79. 2. Hoph. ansn , ibid.— Hith. amnri , 80 and 79. 2, also 71. If the student will diligently and faithfully pursue the writingoff of the various paradigms with aspirates^ he will, in this way, speedily acquire a familiar knowledge, not only of the usual forms of regular verbs in general, but of all the minutiae which pertain to the mode of writing them when they contain aspirates, in all their different conjugations, moods, and tenses. Nos. X. XI. XII. exhibit verbs B guttural, » guttural, and b " guttural. The diversities of the Future, Imperfect, etc. are to be sought for in the lexicon. The exercises in these are very impor- tant, with respect to the attainment of a proper knowledge of the manner in which the composite Shevas are employed in the He- brew ; and also of a knowledge of the manner in which the guttu- rals aiFect the vowels, employed in connection with them. No. XIII. exhibits examples of verbs with Resh ; viz. (a) Verbs -IE. (6) Verbs l'i> . (c) Verbs lV In these it will be useful for the learner to exercise himself, so as to acquire, by experience, an accurate knowledge of the various departures from regular anal- ogy, which these species of verbs exhibit. No. XIV. exhibits verbs NS, whose N is treated as a Guttural. APPEND. NOTES ON NO. XVI XIX. 225 The principles by which these are regulated, are to be sought for in § 224, seq., which treat of verbs Pe Guttural. SnN (marked with*) has two forms ; for which consult the lexicon. No. XV. exhibits verbs NS, with a quiescent N. Those with (*) have two forms; see Lex. Those with final rt, may be omit- ted until after the exercises in verbs rtb . No. XVI. exhibits, (a) Verbs of the first class 'D, with Fut. Tseri in both syllables. Actual instances of the Fut. do not occur in all the examples, but they are ranged according to probability ; §244.0!. (6) Verbs with final Pattahh and T^BwAt Hhireq long ; § 244. 6. It should be added, that the penult syllable, rather than the ultimate, distinguishes these two species of verbs ; e. g. S'^;; , Tn;; belong to the class a, because they have Tseri in the penult, and take Pattahh final only because of a Guttural or.Resh, §113. But in the class b, the penult vowel is Hhireq ; and besides this, the Imp., Inf , ajnd Fut. usually retain the first radical, viz. the Yodh. No. XVII. exhibits all the verbs of the second class ""S. Of these *'1D^ belongs, in Kal, to class 3d ; it is only in Hiphil, that its characteristics are developed. It should be noted, too, that ^a^ and fp-l , produced as examples in § 249 of the Grammar, are not reckoned in the list contained in § 248. Note. This is because ^S^ , in one form and meaning of it, belongs to verbs of Class I. It is only when it has the sense oi finger e, that it belongs to Class II. As to yji"' , it has no Hiphil, and consequently there is no cer- tain means by which we can characterise it ; but the corresponding Arabic verb, viz. JiXj , belongs to the genuine class of "'D in that language. No. XVIII. exhibits all the verbs of Class III., whether they belong wholly or partly to this species. Further examination of this class of verbs makes me more inclined to assign them, in gen- eral, to roots '(S, as Simonis and Eichhorn have done. But these lexicographers are not consistent throughout with themselves. For example ; they call the Daghesh in the Inf. of Its; , (in iD'^); 2 Chron. 31: 7), Dag. affectuosum (!) ; and the Fut. of '^%1 , viz. "I'S'] etc., they say, is borrowed from ISJ ; to which, however, they assign no meaning kindred with that of SS']. So also, JlJ'iia^ 29 226 NOTES ON NO. XVIII XXVIII. APPPEND. (1 Sam. 6: 12) is said to borrow its form from TiaJJ ; all of which does not stand well together. As to the form na^ , it may be referred to the root ntij , Hiph. n'^sri, formed according to §261, in a manner resembling that of the Chaldee. But Ae student had better follow the lexicons in his praxis ; I mean such lexicons as conform to the arrangement of Gesenius, which differs from that of Simonis. No. XIX. exhibits verbs 'JB , whose different Futures, Impera- tives, Infinitives, etc., must be sought for in the lexicon. Nos. XX. XXI. exhibit verbs yS and iy , many of which also present more or less variations from the paradigms ; all of which should be noticed in the exercises upon them. In No. XXI., a exhibits such verbs as have 1 quiescent; 6 such as have a regular moveable 1, and are to be regularly declined ; c verbs Ayin Yodh, which exhibit peculiar forms in Kal only. No. XXII. presents verbs Nb, with various combinations of As- pirates, Gutturals, etc. ; to which due attention should be paid. No. XXIII. consists of verbs nb, in most of their varieties. The student should practise writing off and declining those which have Gutturals, Resh, etc., in them, as well as the others. The lex- icon will give him the various forms in the different conjugations. No. XXIV. contains verbs ^ib, the peculiarities of which are designated in § 393. Note. For verbs doubly anomalous, see Grammar $-294 seq., which exhibits nearly all the cases that occur. NOUNS MASCULINE. No. XXV. nouns of Dec. I., with immutable vowels. The word n=l Slra belongs here, only in its singular number. No. XXVI. nouns of Dec. II., with only the final vowel mutable. No. XXVII. nouns of Dec. III., with only the penult vowel mutable. No. XXVIII. nouns of Dec. IV., with the ultimate and penult vowels mutable. The few which have a Segholate form in the construct state, may be discovered by consulting the lexicon ; see § 355. 5. APPEND. NOTES ON NO. XXIX — XXXVII. 227 No. XXIX. nouns of Dec. V., with ultimate and penult vowels mutable, but in a peculiar way, so far as it respects the construct state ; § 358. 3. No. XXX. exhibits nouns of Dec. VI., which has a large varie- ty of forms. The divisions, 1. 2. 3. etc., explain themselves. The student should in a particular manner bestow his attention on this declension, both on account of its frequency in the language, and the difficulties which attend it. No. XXXI. nouns of Dee. VII., all of which seem to be mere participiah, having the form of the Part, present in Kal, and almost exclusively an active sense. No. XXXII. exhibits nouns of Dec. VIII., which are not very numerous in the language. In making out the various forms, the student will be careful to note, that for the vowel-changes he must consult the other declensions, according to the nature of the vow- els in the words belonging to this. It is the reduplication of the last letter of the ground-form, in case of accession, and this only, which characterises Dec. VIII. No. XXXIII. nouns of Dec. IX. These are quite uniform in their changes, and are but a small class in respect to number. NOUNS FEMININE. Nos. XXXIV — XXXVII. exhibit the various classes of fem. nouns. The anomalous plurals of Dec. XIII. will require particu- lar attention. The lexicons afford the necessary aid for making" out the various forms of them. INDEX. PART I. EASY SENTENCES FOR BEGINNERS. PART II. SEIiECT PORTIONS OF PROSE. Faga. I. Original creation, Gen. 1: 1, 2 12 II. The work of the first day, Gen. 1: 3—5 ... 12 III. The work of the second day, Gen. 1: 6—8 ... 12 IV. The work of the thu-d day. Gen. 1:9— 13 ... 13 V. The work of the fourth day. Gen. 1 : 14—19 ... 13 VI. The work of the fifth day, Gen 1:20—23 ... 13 VII. The work of the sixth day. Gen. 1:24— 31 ... 14 VIII. The institution of the Sabbath, Gen. 2: 1—3 . . 15 IX. The formation of man, etc. Gen. 2: 7 — 17 ... 15 X. The formation of woman, Gen. 2: 18—25 ... 16 XI. Temptation and fall of our first parents, Gen. 3: 1 — 7 . 16 XII. Their trial and condemnation, Gen. 3: 8 — 19 . . 17 XIII. Wickedness and condemnation of the Antediluvians, Gen. 6: 5—8 18 XIV. Threat of destruction; and building of Noah's ark. Gen. 6: 13—22 18 XV. Entrance into the ark, and prevalence of the flood. Gen. 7: 7—24 19 XVI. Abatement of the flood. Noah and his family leave the ark. Gen. 8: 1—20 20 XVII. The building of Babel, Gen. 11: 1—9 ... 22 XVIII. First calling of Abraham, Gen. 12: 1—4 ... 22 XIX. Second promise to Abraham, Gen. 15: 1 — 6 . . 23 XX. Third promise to Abraham, Gen. 17: 1—8 ... 23 XXI. Abraham oifering up his son. Gen. 22: 1 — 19 . . 24 XXII. Appearance of Jehovah to Jacob, Gen. 35: 9 — 15 . 25 XXIII. Birth, education, and flight of Moses, Ex. 2: 1—15 . 26 XXIV. Appearance of Jehovah in the burning bush, Ex. 3: 1 — 6 27 XXV. Commission of Moses, Ex. 6: 1—11 .... 27 XXVI. Institution of the Passover, Ex. 12: 18— 33 . . 28 XXVII. The ten commandments, Ex. 20: 1—17 ... 29 XXVIII. Renewal of the same, Ex. 34:4— 8 ... 31 XXIX. Nadab and Abihu destroyed for offering strange fire. Lev. 10: 1—3 31 XXX. The blessing upon the people of Israel, Num. 6: 22 — ^27 31 230 INDEX. Pago. XXXI. Destruction of Korah and his company, Num. 16: 23 — 35 32 XXXII. Water brought from the rock, by Moses, Num. 20: 7—11 33 XXXIII. Various exhortations by Moses, Deut. 6: 4 — 9, etc. XXXIV. Death and burial of Moses, Deut. 34: 1—8 . XXXV. Passage of the river Jordan, Josh. 3: 9 — 17 XXXVI. The sun and moon an-ested in their course. Josh, 10: 12—14 XXXVII. Victory of Deborah and Barak, Judg. 4: 13—24 XXXVIII. Death of Samson, Judg. 16: 23—31 . XXXIX. The calhng of Samuel, 1 Sam. 3: 1—14 XL. Combat of David with Goliath, 1 Sam. 17: 38—51 PART III. SELECT PORTIONS OF POETRY, XLI. Hallelujah Psalm, Ps. 150 XLII. Exhortation to bless God, Ps. 134 XLIII. Exhortation to praise God, Ps. 117 XLIV. God our benefactor, Ps. 113 . XLV. God merciful and faithful, Ps. 103 . XL VI. God our Creator, Ps. 100 XL VII. God the mighty King, Ps. 93 XLVIII. God's kindness, Ps. 65 XLIX. God our refuge, Ps. 46 L. God who wields the thunder and lightning, Ps. 29 LI. The Lord our Shepherd, Ps. 23 . LIL The King of Glory, Ps. 24 . LIII. The book of nature and of revelation, Ps. 19 LIV. Who shall dwell with God? I^. 15 . LV. The lot of the righteous and of the wicked, Ps. 1 LVI. Longing after God, Ps. 84 LVII. Shortness and vanity of human life, Ps. 90 LVIII. The evils of intemperance, Prov. 23: 29—35 LIX. A vision of the night. Job 4: 12—21 . PART IV. PARABLES. LX. Parable of Nathan, 2 Sam. 12: 1—7 LXL Parable of Jotham, Judg. 9: 6— 20 LXII. Parable of the vineyai-d, Is. 5: 1 — 1 . LXIII. Parable of the vine, Ps. 80: 9—20 . LXIV. Parable of the eagle and the cedai-, Ezek. 17: 1—10 INDEX. 231 NOTES. Notes on Part I. . 63 , No. 33 . 151 Notes on Part II. Explanations 77 No. 34 . 152 No. 1 79 No. 35 . 153 No. 2 81 No. 36 . 154 No. 3 82 No. 37 . 155 No. 4 83 No. 38 . 156 No. 5 84 No. 39 . 158 No. 6 85 No. 40 . 159 No. 7 86 Part III. Heb. Poetry . . 161 No. 8 90 No. 41 . 163 No. 9 94 No. 42 . 165 No. 10 102 No. 43 . 166 No. 11 106 No. 44 . 166 No. 12 111 No. 45 . 167 No. 13 . 115 No. 46 . 169 No. 14 . 116 No. 47 . 170 No. 15 . 118 No. 48 . 171 No. 16 . 121 No. 49 . 173 No. 17 . 124 No. 50 . 176 No. 18 . 127 No. 51 . 178 No. 19 . 129 No. 52 , 180 No. 20 . 130 No. 53 . 184 No. 21 . 131 No. 54 . 187 No. 22 . 133 No. 55 . 188 No. 23 . 134 No. 56 . 190 No. 24 . 137 No. 57 . 192 No. 25 . 137 No. 58 . 195 No. 26 . 139 No. 59 . 197 No. 27 . 140 Notes on Pt. IV • 1 No. 60 . 199 No. 28 . 147 Parables. No. 29 . 147 No. 61 . 200 No. 30 . 148 No. 62 . 202 No. 31 . 149 No. 63 . 204 No. 32 A . 151 No. 64 . 207 PPE NDIX. Examples for Praxis i . • 213 Notes . . ■ 221